The Warehouse Group Limited FY23 Results
Results for announcement to the market
Name of issuer The Warehouse Group Limited
Reporting Period 52 weeks to 30 July 2023
Previous Reporting Period 52 weeks to 31 July 2022
Currency New Zealand dollars
$3,399,112
$3,399,112
$29,937
$29,937
Final Dividend
Record Date 16 November 2023
Dividend Payment Date 01 December 2023
Contact phone number
Contact email address
Date of release through MAP
Audited financial statements accompany this announcement.
Jonathan.Oram@thewarehouse.co.nz
28 September 2023
Authority for this announcement
Name of person authorised to
make this announcement
Jonathan Oram (Group Chief Financial Officer)
Contact person for this
announcement
Jonathan Oram (Group Chief Financial Officer)
(09) 489 7000
Prior comparable period
Net tangible assets per
Quoted Equity Security
$0.680 (30 July 2023) $0.780 (31 July 2022)
A brief explanation of any of
the figures above necessary
to enable the figures to be
understood
The investor presentation and media release which accompany this
announcement, provide information and commentary to explain the financial
performance of the Group for the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023.
Amount per Quoted Equity
Security
$0.08000000
Imputed amount per
Quoted Equity Security
$0.03111111
Current period
Total Revenue up 3.2 %
Net profit/(loss) from
continuing operations
down (65.6)%
Total net profit/(loss) down (65.6)%
Revenue from continuing
operations
up 3.2 %
The Warehouse Group Limited
Results for announcement (for Equity and Debt Security issuer)
Amount (000s)Percentage change
---
FY23 Interim Results
Six months ending 29 January 2023
ANNUAL
RESULTS
FY23
28 September 2023
Chair’s Update –Joan Withers
Group Update –Nick Grayston
Group Financial Results –Jonathan Oram
FY24 Outlook
Appendix –Additional Information
Glossary
03
08
17
30
33
40
2
CONTENTS
CHAIR’S
UPDATE
3
JOAN WITHERS
4
•We are reporting a Group sales result of $3.4 billion up 3.2% on FY22, including a record
sales result for The Warehouse of $1.9 billion in what has been a very tough economic
environment, and ending the year in a strong financial position.
•While the first half saw significant sales growth of 4.8%, this slowed in the second half to
1.4%.
•It has been a challenging trading environment with Kiwi families experiencing rising inflation,
increased cost of living and rising interest rates, which has intersected with the Group being
mid-way through a transformation programme and in a peakyear of project spend.
•The planned increase in Cost of Doing Business, in particular around IS costs, while facing
pressure on our Gross Profit Margin exacerbated our challenges. The pressures on our
Gross Profit Margin were particularly acute in the first half with higher promotional activity and
through shipping delays and congestion.
•Our response was a strategic reprioritisation with a focus on operational performance,
managing Gross Margin, reducing Cost of Doing Business, and rebalancing project spend.
•While initiatives have been put in place, we have not been able to completely offset ongoing
cost increases. However, we are pleased to have recovered some of the Gross Profit Margin
decline experienced in the first half, and our Cost of Doing Business has decreased as a
percentage of sales compared to prior year as a result of actions taken.
•We stand by our purpose of helping Kiwis live better every day and our vision to make
sustainable living easy and affordable for everyone –for the benefit of our customers, our
community, and our planet, while providing sustainable long-term return for our shareholders.
STRONG SALES IN A CHALLENGING YEAR
5
2023
AT A GLANCE
UP 3.2%
ON FY22
3,071.4
3,172.8
3,414.6
3,294.3
3,399.1
FY19FY20FY21FY22FY23
UP 10.7%
ON FY19
(2.6% CAGR)
SALES
$M
GROSS
PROFIT
$M
74.1
32.1
167.2
85.5
37.5
FY19FY20FY21FY22FY23
ADJUSTED
NPAT
1
$M
DOWN 2.4%
ON FY22
UP 10.5%
ON FY19
(2.5% CAGR)
DOWN 56.2%
ON FY22
1,028.6
1,034.9
1,241.4
1,164.4
1,136.7
33.5%
32.6%
36.4%
35.3%
33.4%
0%
10%
20%
30%
40%
0
200
400
600
800
1,000
1,200
1,400
FY19FY20FY21FY22FY23
Gross ProfitGross Profit Margin
76.2
-168.1
-160.5
41.2
48.1
FY19FY20FY21FY22FY23
NET
DEBT /
(CASH)
$M
1.FY21 Adjusted NPAT has been restated for Cloud Computing adjustments (“SaaS”).
FY19 and FY20 are not adjusted for the SaaS accounting policy change.
LIQUIDITY HEADROOM $421.9M
(FY22: $378.8M)
33% of private label sales from
products with sustainable
attributes (46,637 products
accounting for over $343 million in
sales), up from 22% in FY22.
Diverted 199 tonnes of post-
consumer waste from landfill –
Soft plastics, e-waste, ink and
toners, and other hard to recycle
items.
GHG emissions
7,657t CO2e Scope 1 and 2
emissions, decrease of 43.3%
from FY22
1
.
$4.1 million raised for New Zealand
charities and communities
($83.4 million since 1995).
Zero Waste
Diverted 72.9%operational
waste from landfill.
THE ROADMAP TO NET ZERO
100% EV Light Passenger Fleet
inFY23 –reaching our target to be
100% by 2025 2 years early.
6
6
Agreement signed with
Lodestone –for purchase of solar
generated electricity to power all sites
including stores, DCs and SSO by
2026.
XRB Aotearoa New Zealand
Climate Standards –participant in
setting the NZ Retail sector scenarios.
We are on the journey to develop
these frameworks for reporting in
FY24.
1.The significant reduction is in our Scope 2 emissions primarily due to updated emissions factors released by Ministry for the
Environment (“MfE”) in FY23, which also required a restatement of our FY20 base year, and subsequent years.While our electricity
consumption decreased 2.5% compared to FY22 and decreased 6.0% compared to FY20, the average electricity emission factor
decreased 56% in FY23 compared to FY22.
•The Group dividend policy is to distribute at least 70% of the Group's full year
adjusted net profit after tax, at the discretion of the Board, and subject to trading
performance, market conditions and liquidity requirements.
•Net debt at year end was $48.1 million, down from $83.4 million at the FY23 half year
and slightly higher than $41.2 million in FY22. Available liquidity at year end was
$421.9 million.
•We have significantly reduced our planned project expenditure
1
to $80 million for
FY24 versus $154.4 million in FY23.
•The economic environment in New Zealand continues to be challenging, and although
the Group’s largest brand The Warehouse is faring well, overall Group trading
performance remains uncertain.
•Given the return of net debt to levels that meet our target liquidity range of $350 -
$450 million, the Board is pleased to declare a final dividend of 8.0 cents per share.
•The record date for the dividend will be 16 November 2023 and will be paid on
1 December 2023.
10.0
9.0
13.0
10.0
6.08.0
17.5
10.0
8.0
5.0
16.0
17.0
35.5
20.0
8.0
FY18FY19FY20FY21FY22FY23
Historical Dividends (cps)
InterimFinalSpecial
7
FY23 FINAL DIVIDEND
1.Total project expenditure includes capital expenditure, prepayments, SaaS
expenditure and project operating expenditure.
GROUP
UPDATE
8
NICK GRAYSTON
STRATEGIC REPRIORITISATION
WE HAVE A DIVERSIFIED RETAIL PORTFOLIO PROVIDING CUSTOMERS A WIDE RANGE OF SOLUTIONS
•It has been a challenging 12 months, particularly with the poor performance from Torpedo7. Customers have felt the pinch on their disposable
income with rising inflation, cost of living, increased interest rates, and a preference shift towards services and experiences over goods.
•We planned for an increase in Cost of Doing Business, in particular around IS costs, but faced more than expected pressure onour Gross Profit
Margin through promotional activity and cost of goods while trying to deliver value to our customers. We made the conscious choice to continue the
investment to accelerate our transformation programme which drove increased CODB, particularly IS operational expenditure anddepreciation.
•After a tough first half, which saw margins and profitability impacted, we undertook a strategic reprioritisation to improve performance –protecting
the impact on our own operations and near term operating profit, pausing investment on some projects, and focussing on actions to provide
customers with products at great value.
•We are focused on reducing IS costs as we move through peak investment phase, reducing cost to serve, and improving operatingperformance.
While it’s early days we have seen some improvement come through in the second half financial performance. I am encouraged that we are better
positioned to weather the economic headwinds that we expect to continue in the year ahead.
Reduce Cost of Doing Business –roll out initiatives to
manage labour cost and realise information spend benefits
Project Expenditure –rebalance capital expenditure to align
with reprioritisation and fit within reduced envelope
Integration of TheMarket.com and Torpedo7 –bring these
brands into the Agile operating structure as planned
Growth in Grocery –including Market Kitchen and fresh
offering to deliver what customers need at competitive prices
Group membership –continue to build MarketClub and other
membership programmes to leverage competitive advantage
Focus on operational performance –minimise cost to
serve, manage gross profit margin and reduce working capital
Improving financial performance
Improving operational efficiency and customer offering
9
10
10
What we said we would doWhat we have done
Reprioritised transformation to concentrate on
EBIT delivery.
Some core system implementations are coming
to an end and we are delaying some digital
initiatives and reducing capital expenditure
going forward.
•Restructured our SSO teams to deliver $24m of annualised benefit.
•Significantly reduced the operating costs of the TheMarketwith H1 loss of $16 million
reduced to $6 million in H2. FY24 operating loss from TheMarketis expected to be less
than $5 million.
•Eliminated incremental MarketClubpromotional spend compared to $14m spent in H1.
•Deferred spend ~$30 million including CDP automation, digital wallet, and unified app,
to manage project spend while core projects are delivered –ERPFI, GOMS and ERP-
T7.
Continue to reduce store labour costs by driving
productivity improvements.
•Total employee expenses held flat as % of sales on FY22, despite wage inflation
pressures.
•TWL CODB decreased as a % of sales from 35.9% in FY22 to 33.6% in FY23.
Closure of 1-day operations and integration of
The Market and T7 into Agile.
•Closed 1-day website, exited 1-day distribution centre, and sold through
1-day inventory.
•TheMarket.com moved to Agile structure with greater focus on Group Marketplace and
we are assessing the future platform direction.
•Torpedo7 moved to Agile structure in August 2023, with a recovery plan in place, to be
reassessed at FY24 H1.
Grow profitable grocery offering while offering
affordable essentials to Kiwis.
•Increased Market Kitchen range to include 64 different products.
•Improved grocery supply chain capability.
•SKU reduction is underway.
•Improved margin management –real time pricing, reactive pricing to increased cost of
product, reduced handling through use of bulk stacks.
Closer inventory control –reduce by financial
year end.
•Significantly reduced inventory from half year with closing inventory of $493.3 million
compared to $562.3 million at FY22 and $617.8 million at FY23 H1.
•System projects commenced to further improve inventory management.
ACTIONS TAKEN IN THE SECOND HALF
SalesGross Profit
(1)
Operating Profit
(2)
FY23
$ million
FY22
$ millionVariance
FY23
$ million
% margin
FY22
$ million
% margin
Variance
vs FY22
%
FY23
$ million
% margin
FY22
$ million
% margin
Variance
vs FY22
%
1,892.4 1,726.9 9.6%708.5 696.6 1.7%71.6 75.7 -5.5%
37.4%40.3%-290 bps3.8%4.4%(60 bps)
248.6 249.7 -0.4%116.6 118.6 -1.7%23.0 23.1 -0.2%
46.9%47.5%-60 bps9.3%9.2%10 bps
1,061.0 1,096.7 -3.3%233.1 254.1 -8.2%27.3 53.9 -49.3%
22.0%23.2%-120 bps2.6%4.9%(230 bps)
162.2 171.5 -5.4%48.561.8 -21.5%(22.2)(2.2)-891.3%
29.9%36.0%-610 bps-13.7%-1.3%(1,240 bps)
33.7 50.0 -32.6%(22.0)(24.7)11.0%
1.3 (0.5)-338.9%(16.5)(9.0)-84.7%
3,399.1 3,294.2 3.2%1,136.71,164.4-2.4%61.2116.8-47.6%
11
Other
(3)
1.Total Group Gross Profit includes $30.0 million attributable to TheMarketand other group allocations.
2.Operating Profit includes the impact of SaaS but excludes the impact of NZ IFRS16 and unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure. For a reconciliation between Operating Profit and Reported
EBIT refer to Slide 19 of this presentation and Note 2 of the Financial Statements for the year ended 30 July 2023.
3.Other items in operating profit include corporate costs and other unallocated overheads.
Core Agile brands Operating Profit decreased 20% from $152.7 million to $121.9 million.
DIVISIONAL SUMMARY
$121.9m$152.7m
12
TORPEDO7 RECOVERY PLAN
We have experienced significant challenges with Torpedo7 which delivered an operating
loss for the year of $22.2 million.
•Decreased consumer demand, consistent with the global decline in the bike market,
significantly impacted sales and profitability.
•We have provided for an inventory impairment of $4.6 million against Torpedo7 to manage
excess and aged stock and have put a recovery plan in place for the business.
•Addressing Torpedo7’s performance will be a major focus for the Group for FY24, and we will
provide an update on our progress at our FY24 1H update.
Improving Gross Profit Margin
•Reducing excess inventory
•Improving bike margin through brands and range
•Increasing apparel and private label
Reducing Cost of Doing Business
•Implementing and realising benefits of new ERP
•Integration of support team in Group Store Support Office
•Closing poor performing stores
•Focus on labour productivity
ECOSYSTEM
OUR INTEGRATED
13
•Our aim is to deliver a modern, integrated retail experience grounded in our purpose
of helping Kiwis live better every day, powered by a customer-centric ecosystem that
makes shopping with The Warehouse Group easy and hassle-free while providing
more value for customers.
•Our ecosystem has strong foundations comprising our iconic brands, an established
store footprint, and market-leading digital assets.
•Our loyalty membership programme, MarketClub, is at the heart of our ecosystem.
There are now over 1.3 million MarketClub members across TheMarket.com and The
Warehouse. Throughmembership weachieve increased customer insights through
first party data.
•We are improving fulfilment capability and our cost-to-serve to our customers as part
of driving increased profitability in online and transitioning to an omnichannel model.
•Our retail media network MarketMedia, is generating new marketing and revenue
opportunities, launching in-store digital screen advertising across The Warehouse
and Noel Leeming stores, giving our brands and suppliers the opportunity to reach
customers while they are shopping.
•We are providing our customers with more payment options to help them get what
they want when they need it.
★★★★★
Customer review
103k+3P
SKUs from
71 merchants
at The
Warehouse
online
Group
GMV
1
$74.3m
1. Group Gross Merchandise Value (GMV) includes first and third party sales on TheMarket.com and Group Marketplace.
AND OUR MARKETPLACE STRATEGY
•Since its launch in 2019, TheMarket.com has grown at scale,
to develop a marketplace platform which thousands of
customers and brands want to engage with.
•We are taking the best of TheMarket.com and embedding itat
the core of our Group online strategy. As part of this strategy,
we have closed our 1-day operations and significantly
reduced stand-alone costs for TheMarket.com.
•Our Group Marketplace initiative launched in October 2022,
integrating some of the TheMarket.com products onto The
Warehouse website and app, and extending our range online,
providing over 103,000 third-party products from 71
merchants to our existing online customer base.
•Total Group GMV¹ of $74.3m in FY23, including marketplace
transactions across TheMarket.com and Group Marketplace.
•While Group Marketplace is still in its early days, we have
seen gooduptake from customers and suppliers are
responding positively to an additional channel for their
product.
14
15
MarketClub is our free-to-join membership programme that gives our
customers exclusive discounts and offers when shopping with us.
•In October 2021, we introduced MarketClub into The Warehouse, and this year we reached
a milestone of more than 1.3 million MarketClub members. Our Club members are our
most engaged customers, with the highest lifetime value.
•Currently, members can use MarketClub at The Warehouse through The Warehouse app,
our online store, or by scanning the app at our store checkouts. At TheMarket.com, we also
offer MarketClub+, a subscription service that provides free shipping on millions of eligible
items, VIP access to exclusive offers, priority customer service, and more.
•In FY23, MarketClub members saved nearly $18 million
1
with member discounts. The most
popular deals in FY23 were our $4 and $5 Tararua500g Butter, with over 220,000
customers scanning MarketClub to access the offer, proving an appetite for lower priced
grocery essentials.
•Every time a MarketClub member scans at The Warehouse, we donate a portion of the
proceeds to a charitable cause on their behalf. Since launching the platform in October
2021, we have donated over $1.6 million to various causes in New Zealand.
•MarketClub incremental promotional spend did impact margin in FY23 H1, and we have
eliminated promotional spend in the second half.
•Growing first party data across all our brands is a competitive advantage, particularly via
retail media opportunities. MarketClub is a foundational element of our ecosystem, and we
will continue to expand the platform.
15
1.Savings based on FY23 sales for MarketClubsale items Recommended Retail Price (RRP) less MarketClubsale price.
MARKETCLUB
More than
1.3M
MarketClub
members
$18m
saved by
MarketClub
members in
FY23
1
AFFORDABLE GROCERIES FOR KIWI FAMILIES
•FY23 saw our Grocery
1
range go from strength to strength as we demonstrated
our commitment to offering customers much needed value on essential
products, in all The Warehouse stores.
•Grocery sales grew 26.1% in FY23, contributing to 18.7% of The Warehouse
sales, including 91.8% growth in pantry and chilled, 26.6% growth in household
cleaning items, and 23.8% growth in pet care.
•We have taken significant steps forward in FY23, including our fresh fruit and
vegetable trial, now in 12 stores.
•Our private label Market Kitchen range now includes 64 products, helping give
Kiwis more affordable essentials and pantry staples, including our Market
Kitchen 500g salted butter for $5, and Market Kitchen 1kg coffee beans for $20.
•This year we improved our grocery supply chain capability and are reducing
SKUs. We have improved margin management with real time pricing to react to
increased cost of product, and reduced handling through the use ofbulk stacks
and shelf-ready trays.
•We continue to seek access to wholesale supply at equitable cost prices to
offer affordable groceries to Kiwi families. Legislative measures have presented
little relief so far.
1.Grocery categories include pantry, confectionery and snacks, beverages, household consumables, health and beauty, and pet care.
16
17
GROUP
FINANCIAL
RESULTS
17
JONATHAN ORAM
For the year ended 30 July 2023
1.Operating Profit includes the impact of SaaS but excludes the impact of NZ IFRS16 and unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure. For a reconciliation between Operating Profit and Reported
EBIT refer to Slide 19 of this presentation and Note 2 of the Financial Statements for the year ended 30 July 2023.
2.Adjusted Net Profit After Tax (NPAT) is before unusual itemsand is a non-GAAP measure.For a reconciliation between Reported and Adjusted NPAT refer to Slide 19 of this presentation and
Note 5 of the financial statements for the year ended 30 July 2023.
3.Reported NPAT refers to Net Profit After Tax attributable to shareholders of the parent.
•Sales growth of 3.2% was underpinned by a very strong first half with
sales growth of 4.8%, followed by a softer second half with sales
growth of 1.4% as cost of living impacted sales particularly in Noel
Leeming and Torpedo7.
•The Warehouse sales performed well with first half growth of 13.2%,
second half growth of 5.7%, and FY23 year growth of 9.6% -to
achieve record sales of $1.9 billion
•Gross Profit Margin declined 190 basis points compared to prior year
but saw a recovery from the first half decline of 200 basis points.
•Cost of Doing Business (“CODB”) increased in dollar terms, mainly
due to significant increases in informational systems, digital costs and
depreciation, but decreased slightly to 31.6% of total sales.
•Adjusted NPAT was $37.5 million in FY23, compared to $85.5 million
in FY22, a decrease of 56.2% and includes interest expense of
$9.1 million.
•Reported NPAT was $29.8 million in FY23, compared to $89.3 million
in FY22 due to restructuring costs and impairment of Zoom
investment.
$ million
FY23FY22Variance
Group Sales
3,399.1 3,294.3
3.2%
Gross Profit
1,136.7 1,164.4
-2.4%
Gross Profit Margin %33.4%35.3%(190) bps
Cost of doing business (“CODB”)
1,075.5 1,047.6
2.7%
CODB %31.6%31.8%(20) bps
Operating Profit
1
61.2 116.8
-47.6%
Operating Profit Margin %1.8%3.5%(170) bps
NPAT (adjusted)
2
37.5 85.5
-56.2%
NPAT (reported)
3
29.8 89.3
-66.6%
Operating Cash Flow
214.2 105.4
103.2%
Dividends (cps)
8.0 20.0
(12.0)
PERFORMANCE
GROUP
18
EBITNPAT
$ millionFY23FY22FY23FY22
Reported Earnings
88.1158.8 29.889.3
Gain on sale of property
(0.4) -(0.3) -
Restructuring costs
10.9-7.9-
Associate impairment
3.5-3.5-
Adjustments for NZIFRS16
2
(40.9) (42.0) (3.4) (3.8)
Adjusted Earnings
3
61.2116.8 37.585.5
1.To improve the understanding of underlying business performance, the Group adjusts profit for unusual and non-trading items. Unusual items include gain on sale of property, restructuring costs,
impairments, and the non-cash impact of applying the NZIFRS 16 lease accounting standard.
2.The NZIFRS16 adjustment of $40.9 million in FY23 (FY22: $42.0 million) represents the difference between the depreciation on Right-of-use-Assets and old NZGAAP rent expense. Refer to Note 2.2
of the financial statements for the year ended 30 July 2023 for further information.
3.Adjusted Net Profit After Tax (NPAT) is before unusual itemsand is a non-GAAP measure.A reconciliation between Reported and Adjusted NPAT can also be found inNote 5 of the financial
statements for the year ended 30 July 2023.
ADJUSTED EBIT AND NPAT RECONCILIATION
•The Group sold its Royal Oak (Auckland) store property
in July 2023 for $30.5 million as part of a sale and lease
back arrangement, which realised a gain on sale of
$0.4 million.
•Due to a decline in profitability in FY23 H1, the Group
restructured its operations to lower its cost of doing
business. Restructure costs of $10.9 million represent
staff redundancy costs, the write-off of redundant 1-day
business assets, and costs connected with the disposal
of the 1-day inventory.
•Associate impairment of $3.5 million represents
impairment of the Group’s investment in Zoom
Heathcare.
Adjustment for NZ IFRS16FY23FY22
Pre-NZ IFRS16 rent
135.9133.9
Right of use asset amortisation
(96.0)(94.6)
Gain on lease terminations
1.02.7
NZ IFRS16 impact on EBIT
40.942.0
19
FY23 RESULTS –H1 and H2
For the year ended 30 July 2023
H1H2
$ million
FY23 H1 FY22 H1Variance %FY23 H2FY22 H2Variance %
Group Sales
1,813.2
1,730.0 4.8%
1,585.91,564.31.4%
Gross Profit
592.4
599.6 -1.2%
544.3564.8-3.6%
Gross Profit Margin %
32.7%34.7%(200) bps34.3%36.1%(180) bps
Cost of doing business (“CODB”)
561.5
542.4 3.5%
514.0505.21.7%
CODB %
31.0%31.4%(40) bps32.4%32.3%12 bps
Operating Profit
1
30.9
57.2 -46.0%
30.359.6-49.1%
Operating Profit Margin %
1.7%3.3%(160) bps1.9%3.8%(190) bps
Adjusted NPAT
2
19.6
42.0 -53.4%
17.943.5-58.8%
Online sales as a % of sales
3
12.3%21.1%(879) bps
9.3%12.0%
(267) bps
1.Operating Profit includes the impact of SaaS but excludes the impact of NZ IFRS16 and unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure. For a reconciliation between Operating Profit and Reported EBIT
refer to Slide 19 of this presentation and Note 2 of the Financial Statements for the year ended 30 July 2023.
2.Adjusted Net Profit After Tax (NPAT) is before unusual itemsand is a non-GAAP measure.For a reconciliation between Adjusted and Statutory NPAT refer to Slide 19 of this presentation and Note 5 of
the financial statements for the year ended 30 July 2023.
3.Online Sales includes The Warehouse, Warehouse Stationery, Noel Leeming and Torpedo7 online and Gross Merchandise Value (GMV)through TheMarket.com and Group Marketplace.
•Sales growth slowed in FY23 H2 with growth decreasing from 4.8% in H1 to 1.4% in H2.FY22 H1 was impacted by COVID-19
lockdown resulting in strong growth this year. Compared to FY21 sales were flat in H1 and down 1.3% in H2.
•Gross Profit also showed signs of recovery though it fell at a greater rate than sales in both halves reflecting the decline in Gross
Profit Margin.The underlying Gross Profit Margin did improve in H2, with a decline of 180 bps versus 200 bps in H1.
•CODB increased at a slower rate in FY23 H2 versus last year with the benefit of CODB reduction initiatives.In FY23, CODB was
slightly down as a percentage of sales, compared to FY22, due to sales growth.
•Online sales continued its trend of decline but at a much slower rate with online as a percentage of sales 267 bps less in FY23 H2
versus last year, compared to an 879 bps decline in FY23 H1 due to exceptionally strong COVID-19 related online sales in FY22 H1.
20
1,683.4
1,808.3
1,730.0
1,813.2
1,489.4
1,606.3
1,564.3
1,585.9
FY20FY21FY22FY23
H1H2
$m
FY23 H1FY22 H1Variance H1FY23 H2FY22 H2Variance H2FY23FY22
Variance
FY23 vs FY22
The Warehouse
1,013.7 895.4 13.2%878.7 831.5 5.7%1,892.4 1,726.9 9.6%
Warehouse Stationery
124.1 122.0 1.7%124.5 127.7 -2.5%248.6 249.7 -0.4%
Noel Leeming
556.7 582.7 -4.5%504.3 514.0 -1.9%1,061.0 1,096.7 -3.3%
Torpedo7
96.4 97.5 -1.1%65.8 74.0 -11.1%162.2 171.5 -5.4%
Other
1
22.3 32.4 -31.2%12.6 17.1 -26.3%34.9 49.5 -29.5%
Total Group Sales
1,813.2 1,730.0 4.8%1,585.9 1,564.3 1.4%3,399.1 3,294.3 3.2%
•The Warehouse and Warehouse Stationery were the brands most impacted in
FY22 H1 by COVID-19 lockdowns.
•The Warehouse saw significant sales growth in H1, up 13.2%, followed by
softer growth of 5.7% in H2, with FY23 sales growth of 9.6%, and a record
$1.9 billion.
•Warehouse Stationery started the year with 1.7% growth in H1, finishing with
FY23 sales decline 0.4%. Office furniture and print and consumables
categories drove sales weakness over FY23.
•Noel Leeming was impacted by New Zealand wide trend of decreased spend
on discretionary items in H1 with sales decline 4.5%, but this rate of decline
slowed in H2 with sales down 1.9%.
•Torpedo7 was most impacted by declining global demand in bikes and other
high cost discretionary items, down 1.1% and 11.1% in H1 and H2,
respectively, albeit after five very strong years of sales growth underpinned by
store growth from 11 stores in FY18 to 25 stores in FY23.
1.Other sales includes sales through 1-day.co.nz, revenue from TheMarket.com (excluding Gross Merchandise Value(GMV)), and other Group operations and eliminations.
FY23 SALES –HALF YEAR SALES TREND
4.8%1.4%
Sales ($million)
21
42.1%
48.3%
23.3%
37.9%
40.3%
47.5%
23.2%
36.0%
37.4%
46.9%
22.0%
29.9%
The WarehouseWarehouse StationeryNoel LeemingTorpedo7
FY21FY22 FY23
Gross Profit Margin by Brand
GROSS PROFIT MARGIN
•Group Profit Margin was 33.4% for FY23, with a margin decline in FY23 H2
of 180 basis points versus 200 basis points in FY23 H1. Although an
improvement, this is still down from 35.3% in FY22, and we continue to put
in place further initiatives to recover this.
•The decline in Gross Profit Margin was largely attributable to The
Warehouse with some contribution from Noel Leeming and Torpedo7.
Group Gross Profit Margin movement
FY22 to FY23
33.1%
33.5%
32.6%
36.4%
35.3%
33.4%
27.3%
27.1%
26.5%
29.9%
29.8%
28.4%
FY18FY19FY20FY21FY22FY23
Group Gross Profit MarginGroup Gross Profit Margin - excl TWL
Gross Profit Margin –excluding TWL
22
IMPACT ON GROSS PROFIT MARGIN
The Warehouse –Gross Profit Margin
FY22 to FY23
The Warehouse –Category sales movement year on year
Category sales as % of total sales
Category Sales
FY23 vs FY22
FY23FY22
Grocery
1
18.7%16.3%26.1%
Home
21.1%21.4%8.2%
Apparel
14.0%14.5%5.9%
Other
46.2%47.7%5.7%
Total Sales
100.0%100.0%9.6%
•Gross Profit Margin declined 370 basis points in the first half to
36.3% but recovered significantly in the second half with a
comparative decline of 200 basis points, resulting in full year
Gross Profit Margin of 37.4%, compared to 40.3% in FY22, a
290 basis points decline.
•In the second half the incremental Market Club promotional
spend was eliminated and detention charges were no higher
than historical levels.
•Product mix continued to impact margin with the increase in
sales of Grocery, up 26.1% in the year to make up 18.7% of
total The Warehouse sales.
1.Grocery categories include pantry, confectionary and snacks, beverages, household consumables, health and beauty, and pet care.
FY22
Market
Club
Promo
Other
Promo
Category
mix
OnlineDetentionOtherFY23
H1
40.0%(1.4%)(1.2%)(0.9%)0.3%(0.4%)(0.2%)36.3%
H2
40.7%0.3%(2.1%)(1.2%)0.4%0.1%0.4%38.7%
FY23
40.3%(0.6%)(1.6%)(1.0%)0.4%(0.2%)0.1%37.4%
23
Torpedo7 EBIT Loss ($million)
FY22 to FY23
EBIT CHALLENGES AND INSIGHTS
35.6%
24.6%
8.6%
13.2%
6.7%
3.7%
7.6%
Cycle
Outdoor (incl. apparel)
Fitness
Water (incl. apparel)
Snow (incl. apparel)
Footwear
Other
Torpedo7 Category Mix (Sales)
•Torpedo7 experienced a significant decline in EBIT over FY23, after being on a path to breakeven.There were
many factors across Gross Profit Margin and Cost of Doing Business.
•In Gross Profit Margin, there has been a major dislocation of the bike market; snow and water categories were
impacted by weather; and water categories were impacted by increased levels of competition.
•Cost of Doing Business has increased as capability has been built to support store network growth, increased
depreciation of new store fixtures and fittings, and a new ERP implementation.
Gross Margin impactCODB impact
24
17.5%
16.9%
1.6%
2.0%
3.9%
3.8%
8.8%
8.9%
FY22FY23
Employee ExpenseDepn & Amortisation Expense
Lease ExpenseOther Expense
GROUP COST OF DOING BUSINESS
1.Cost of Doing Business is presented excluding the impact of NZ IFRS16.
2.Lease expenses excludes the impact of NZ IFRS16 and includes rent received and COVID-19
rent relief received.
CODB Movement ($million) –FY22 to FY23
CODB as % of sales
31.8%
31.6%
31.8%
31.6%
•CODB
1
was up $27.9 million, or 2.7%, from FY22 mainly
due to depreciation and information system costs, included
in Other Expenses due to the significant increase in project
spend over the last few years.
•Employee expense for the year is slightly down, and as a
percentage of sales, down 60 basis points, post Store
Support Office restructuring and store productivity
initiatives.
•Lease expense
2
was up 3.0% as the impact of inflation
flowed through lease expense.
25
INFORMATION SYSTEMS & DIGITAL COSTS
1.FY19 and FY20 are not adjusted for the SaaS accounting policy change.
36.4
42.5
37.8
37.9
63.3
21.2
31.4
21.7
36.4
42.5
59.0
69.3
85.0
FY19FY20FY21FY22FY23
Operating expenditureSaaS expenditure
24.6
32.6
29.4
45.2
42.4
3.6
8.1
11.2
24.6
32.6
33.0
53.3
53.6
FY19FY20FY21FY22FY23
CapexPrepayments
CAPEX –Information Systems and Digital
1
($million)
OPEX –Information Systems and Digital
1
($million)
•Information systems and digital operating costs have increased with project spend as systems are
implemented and go-live.
•Though project spend has been through its peak in FY23, operating expenditure is expected to peak in
FY24 as core projects go-live.
26
$ million
FY23FY22Variance
Inventory
493.3 562.3
(69.0)
Trade and other receivables
97.0 99.5
(2.5)
Trade and other payables
(407.2)(480.5)
73.3
Provisions
(71.7)(71.0)
(0.7)
Working Capital
111.4110.3
1.1
Associate
-3.8
(3.8)
Fixed Assets
317.6 303.2
14.4
Funds Employed
429.0417.3
11.7
Tax Assets
93.590.7
2.8
Derivatives
(2.1)28.8
(30.9)
Right of Use Assets
661.0673.3
(12.3)
Goodwill and Brands
73.0 73.0
-
Capital Employed
1,254.41,283.1
(28.7)
Shareholders’ Equity
402.1421.9
(19.8)
Minority Interests
1.0 (0.8)
1.8
Net Debt / (Cash)
48.1 41.2
6.9
Net Lease Liability
803.2 820.8
(17.6)
Sources of Funds
1,254.41,283.1
(28.7)
Liquidity
421.9378.843.1
•Working capital increased marginally over the course of FY23
but within that was a significant reduction in inventory, down
$69.0 million to $493.3 million.
•A part of the reduction in inventory was a normalisation of goods
in transit, which decreased from $94.1 million to $65.4 million.
This reduction reflected a return to previous shipping transit
times and reduction in port congestion.
•Offsetting this reduction in inventory was a decrease in trade
and other payables, reflecting lower inventory purchasing and a
change in product and brand mix.
•Fixed assets increased $14.4 million due to an increase in store
development, notably Warkworthin FY23, and investment in
core systems and digital platforms, offset by sale of Royal Oak
property under a sale and lease back arrangement.
•Net Debt increased from $41.2 million to $48.1 million at year
end, but a significant reduction from $83.4 million at half year.
•Committed bank facilities were $470.0 million at FY23, providing
liquidity of $421.9 million, versus the Group’s target liquidity
range of $350 million to $450 million.
As at 30 July 2023
BALANCE SHEET
27
$ million
FY23FY22Variance
Trading EBITDA
1
264.7 304.9
(40.2)
Working Capital
12.4(117.5)
129.9
Restructuring costs
(10.9)-
(10.9)
Taxes Paid
(11.0)(42.5)
31.5
Interest Paid (incl. lease interest)
2
(44.1)(36.8)
(7.3)
Other items
3.1(2.7)
5.8
Operating Cash Flow
214.2 105.4
108.8
Capital Expenditure
3
(115.1)(107.5)
(7.6)
Divestments -PPE
30.7 0.5
30.2
Acquisitions
(0.7)(6.2)
5.5
Lease principal repayments
(101.2)(98.3)
(2.9)
Dividends Received
0.1 0.4
(0.3)
Dividends Paid
(35.0)(96.0)
61.0
Other
0.1 -
0.1
Net Cash Flow
(6.9)(201.7)
194.8
Closing Net Cash / (Net Debt)
(48.1)(41.2)
(6.9)
1.Trading EBITDA represents Earnings before interest, taxation, unusual items, depreciation and amortisation.
2.Interest paid includes $36.2m interest on lease liabilities (FY22: $36.7m) . Refer to Note 3.6 of the Financial
Statements for the year ended 30 July 2023.
3.Capital expenditure is presented after the impact of Cloud Computing adjustments (“SaaS”) and is part of
total project spend of $154.4 million in FY23 (refer to Slide 29).
•Operating cash flow increased 103.2% to $214.2 million, with a
decrease in trading EBITDA offset by a significant improvement in
working capital movement due to decreased inventory, increased
receivables and decreased payables.
•Capital expenditure cash flow was $115.1 million in FY23,
compared to $107.5 million in FY22. Capital expenditure peaked
this year as we come towards the end of many systems investment
programmes.
•Interest paid on borrowings increased $7.3 million compared to
FY22 due to higher average debt during the year.
•During the year we sold the Royal Oak property which was one of
our owned store sites. The property was sold for $30.5 million
under a sale and lease back arrangement with the proceeds being
used to reduce debt.
•Dividends payments were lower in FY23 with no interim dividend
declared. Dividends paid comprise of $35.0 million being the FY22
final dividend of 10.0 cents per share paid during the year.
CASH FLOW
For the year ending 30 July 2023
28
$million
FY23
Capex Spend
FY23
Prepayments
FY23
SaaS spend
FY23
OpexSpend
FY23
Total Project
Core Systems
15.411.216.23.646.4
Store Development
26.6---26.6
Other IS
20.1-3.72.226.0
Digital and Customer
6.9-1.81.410.1
Supply Chain
10.9---10.9
Other
33.30.20.20.734.4
Total Project Spend
113.211.421.97.9154.4
PROJECT EXPENDITURE
•Capital expenditure was $113.2 million
1
in FY23, compared to $107.5 million in FY22. Total project expenditure
2
was $154.4 million
on these projects in FY23.
•Core Systems investment included delivery of ERP Finance and Inventory, Group Order Management System, Warehouse
Management System, Master Data Management, and the delivery of our new people and HR system, Human Capital Management.
•Store development continued in FY23, but at a lesser pace than in FY22. New stores included the new Warkworthretail centre, a
new Torpedo7 store in Botany, and the relocation of Torpedo7 Christchurch to a bigger site. Our SWAS integration programme
included the development of a further 5 stores in FY23, bringing the total number of SWAS stores to 40.
•FY24 total project expenditure is capped at $80 million, with capital expenditure (including prepayments) expected to be between
$60 million to $70 million.
For the year ending 30 July 2023
13.6%
23.5%
17.8%
6.1%
9.6%
29.4%
Capital
Expenditure
$113.2m
1.The difference between Capital Expenditure of $113.2 million and Capital Expenditure per Statement of Cash Flows of $115.1 million is due to timing of accruals and creditor payments.
2.Total project expenditure includes capital expenditure, prepayments, SaaS expenditure and project operating expenditure.
29
FY24 OUTLOOK
30
30
31
•While FY23 has been a challenging year, our initiatives to improve operational performance and reduce our CODB have strengthened
our position. We are optimistic we will maintain this momentum into FY24, and our focus on improving financial performance will
continue.
•FY24 has started with softer sales than expected, but with Gross Profit in line with expectations.We remain cautious about the outlook
as we approach our busiest time of the year.
•The business has planned its cost base and inventory purchasing considering this uncertainty. We will continue to adapt our trading
plan to the market conditions as sales build through to Christmas.
•Torpedo7 is our most challenged brand, and we will be reporting on the performance against our recovery plan at half year.
•We have rationed project expenditure to a cap of $80 million in FY24 with a focus on delivering major projects that are in flight.
FY24 OUTLOOK
31
THANK YOU
HELPING KIWIS LIVE
BETTER EVERY DAY
32
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
APPENDIX
33
55.7%
7.3%
31.2%
4.8%
1.0%
(1)
FY23 Group Sales
$3,399.1m
1.Other sales (1.0%) includes revenue from TheMarket.com (excluding Gross Merchandise Value (GMV)), sales
through 1-day.co.nz, and other Group operations and eliminations.
2.Operating Profit excludes the impact of NZ IFRS16 and unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure. For a
reconciliation between Operating Profit and Reported EBIT refer to Slide 19 of this presentation and Note 2 of the
Financial Statements for the year ended 30 July 2023.
3.Other items in operating profit include corporate costs and other unallocated overheads.
Divisional Summary
$162.2m
$1,892.4m
$1,061.0m
$248.6m
9.6%(0.4%)(3.3%)(5.4%)
FY23 Operating Profit
(2)
($million)
Other
(3)
TOTAL
GROUP
Core Agile Brands $121.9m
34
•Sales were up 9.6% vs FY22. Prior year was impacted by COVID-19
restrictions, resulting in decreased foot traffic, stock availability, and restricted
supply chain.
•Online sales decreased compared to last year driven by a decrease in
conversion from 2.6% in FY22 to 1.5% in FY23, as FY22 saw record-high online
sales from extended lockdowns. Decline in online sales reflects customers
moving back to stores.
•Store foot traffic was up 17.6% vs FY22 leading to an increase of 14.4%
intransactions, offset byconversion being down 1.5%. The foot traffic increase
was seen mostly in the first half of the year due to comparing to the COVID-19
restrictions of the prior year.
•Grocery enjoyed another growth year with Pantry and Chilled category sales
increasing more than 90%, resulting in total Grocery sales increasing 26.1%
compared to FY22 and now making up 18.7% of total The Warehouse sales.
•Poorer performing categories included Sporting goods and some Seasonal
areas due to a wet summer and late winter.
•Gross Profit Margin was down 290 bps. The majority of this variance occurred in
H1 with an improvement in H2, but continuation of category mix change
withsales growth in lower margin categories such as Grocery and Tech.
•CODB increased by $16.0 million due to increases in rent and support office
costs due to recent investment in technology platforms are offset by savings in
store labour and fulfilment centre.
•Two store closures (South City and SnellsBeach) offset by the opening of
Warkworthbrings total stores to 88.
$million
FY23FY22Variance
Sales
1,892.4 1,726.9
9.6%
Gross Profit
708.5696.6
1.7%
Gross Margin %37.4%40.3%(290)bps
Cost of Doing Business (CODB)
636.9620.9
2.6%
CODB %33.6%35.9%(230)bps
Operating Profit
71.675.7
(5.5%)
Operating Margin %3.8%4.4%(60)bps
Online sales
119.0181.3
-34.4%
Online as a % of sales
6.3%10.5%
(421)bps
Click and Collect as % of online sales
47.8%45.9%
187bps
Number of stores
8889
(1)
NEW ZEALAND’S LEADER ON VALUE
For the year ended 30 July 2023
35
•Sales were down 0.4% vs FY22. Whilst in-store andonline transactions were
strong with growth of 9.0%, this was offset with a significant reduction in
average basket size of 9.6% compared to FY22.
•Online sales decreased 35.4% compared to the prior period, driven by COVID-
19 lockdown forcing a shift to the online channel, especially in FY22 H1. Click &
Collect sales were down 52.9%, making up 18.7% of online sales.
•Office Furniture, Print and Consumable categories have been softer in FY23,
post COVID-19 heightened spending, and changing printer technology.
•Print & Copy Centre achieved its best sales year in FY23, which has helped to
partially offset the deterioration in overall Margin.
•Gross Profit decreased 1.7% to $116.6 million, through lower sales volumesand
rebates, increased clearance activity in Q4 and a change in sales mix with lower
proportion of high margin product sales (eg: office furniture).
•CODB decreased by 2.1% due to a focused effort to reduce labour in stores as
well as reduction inlease costs and advertising.
•Operating Profit decreased 0.2% to $23 million, with Operating ProfitMargin
increasing +10bps to 9.3%.
•Warehouse Stationery Auckland CBD and Johnsonville were closed during the
year, while 5 SWAS integrations were implemented in FY23, including Lower
Hutt, Palmerston North, Timaru, Warkworthand Chartwell, bringing the total
SWAS stores to 40.
For the year ended 30 July 2023
$million
FY23FY22Variance
Sales
248.6 249.7
-0.4%
Gross Profit
116.6 118.6
-1.7%
Gross Margin %46.9%47.5%(60)bps
Cost of Doing Business (CODB)
93.6 95.5
-2.1%
CODB %37.6%38.3%(70)bps
Operating Profit
23.0 23.1
-0.2%
Operating Margin %9.3%9.2%10bps
Online sales
22.1
34.3
-35.4%
Online as a % of sales
8.9%
13.7%
(483)bps
Click and Collect as % of online sales
18.7%
25.6%
(693)bps
Number of stores
66
68
(2)
GET THE SMALL STUFF RIGHT
36
For the year ended 30 July 2023
$million
FY23FY22Variance
Sales
1,061.0 1,096.7
-3.3%
Gross Profit
233.1 254.1
-8.2%
Gross Margin %22.0%23.2%(120)bps
Cost of Doing Business (CODB)
205.8 200.2
2.8%
CODB %19.4%18.3%110bps
Operating Profit
27.3 53.9
-49.3%
Operating Margin %2.6%4.9%(230)bps
Online sales
118.1178.3
-33.7%
Online as a % of sales
11.1%16.3%
(512)bps
Click and Collect as % of online sales
62.9%57.7%
522bps
Number of stores
6768
(1)
BEST OF TECH AND GLOBAL BRANDS
•Sales were down 3.3% vs FY22 as high cost of living continued to drive tough
market conditions and impact customers discretionary income.
•While FY22 saw country wide COVID-19 lockdowns, FY23 saw customers return to
stores, with Noel Leeming foot traffic increasing 13.1%.
•Online sales have normalised to pre-COVID-19 shopping patterns, making up to
11.1% of total sales. Click & collect remained our customers’ most popular
fulfilment option, accounting for 62.9% of online sales fulfilment, up from 57.7% in
FY22.
•The financial pressures faced by many customers resulted in decreased demand
for bigger ticket items leading to a decline in year on year sales across Whiteware,
TV and Computers. Growth categories included Communications, Smart Home and
Gaming categories as a result of strong product offering and availability.
•Gross Profit Margin % was 22.0%, decreasing 120bps from FY22, due to higher
sales in lower margin categories and an increasingly competitive environment.
•CODB 2.8% higher than FY22 due to increased rent and other recharges to the
Brand.
•The Noel Leeming George St, Dunedin store closed during the year.
37
•Sales were down 5.4% vs FY22 , driven by a number of factors including
lapping strong COVID-19 driven sales, a major dislocation in the bike market
and unseasonal weather.
•These conditions particularly impacted our Cycle, Water and Snow categories.
Fitness also saw a decline, the result of post-COVID-19 lock down softening in
demand for such products.
•Store foot traffic increased 13.9% as customers returned to shopping in store.
Store Sales increased 8.1% due to the annualisationof new stores opened in
FY22 (Invercargill, Whangarei, Petone), and the new Botany store in FY23.
•Online sales decreased 28.9% as COVID-19 lock down periods drove elevated
online sales last year. Click & Collect remains a popular option for customers,
accounting for 49.6% of online Sales, up 340bps. Torpedo7 has the highest
online penetration of sales within the Group.
•Gross Profit Margin was impacted by the dislocation of the bike market, snow
and water categories impacted by weather, and water categories were impacted
by higher levels of competition.
•As at FY23 we have provided for an inventory impairment of $4.6 million against
Torpedo7 to manage excess and aged stock. We have a recovery plan in place
for the business and this will be a major focus in FY24.
•Cost of Doing Business has increased as capability has been built to support
store network growth, depreciation of store fixtures and fittings and a new ERP
being implemented.
•During the year we opened one new store in Botany, Auckland.
For the year ended 30 July 2023
$million
FY23FY22Variance
Sales
162.2 171.5
-5.4%
Gross Profit
48.5 61.8
-21.5%
Gross Margin %29.9%36.0%(610)bps
Cost of Doing Business (CODB)
70.7 64.0
10.5%
CODB %43.6%37.3%630bps
Operating Profit
(22.2)(2.2)
891.3%
Operating Margin %-13.7%-1.3%(1,240)bps
Online sales
42.9
60.6
-29.2%
Online as a % of sales
26.4%
35.3%
(890)Bps
Click and Collect as % of online sales
49.6%
46.2%
340bps
Number of stores
25
24
1
SEE YOU OUT THERE
38
ERPFI
Oracle Fusion Finance and Inventory (ERPFI) to replace
legacy systems in The Warehouse, Warehouse Stationery
and Noel Leeming. Release 2 Solution Build and User
Acceptance testing were completed in July 2023.End to End
testing and cut over process are areas of current focus.
Likely go-live date in FY24 H2.
GOMS
Group Order Management System is dependent on ERPFI.
It will significantly improve online ordering and fulfilment from
any group location, cost management, and automated
customer support.
Go-live date late FY24 / early FY25.
SIGNIFICANT PROGRESS ON CORE SYSTEMS
MDM
Human
Capital
Management
Torpedo7
ERP
Master Data Management continues to be a cornerstone
capability for all new technology infrastructure projects.
We expect to incorporate dimension and supplier data in
FY24.
HCM is the HR module in ERPFI. Go-live was completed in
August 2023.Deployed for all Group employees, this
release includes employee self-service capability, and
automation of our recruiting and new employee onboarding
processes.
Project involved replacement of Accredowith Microsoft
Dynamics 365 as a business-wide ERP. All system build,
data migration and testing was completed in FY23.
We anticipate go-live earlyFY24.
WMS
Utilising our new warehouse systems is beginning to deliver
productivity improvements and a number of operational
initiatives have been identified that will be deployed in FY24.
39
TermDefinitionTermDefinition
C&CClick & CollectMDMMaster Data Management
CODBCost of Doing BusinessNIDCNorth Island Distribution Centre
COGSCost of Goods SoldNIFCNorth Island Fulfilment Centre
DCDistribution CentreNLNoel Leeming
DIFOTDelivered In-Full On-TimeOMSOrder Management Solution
E2EEnd-to-EndOMUOperating Model Update
EDLPEvery Day Low PricePOSPoint-of-Sale
ELSExecutive Leadership SquadSIDCSouth Island Distribution Centre
eNPSEmployee Net Promotor ScoreSSOStore Support Office
ERPFIEnterprise Resource Planning -Finance and InventorySSSSame Store Sales
FCFulfilment CentreSWASStore-Within-a-Store
GBOGroup Business OperationsT7Torpedo7
GEPGroup eCommerce PlatformTWLThe Warehouse Limited
GMVGross Merchandise ValueWALTWeighted Average Lease Tenure
GOMSGroup Order Management System WMSWarehouse Management System
LTVCustomer Lifetime ValueWSWarehouse Stationery
GLOSSARY
40
DISCLAIMER
This presentation may contain forward looking statements and
projections. There can be no certainty of the outcome and projections
involve known and unknown risks, uncertainties, assumptions and other
important factors that could cause the actual outcomes to be materially
different from the events or results expressed or implied by such
statements and projections.
While all reasonable care has been taken in the preparation of this
presentation, The Warehouse Group Limited does not make any
representation, assurance or guarantees as to the accuracy or
completeness of any information in this presentation. The forward-
looking statements and projections in this report reflect views held at
the date of this presentation.
Except as required by applicable law or any applicable Listing Rules,
the Relevant Persons disclaim any obligation or undertaking to update
any information in this presentation.
A number of non-GAAP financial measures are used in this
presentation. You should not consider any of these in isolation from, or
as a substitute for, the information provided in the annual financial
statements for the year ended 30 July 2023, which are available at
www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz.
This presentation does not constitute investment advice, or an
inducement, recommendation or offer to buy or sell any securities in
The Warehouse Group Limited.
41
---
1
_________________________________________________________________________________
To: NZX Limited
_________________________________________________________________________________
Auckland, Thursday 28 September 2023
The Warehouse Group FY23 annual result announcement
Strong sales at The Warehouse in a challenging year
Highlights
• Group sales of $3.4 billion, up 3.2% on prior year, including record sales result for The
Warehouse of $1.9 billion, up 9.6% on prior year
• FY23 gross profit margin decreased 190 basis points compared to FY22 but an
improvement on FY23 H1
• Reported Net Profit After Tax of $29.8 million – down 66.6% on prior year
• Adjusted Net Profit After Tax of $37.5 million – down 56.2% on prior year
• Operating cash flow improved 103.2% from FY22 to $214.2 million in FY23
• Net debt of $48.1m and available liquidity of $421.9 million as at FY23
• Final dividend of 8.0 cents per share declared
The Warehouse Group Limited ("the Group") today announced its full-year result for the year ended
30 July 2023. The Group achieved sales of $3.4 billion, up 3.2% from FY22, including $1.9 billion sales
for The Warehouse, up 9.6% from the previous year. This marks the highest annual sales in The
Warehouse's history, demonstrating New Zealanders’ need for value in the current climate.
Adjusted Net Profit After Tax (NPAT) was $37.5 million, representing a 56.2% decrease compared to
FY22, with inflation significantly impacting margin and driving up cost of doing business (CODB),
during a year of planned investment in critical infrastructure for the Group.
The Warehouse Group CEO, Nick Grayston, said he was pleased with the resilience of The
Warehouse and Warehouse Stationery and said the Group has continued to support our customers
in a challenging year.
"It’s been a tough year for both us and our customers. We're proud to have kept the essentials
affordable for families and strong sales at The Warehouse reflect this.
"We continue to invest in the transformation of the Group, particularly in infrastructure. This has
coincided with much weaker consumer confidence and a shift in spending, especially big-ticket
items, to travel and entertainment. These factors have compromised our margin and profitability
and particularly affected Noel Leeming and Torpedo7.
2
“While we remain committed to our strategy, the alignment of these events has put pressure on our
business and led to a disappointing overall result for FY23.
"Torpedo7 represents 4.8% of Group sales and has been hit by the global decline in the bike market
and weather impacting snow and water categories. This has resulted in a substantial Torpedo7
operating loss of $22.2 million in FY23 and significantly impacted our Group result,” Mr Grayston
said.
"Our immediate focus is to address Torpedo7’s performance by improving gross margin and
reducing excess stock and the business’s cost base. We have a big challenge in front of us. We know
Kiwis love the outdoors, so we believe it’s a category worth fighting for. This will be a major focus for
FY24, and we will provide an update at our half year.
"In the FY23 second half we have taken extensive action to strengthen our overall financial position.
I am encouraged that we are in a better place to weather the economic headwinds expected in the
year ahead and wish to thank our team members for their hard work so far in helping get the Group
back on track.” Mr Grayston said.
Group performance
Gross profit margin was 33.4% for FY23, a decrease from 35.3% in FY22, and an improvement from
32.7% in FY23 H1. Gross profit margin improved from a first half decline of 200 basis points
compared to the prior period to a second half decline of 180 basis points compared to the prior
period.
The Group's adjusted NPAT (Net Profit After Tax) for FY23 was $37.5 million, a decrease of 56.2%
compared to $85.5 million in FY22, resulting from decreased operating profit and increased interest
expense during the year. Reported NPAT was $29.8 million in FY23, down from $89.3 million in FY22,
impacted by restructuring costs and associate impairments.
CODB increased 2.7% or $27.9 million in FY23 but decreased as a percentage of sales from 31.8% in
FY22 to 31.6% in FY23 due to the actions taken to reprioritise spending. FY23 saw record project
spend of $154.4 million (including capital and operating expenditure) to address the necessary
investments in infrastructure and systems. The Group is now through peak project spend on systems
and expects total project spend of $80 million in FY24.
Employee expenses decreased by 0.2%, while lease expenses increased by 3.0% as inflation flowed
through to some of our leases. The Group remains focused on improving operational performance
through initiatives to manage labour costs and realise infrastructure investment benefits.
Brand performance
All our brands saw customers return to in-store shopping post-COVID-19 restrictions, resulting in a
14.2% increase in foot traffic overall in FY23. Online sales have normalised to pre-COVID-19 levels,
accounting for 10.9% of total sales
1
.
The Warehouse reported a 9.6% increase in sales, reaching $1.9 billion, a record high. Online sales
decreased 34.4%, resulting in online sales making up 6.3% of The Warehouse's total sales. In-store
1
Online Sales includes The Warehouse, Warehouse Stationery, Noel Leeming and Torpedo7 online and Gross Merchandise Value (“GMV”)
through TheMarket.com and Group Marketplace.
3
foot traffic rose by 17.6%. The Warehouse gross profit margin decreased by 290 basis points to
37.4%, with an operating profit of $71.6 million, down 5.5% on FY22.
Warehouse Stationery sales decreased slightly by 0.4% to $248.6 million. In-store transactions
experienced strong growth of 9.0% in FY23, while online sales decreased 35.4%, resulting in online
sales making up 8.9% of total Warehouse Stationery sales. Warehouse Stationery gross profit margin
decreased by 60 basis points to 46.9%, and operating profit was $23.0 million, down 0.2% on FY22.
Five stores were integrated into The Warehouse stores, bringing the total number of Warehouse
Stationery Stores within a Store (SWAS) to 40.
Noel Leeming r
eported a 3.3% decline in sales, totalling $1,061.0 million in FY23. Foot traffic
increased by 13.1%, and online sales decreased by 33.7%. Online sales made up 11.1% of total Noel
Leeming sales, returning to pre-COVID-19 levels. Noel Leeming's 1-hour click and collect service
remained popular, representing 62.9% of online sales, up from 57.7% in FY22. Noel Leeming gross
profit margin decreased by 120 basis points to 22.0% due to cost pressure and increased
promotions, and operating profit was $27.3 million, down 49.3% on FY22.
Torpedo7 s
aw a 5.4% decline in sales, amounting to $162.2 million in FY23. In-store foot traffic
increased by 13.9%, while online sales decreased by 29.2%. Online sales made up 26.4% of total
sales. Torpedo7 gross margin decreased by 610 basis points to 29.9%, with an operating loss of $22.2
million.
TheMarket.com h
as been part of our online ecosystem since 2019. In October 2022, the Group
launched Group Marketplace, integrating selected third-party products from TheMarket.com
website onto The Warehouse website and app. Group Marketplace now offers customers 103,000
products from 71 merchants and gross merchandise value delivered a total of $74.3 million across
TheMarket.com and Group Marketplace in FY23.
Affordable groceries for Kiwi families
"Rising food prices have been a harsh reality for Kiwi families and we have been working hard to
offer groceries at affordable prices. Our grocery sales
2
grew 26.1% in FY23 as Kiwi families chose The
Warehouse more often to find much-needed value on the essentials”, said Mr Grayston.
"Overall grocery is now contributing 18.7% of The Warehouse's total sales. We have experienced
91.8% growth in pantry and chilled, 26.6% in household cleaning items, and 23.8% in pet care.
"Highlights include the positive feedback from our customers in the 12 stores where we’ve been
trialling fresh fruit and vegetables and the expansion of our private label Market Kitchen range to
include 64 products, including $5 Market Kitchen 500g butter and 1kg coffee beans for $20.
"We continue to take a considered approach to grocery expansion, with recent legislative measures
offering no resolution to the lack of access to wholesale supply at fair prices. The challenge to
provide affordable essentials for Kiwi families is huge and we’re up against some very big players
who are very comfortable with the status quo. We are not, and we will keep fighting to offer better
value.” Mr Grayston said.
2
Grocery categories include pantry, confectionery and snacks, beverages, household consumables, health and beauty, and pet care.
4
Retail Media expansion
The Warehouse Group's retail media network, MarketMedia, enables suppliers and advertisers to
engage with New Zealand's largest integrated retail audience directly.
"This is a meaningful step forward in the Group's efforts to grow retail media revenue. We look
forward to allowing advertisers and suppliers to reach customers on our in-store digital screen
network while they shop, with many suppliers already placing forward bookings," Mr Grayston said.
Making sustainable living easy and affordable
"FY23 was a year of important progress on our vision to make sustainable living easy and affordable
for everyone. We now sell over 46,600 products with one or more sustainable attributes, making up
33% of our private label sales, up from 22% in FY22. Furthermore, 43% of our private label sales
were derived from products with packaging that is compostable, or which can be recycled via New
Zealand's kerbside recycling infrastructure or instore, up from 22% in FY22.
“In FY23, the Group diverted 72.9% of our operational waste to recycling and we helped our
customers recycle 199 tonnes of post-consumer waste through our soft plastics, e-waste, and ink
and toner recycling programmes.
“We’re also very pleased to be switching to solar with our new partnership with Lodestone Energy
so that the Group’s stores and operational sites will be solar powered by 2026”, said Mr Grayston.
Cash and liquidity
Operating cash flow increased 103.2% in FY23, to $214.2 million, contributing to a net debt position
of $48.1 million at year-end, a significant reduction from $83.4 million at half-year.
Committed bank facilities were $470.0 million at the end of FY23, providing available liquidity of
$421.9 million, up from $378.8 million in FY22 and well within the Group's target range of $350
million to $450 million, strengthening the Group's financial position.
Inventory levels decreased $69.0 million to $493.3 million as at the end of FY23. Part of the
reduction in inventory was a normalisation of goods in transit, which decreased from $94.1 million
to $65.4 million at year-end. This reduction reflected a return to previous shipping transit times and
reduced port congestion.
Dividend announced
Chair Joan Withers confirmed that the Board has declared a fully imputed final dividend for the FY23
year of 8.0 cents per share, in line with the Group's policy to distribute at least 70% of adjusted net
profit after tax. The final dividend will be paid on 1 December 2023 to shareholders on the register
on 16 November 2023.
Outlook
"The actions we have taken to improve operational performance and gross margin and reduce our
cost base have strengthened our financial position at year-end, and these initiatives remain a key
focus as we move into FY24.
5
“FY24 has started with softer sales than expected, whilst our gross profit margin is meeting
expectations. Torpedo7 is our most challenged brand, and we will be reporting on the performance
against our recovery plan at half year.
“We have also capped project expenditure to $80 million in FY24 with a focus on delivering major
projects that are in flight.
"Looking ahead to our busiest time of year, we remain cautious. We will continue to adapt our
trading plan to meet market conditions as sales build through peak season,” Mr Grayston said.
ENDS
More information about The Warehouse Group’s result, financial performance by brand, strategy
and operations can be found in the 2023 Annual Report, available at
www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz.
Contact details regarding this announcement:
Investors and Analysts: Jonathan Oram, Chief Financial Officer
To be contacted via Kim Russell, kim.russell@thewarehouse.co.nz
+64 94 883 285 or +64 21 452 860
Media: Lizzie Havercroft, Corporate Affairs Partner
media.enquiries@thewarehouse.co.nz
+64 27 507 0613
---
INTEGRATED
ANNUAL
REPORT
2023
Joan Withers
Board Chair
27 September 2023
Dean Hamilton
Audit and Risk Committee Chair
27 September 2023
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
26
28
30
32
36
40
44
48
52
60
62
68
83
90
106
110
114
117
2023 at a Glance
Chair’s Report
CEO’s Report
Our Purpose, Vision and Values
Our Ecosystem
Our Stores
Our Brands
Supporting Our Communities
Integrated Report
Risk & Materiality Mōrea me te Tūponotanga
Our Networks Ngā Kōtuitanga
Our Customers Ngā Kiritaki
Our Relationships Te Ara Whanaungatanga
Our People Ngā Tāngata
Financial Capital Tahua Hautaonga
Caring For Our Environment Manaaki Taiao
Global Reporting Initiatives (GRI) Report
Financial Statements
Notes to the Financial Statements
Independent Auditor’s Report
Governance Report
Statutory Disclosures
GRI Content Index
Ernst & Young Report – GRI
Directory
CONTENTS
The Warehouse Group Board and Leadership Squad are
pleased to present our FY23 Integrated Annual Report
32The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 2023Contents
2023
AT A GLANCE
CUSTOMER
of senior leaders
are female
Gender pay
equity
50%
101%
GENDER
EQUALITY
Group
in-store NPS
up 2.6pts from FY22
and in-store sales
up 9.7% from FY22
76.3pts
Gender equity is a
core focus for us,
and we’re pleased
to maintain gender
pay equity at Group
level.
Our customers
are increasingly
coming into our
stores and enjoying
their experience.
We are committed
to developing a full
product and service
integrated retail
experience across
our brand websites,
apps and in store.
We have achieved
a strong full year
sales result but a
challenging financial
performance as
profitability was
compromised with
decreased margin
and increased cost of
doing business.
PERFORMANCE
$
Group sales
up 3.2%
on prior year
$
3.4b
Adjusted NPAT
down from $85.5m
in FY22
$
37. 5m
$
48.1m
Reported NPAT
down from $89.3m
in FY22
Net debt
compared to $41.2m
in FY22, $83.4m in FY23H1.
Liquidity $421.9m
$29.8
m
Foot traffic
14.2%
Group online sales
Group Click
& Collect sales
making up 10.9% of total
Group sales in FY23
making up 51.8% of omnichannel
online sales in FY23
$376.4m
$156.6m
33%
We are making
progress on our
vision to make
sustainable living
easy and affordable
for everyone and
on our ambition
to achieve zero
emissions in our
operations by 2040.
private label
products
with sustainable
attributes,
accounting for
$343m in sales
of operational waste
from landfill
72.9%
We have
diverted
SUSTAINABILITY
Light passenger fleet
total reduction of 21.9tCO
2
e
compared to FY22 (Scope 1)
100% EV
Raised
for NZ
charities and
communities in FY23,
including $1m from
MarketClub
MarketClub members can
nominate a charitable
cause to which
The Warehouse donates
on their behalf
$
4.1m
1.3
m
We’ve been helping
Kiwi families and
communities thrive
since our doors
opened in 1982.
COMMUNITY
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 202345At A Glance
In December 2022, the New Zealand
External Reporting Board (XRB) released
the Aotearoa New Zealand Climate
Standards (NZCS). New Zealand is leading
the way on mandatory climate reporting,
and we are pleased to be one of the driving
participants in developing the New Zealand
retail sector scenarios for this framework.
These scenarios will be used to identify
climate-related risks and opportunities and
develop our transition plan to a 1.5-degree
world. The New Zealand retail sector
scenario public report was released on
19 September 2023 and can be found here.
Looking after our people
and customers
We are deeply concerned by the continuing
increase in retail crime. The safety of our
store team members and customers is
our absolute priority. We have continued
to invest in safety measures and support
services for our team members – such as
training our store team members in incident
management and investing $1.8 million to
strengthen store security across all our
brands and particularly in our Noel Leeming
stores.
Supporting our
communities
Our teams have continued to step up
when it matters most. Earlier this year,
the devastation of floods and Cyclone
Gabrielle shook our country. I want to make
a special mention of our Napier, Hastings,
Tairāwhiti Gisborne, Northland, Auckland
and Coromandel teams, whose resilience
and teamwork have been incredible in very
difficult circumstances.
Thank you to our customers who donated
over $250,000 through our "Add $1"
campaign to raise money for affected
families. Combined with The Warehouse
Group's contribution of $200,000 (cash
and product) we donated over $450,000 to
local community groups supporting families
with relief.
FY23 has been a tough
year for The Warehouse
Group. A challenging trading
environment with Kiwi families
experiencing rising inflation,
increased cost of living and
rising interest rates has
intersected with the Group
being mid-way through a
transformation programme
and peak year of spending
on information systems
and digital infrastructure.
As a result, we have had
to make difficult decisions
to reprioritise some of our
strategic initiatives as we
navigate these challenges
.
Despite the ongoing macroeconomic
environment, we have seen pleasing sales
growth for the Group, achieving $3.4
billion in total Group sales, up 3.2% on the
prior year. We saw a particularly strong
sales result in The Warehouse of $1.9 billion
– the brand’s highest sales year on record
and up 9.6% on FY22. Refer to our CEO
Report for more commentary on brand
performance.
Customers have responded to the
economic climate by reducing their
spending on higher discretionary items,
impacting our other brands' sales.
The Group finished the year with a
disappointing adjusted net profit after
tax of $37.5 million for FY23, compared
to $85.5 million in FY22, with reported
net profit after tax of $29.8 million, after
unusual items of $13.9 million, compared
to $89.3 million in FY22. This year there are
number of unusual items reflecting actions
taken around our investment in Zoom
Health, restructure and redundancy costs,
and the closure of the 1-day business.
As the Group has traded through
this environment, it has managed to
Joan Withers – Chair
The Warehouse Group has a strong history
of giving back to its communities, having
raised $83.4 million since 1982. This year we
announced our new Here for Good Leave.
This gives our team members eight hours of
paid leave each financial year to volunteer
in a meaningful way for them, recognising
the close connection we have in the
communities within which we operate.
Governance
I want to acknowledge and thank the
Board for their contribution throughout the
last year. Their leadership and contribution
have been superb as we help guide The
Warehouse Group through a challenging
period.
I am proud that we’ve continued to attract
the highest quality Directors to work with
The Warehouse Group Board. This year
we welcomed Jeremy O'Brien as a Future
Director, replacing Caroline Rainsford
who joined the Board as a Director in
August 2022. Both appointments reflect
the success of the Future Directors
programme, co-founded by Sir Stephen
Tindall, as it works to develop the next
generation of Directors. We have gained
great benefit from this excellent scheme.
In October 2022, we entered a four-year
retention arrangement with Group
Chief Executive Officer Nick Grayston.
Since joining The Warehouse Group in
2016, Nick's strategic leadership has
steered us through a significant period of
transformation. He will play a critical role in
implementing
The Warehouse Group's long-term strategy
and we want to ensure his leadership
throughout this time.
At the Annual Shareholders Meeting
(ASM) in November 2022, I announced my
intention to conclude my tenure as Chair
of The Warehouse Group at the FY25 ASM
and I look forward to continuing to work
with Nick through the intervening period.
Dividend
The Group dividend policy is to distribute at
least 70% of the Group's full year adjusted
net profit at the discretion of the Board and
subject to trading performance, market
conditions and liquidity requirements.
In accordance with this policy, due to
the trading performance, net debt, and
liquidity levels at the half year, the Board
made the difficult decision in March not to
pay an interim dividend. Given the return
of net debt to levels that meet our target
liquidity range of $350 - $450 million, and
in accordance with our dividend policy, the
Board is pleased to declare a final dividend
of 8.0 cents per share. The record date for
the dividend will be 16 November 2023 and
will be paid on 1 December 2023.
The year ahead
Looking ahead, we are confident our
customers will continue to find the best
value options across our brands, and we will
remain top of mind for Kiwi families as they
make tough choices about how to spend
their income. We are conscious we need to
do better and are confident we have put
remedial actions in place to improve our
Group performance.
On behalf of the Board, I’d like to extend
heartfelt gratitude to all our valued
customers across all our brands. Thank you
for choosing us. I also want to recognise
our Group Chief Executive Nick Grayston,
our outstanding Leadership Squad, and our
11,000 team members. Being part of a team
that comes together around a challenge
and takes fast action is a privilege.
As always, to our shareholders, the
Board and I value your support and look
forward to meeting with you at our Annual
Shareholders' Meeting in November.
strengthen its balance sheet from the
half year, providing available liquidity of
$421.9 million at year end. This is within
our target liquidity range of $350 million
to $450 million.
Making a difference in
sustainability
Our commitment to make sustainable
living easy and affordable for everyone
starts with the products we sell. I am
immensely proud of our sourcing teams
who work with our local and international
suppliers to ensure our product and
packaging are more sustainable.
We have increased our efforts this year,
and now 33% of our private label sales
in The Warehouse and Warehouse
Stationery are products with one or more
sustainable features, up from 22% in FY22.
This represents 46,637 product lines and
$343 million in sales. In addition, 43%
of our private label sales were derived
from products with packaging that is
compostable or which can be recycled
via New Zealand's kerbside recycling
infrastructure or instore, up from 22% in
FY22.
Internally, our passenger fleet now
comprises 100% electric vehicles (EVs),
our sea freight and international airfreight
emissions reduced by 11.6% and 62.5%
respectively, and we diverted 72.9% of our
operational waste to recycling.
We helped our customers recycle 198.9
tonnes of post-consumer waste through
our soft plastics, e-waste, and ink and
toner recycling programmes.
In September 2023, we completed
negotiations with Lodestone Energy,
a new developer and operator of solar
electricity farms. This will result in over
260 The Warehouse Group sites being
supplied by solar electricity as early as
2026 – significantly reducing our Scope 2
emissions.
"We are
confident our
customers will
continue to find
the best value
options across
our brands and
we will remain
top of mind for
Kiwi families."
Group sales
up 3.2%
on prior year
$
3.4b
CHAIR'S REPORT
JOAN WITHERS
Light passenger fleet
Total reduction of 21.9tCO
2
e
compared to FY22 (Scope 1)
100% EV
Raised
for NZ
charities and
communities
since 1982
$
83.4m
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 202367Chair's Report
Nick Grayston – CEO
Our strategic reprioritisation is focused
on improving operational performance by
minimising cost to serve, managing gross
profit margin, and reducing working capital
and CODB, as well as rebalancing capital
expenditure across the Group.
In January 2023 we made the difficult
decision to reduce labour costs in our
Store Support Office. This is always a very
challenging time for all those affected and,
while this unfortunately resulted in reducing
340 roles, this has set the Group up for
increased efficiency, greater productivity,
and a laser focus on operational and
financial priorities, while reducing CODB.
Value for Kiwis
Rising food prices has been a harsh reality
for New Zealanders in the past year, and
there's a clear need for access to the
essentials at reliable and affordable prices.
We have taken significant steps forward
in our grocery offering at The Warehouse
during this time, expanding our range
and launching butter, coffee, pasta and
sauces under our Market Kitchen brand,
and trialling fresh fruit and vegetables at
affordable prices in 12 of our stores.
Customers have embraced our offering,
with grocery sales growing 26.1% in FY23,
contributing to 18.7% of The Warehouse
sales. Our challenge is to carry on fighting
for access to wholesale supply at equitable
cost prices to continue to achieve savings
for our customers.
Our loyalty programme, MarketClub, now
has over 1.3 million members, who represent
our most engaged customers. Through
MarketClub, we have been able to help
customers save on essentials like nappies,
butter and hygiene products in FY23.
This year The Warehouse secured a
new value range of Samsung and Dyson
products, allowing us to offer quality brands
at affordable prices, with a more extensive
and specialised range supported at Noel
Leeming. This year Noel Leeming was proud
to be one of the first retailers in the world
to stock Starlink, connecting thousands
of customers to high-quality internet
throughout New Zealand since launch.
Expanding efficiency and
revenue
Our transformation and agile model have
allowed us to expand into new revenue
sources and secure cost efficiencies. We
have recently integrated Torpedo7 into
our agile structure and ways of working to
unlock Group-wide efficiencies.
Our Group Marketplace initiative was
launched in October 2022, integrating some
of the TheMarket.com products onto The
Warehouse website and app. This extended
our range online, adding over 103,000
I am pleased to report the
second-highest Group sales
in our history and our highest
sales for The Warehouse in a
challenging economic year for
both us and our customers.
While sales were strong, FY23 was
disappointing as our margin and profitability
were compromised with increased costs,
supply chain disruptions in the first half,
and increased promotional and discounting
activity to drive sales. Torpedo7 was a
particular challenge during the year as sales
were impacted by decreased consumer
demand and profitability was significantly
affected.
Adjusted net profit after tax was $37.5
million in FY23, down 56.2% on a very strong
FY22 result of $85.5 million.
As we continue to invest in the
transformation of the Group and our
infrastructure in particular, this period
of peak spending has coincided with
a collapse in consumer confidence
exacerbated by a change in accounting
procedures, reducing capitalisation. We
remain committed to our strategy, but the
alignment of these actions has put pressure
on our business and has impacted our
performance in FY23.
We have taken extensive action on our
strategic reprioritisation initiatives to
improve performance, and I am encouraged
that we are better positioned to weather the
economic headwinds that we expect will
continue in FY24.
Financial performance
We are pleased to have achieved a Group
sales result of $3.4 billion in FY23, growing
3.2% on FY22, with The Warehouse brand
achieving $1.9 billion in sales. This is the
highest result on record, and increased 9.6%
on last year.
Even with our strong sales growth, we
have witnessed fundamental shifts in
products from 71 merchants to our existing
online customer base.
MarketMedia, our retail media network,
is scaling quickly, achieving several
successful campaigns with suppliers in
FY23 and growing revenue year on year.
Improvements in supply have also enabled
us to double our margin on retail media
revenues compared to last year. Looking
ahead, we are taking a significant step
forward and launching physical retail
media screens across The Warehouse and
Noel Leeming store network to deliver a
new marketing and media channel for our
brands and suppliers to reach and convert
customers shopping in our stores.
FY23 continued to see us invest in our
infrastructure capability, completing
existing major programmes of work to
return operational efficiencies. The new
Enterprise Resource Planning Finance
Inventory (ERPFI) system is progressing
well. This will provide more timely reporting,
project accounting, real-time inventory
management and enable improved
stock availability. Continued purposeful
investment in infrastructure that will reduce
our cost to serve long term and enhance
our customer experience remains a priority
for the Group.
Sustainability
This year, I am very proud of the progress
we continue to make on making sustainable
living easy and affordable for everyone. As
a team, we have challenged ourselves by
asking, "Does it pass the Tomorrow Test?"
in everything we do. While it’s a simple
sentence, it’s a big question and we won’t
have the perfect answer every time. But
every time we ask the question and make
more headway in the right direction, we
make a difference.
The Tomorrow Test has sparked incredible
momentum in our team members' actions
every day and is showing up in our
stores from an increase in products with
sustainable attributes to our expanding
circularity programmes like e-waste and
soft-plastic recycling. It’s also encouraged
us to innovate and look for new solutions
like our new energy partnership to power
over 260 Group sites with solar energy and
the My Recycle Hub pilot, both of which we
share more about in the Our Environment
section of this report.
Outlook
While FY23 has been a challenging year,
our initiatives to improve operational
performance and reduce our CODB have
strengthened our position. I am optimistic
we will maintain this momentum into FY24,
and our focus on improving financial
performance will continue.
Looking ahead, we anticipate that FY24
will be challenging for our customers as
they face into an unpredictable economic
outlook, and we know we have an important
part to play in offering Kiwis great value on
the things they need most.
I thank our Chair, Joan Withers, and our
Board for their unwavering support and
dedication to the organisation. I also want
to acknowledge and thank our Group
CFO, Jonathan Oram, who departs The
Warehouse Group in October, for his
exceptional leadership over the past five
years. Jonathan played a key role in our
retail transformation journey and our flip to
agile, performed a critical role in helping us
manage through the COVID-19 pandemic,
and helped the Group deliver record
financial results in FY21. We wish him all the
best in his new role.
In addition, I wish to thank our 11,000 strong
team who continue to show up for their
local communities. We stand together by
our purpose of helping Kiwis live better
every day, while providing sustainable long-
term returns for our shareholders.
discretionary spending while managing
the impact of inflation on our costs during
a year of planned investment in critical
infrastructure.
In the current challenging macroeconomic
environment, New Zealanders have limited
their spending on high-ticket items like
appliances, televisions and bikes and
have had to focus on the essentials over
our peak period. We are proud to have
provided real value for our customers at
The Warehouse, keeping essential items
affordable, and have seen this reflected
in increased sales this year. However, the
shift in consumer spending follows global
trends and has challenged Noel Leeming
and Torpedo7's performance, along with
the added pressure of poor weather in the
critical summer period, reducing interest in
outdoor items.
We have had significant challenges with
Torpedo7, resulting in an operating loss
for the year of $22.2 million. As at FY23 we
have provided for an inventory impairment
of $4.6 million against Torpedo7 to manage
excess and aged stock. We have a recovery
plan in place for the business and this will
be a major focus in FY24.
TheMarket.com loss was stemmed in the
second half - improving from a $16 million
loss in the first half to a loss of $6 million in
the second half.
We've continued to deliver the best value
for our customers across all our brands
despite the cost of goods increasing
materially, including shipping costs and
MarketClub promotions, which impacted
our margins. In the first half of the year,
especially, we did not pass on all of the
increased cost of product and cost of
doing business (CODB), in particular wage
pressures, to our customers. We have since
taken action and implemented initiatives to
recover some of these cost pressures and
margin decline experienced in the first half
and are pleased to see some improvement
in the second half.
The Warehouse brand sales
the highest result on record,
growing 9.6% on last year and
demonstrating New Zealand’s
need for value
$
$
1.9b
CEO’S REPORT
NICK GRAYSTON
"We have
taken action
to improve
operational
performance
and reduce our
Cost of Doing
Business."
MARKETCLUB MEMBERS
an increase of 122% on FY22
1.3m
>
Grocery sales
+26.1%
in FY23, contributing to 18.7%
of The Warehouse sales
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 202389CEO's Report
OUR PURPOSE, VISION, VALUES,
AND CUSTOMER EXPERIENCES
ARE ALIGNED
OUR PURPOSE
OUR VISION
Helping Kiwis live better every day
Ia tangata, ia rā
Every day, we’re living our purpose by transforming our business to exceed our customers’
expectations and to have a positive impact on our communities. Our vision guides our aspiration,
while our values guide our behaviours and rituals.
We’re focusing on the strategic customer experiences to achieve our objectives
and to deliver on our long-term strategy and growth.
To make sustainable living easy and
affordable for everyone
Kia ngāwari, kia utu māmā hoki te noho tiaki taiao
a te katoa
OUR VALUES
Mahi i nga mahi pai
We are one team, standing up
for our people, our planet
and our communities.
DO GOOD
Whakaarohia te kaiutu
We put the customer
first in everything we do.
THINK CUSTOMER
Kia haepapa
We walk the talk and
make things happen.
OWN IT
Range & Value
Helping customers
to find what they’re
looking for, at prices
that are great,
every time
Availability & Fulfilment
Helping customers
to enjoy fast, easy
and reliable ways
to get what they need
Sustainable & Affordable
Helping customers
to have access
to affordable
solutions that help
them live sustainably
Loyalty & Payments
Helping customers
to feel recognised
and rewarded
Customer Service
Helping customers
to get easy and
high-quality
customer service
every time
1
2
3
4
5
OUR STRATEGIC
CUSTOMER
EXPERIENCES
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20231011Our Purpose, Vision & Values
Our ecosystem has strong foundations comprising
our iconic brands, an established store footprint, and
market-leading digital assets. Our assets position us
to expand our offering further and invest in capability
to enable us to serve our customers better and grow.
Our loyalty membership programme, MarketClub, is
at the heart of our ecosystem, offering special deals
and additional value. There are now over 1.3 million
New Zealanders actively using MarketClub across
TheMarket.com and The Warehouse.
We are committed to nurturing our members,
purposefully investing in our MarketClub programme
and expanding it across our Group. As the
programme grows with more capabilities added, we
can offer our customers a more personalised and
valuable shopping experience, through the increased
insights we gain through first-party data.
We are improving fulfilment capability and lowering
OUR
ECOSYSTEM
our cost to serve as part of driving increased
profitability on online, and our transformation work
is delivering improvements across our stores, supply
chain and online platforms.
Our retail media network, MarketMedia, is generating
new and larger marketing and revenue opportunities.
MarketMedia is launching in-store digital screen
advertising across The Warehouse and Noel
Leeming stores, giving our brands and suppliers
the opportunity to reach customers while they are
actively shopping.
Our ecosystem is grounded in our purpose: to help
Kiwis live better every day, and we believe we can make
a genuine impact on our customers' lives through
innovation.
Our aim is to deliver a modern, integrated
retail experience powered by a customer-
centric ecosystem that makes shopping
with The Warehouse Group easy and hassle
free, all while providing more value for
our customers.
MEMBERSHIP
Unlocking value and
increasing customer
insights through
first-party data
SHOPPING
We’re focused on making
our shopping experiences
easy and seamless –
in store and online
FULFILMENT
We get our goods
and services to
our customers,
when and where
they want
RETAIL MEDIA
Will turn our store
and digital traffic into
incremental revenue
SERVICES
Our services help
customers and
businesses in their
daily lives
PAYMENTS
With more ways to
make their budgets
work for them
HEALTH
We’re exploring
convenient and
affordable access to
health and wellness
solutions for Kiwis
DATAPEOPLEPLATFORMS
OUR CUSTOMER
ENTERTAINMENT
Potentially extending
our membership
into entertainment
services and offerings
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20231213Our Ecosystem
11
6
3
5
MATAMATA
MORRINSVILLE
TE RAPA
BELL BLOCK
NP CENTRAL
TAURANGA
MT MAUNGANUI
FRASER COVE
THE CROSSING
PAPAMOA
DUNEDIN
CAMBRIDGE
TE AWAMUTU
TOKOROA
TE KUITI
ROTORUA
LEVIN
PARAPARAUMU
RANGIORA
OAMARU
ALEXANDRA
ASHBURTON
BLENHEIM
KAITĀIA
KAIKOHE
DARGAVILLE
WAIPAPA
KERIKERI
WHANGĀREI
WHAKATĀNE
WARKWORTH
GISBORNE
TAUPŌ
HASTINGS
MASTERTON
DANNEVIRKE
UPPER HUTT
INVERCARGILL
GORE
BALCLUTHA
TIMARU
QUEENSTOWN
WĀNAKA
REMARKABLES
NAPIER
HAWERA
PALMERSTON NORTH
WHANGANUI
FEILDING
NELSON
RICHMOND
GREYMOUTH
MOTUEKA
WHITIANGA
THAMES
MORRINSVILLE
CHRISTCHURCH
17
WELLINGTON
21
AUCKLAND
68
HAMILTON
HILLCREST
THE BASE
11
MAP KEY
The Warehouse Store
Warehouse Stationery Store
SWAS Store
Torpedo7 Store
Noel Leeming Store
OUR
STORES
APPS
TheMarket.com
Noel Leeming
The Warehouse
ONLINE STORES
Torpedo7
Warehouse Stationery
Noel Leeming
The Warehouse
PHYSICAL STORES
88
66
67
25
246 STORES
The Warehouse Stores
Warehouse Stationery Stores
including 40 SWAS (store within a store)
Noel Leeming Stores
Torpedo7 Stores
TheMarket.com
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20231415
As New Zealand's largest
general merchandise retailer
where everyone gets a bargain,
The Warehouse has been Here
for Good for communities for
over 40 years.
While Kiwis navigate the high cost of living,
The Warehouse continues to focus on
giving our customers great value through
our MarketClub loyalty programme and by
offering a wide range of quality products at
affordable prices.
This year, The Warehouse has achieved our
highest sales in history of $1.9 billion, with foot
traffic up 17.6% in FY23 compared to the prior
year. A key highlight is our increased range,
including introducing a selection of Samsung
and Dyson products, giving our customers
more quality brands at value price points.
Our Group Marketplace initiative, launched
in October 2022, offers our customers more
choice. Group Marketplace is an integration
between The Warehouse and TheMarket.com
that enables an extended range of products
on The Warehouse online. Over 71 third-party
merchants and over 103,000 Marketplace
products are now available on our website as
we test our way into this integration.
FY23 saw our grocery range go from strength
WHERE EVERYONE
GETS A BARGAIN
to strength as we demonstrated commitment
to offering our customers much-needed
value on essential items.
We launched our private label Market Kitchen
500g salted butter, and Market Kitchen
coffee beans, plunger, instant coffee and
coffee pods. This Market Kitchen range now
includes 64 products, helping give Kiwis more
affordable essentials and pantry staples.
This year, we also launched our fresh fruit
and vegetable trial in 12 stores – Waipapa,
Whangārei, Westgate, Manukau, Te Rapa,
Fraser Cove, Lyall Bay, Eastgate, Timaru,
Riccarton, Dunedin South and Invercargill. We
are proud to be working with local suppliers
where practical to stock our shelves with
seasonal produce, and we are encouraged by
the positive response from customers so far.
Overall, grocery sales grew 26.1% in FY23,
making up 18.7% of total The Warehouse
sales. Within this category, we experienced
91.8% growth in pantry and chilled, 26.6%
growth in household cleaning items, and
23.8% growth in pet care.
We're committed to making it easier for
our customers to make affordable and
sustainable choices, and we continue
to make packaging improvements to a
number of our products, including removing
unnecessary plastic packaging as much
as possible. We are finding new and
innovative ways to make our products more
sustainable; for example, using materials like
recycled polyester and EcoVero
TM
viscose
in our winter 2023 activewear range, which
have a lower environmental impact.
We continue to grow our circularity solutions
for customers in store. The soft-plastics
recycling programme expanded to 44 stores,
and in the last year, 88.1 tonnes of soft plastics
have been collected and recycled. This is
the equivalent of approximately 14.7 million
pieces of plastic, based on the average
weight of one piece of soft plastic being 6.3
grams.
In November 2022, The Warehouse
celebrated 40 years of giving Kiwis great
value on what they want and need. For
40 years, being Here for Good for the
communities we serve has been part of
The Warehouse's founding DNA. During
our most recent community campaign, The
Warehouse partnered with the Kindness
Collective during our July Mega Toy Sale
to donate $55,000 worth of new toys and
$50,000 of vouchers to purchase new toys
for deserving kids across New Zealand.
Our customers got behind this campaign,
adding $1 at checkout and raising $77,900 to
help the Kindness Collective provide kindies,
kōhanga and whānau services with toys,
arts, crafts and books.
OUR
BRANDS
OUR
BRANDS
up 1.7% on FY22 and gross
profit margin 37.4% for FY23
88
Gross profit
Stores
Sales
up 9.6% on FY22
$
1.9b
$
708.5m
Operating profit
down 5.5% on FY22
$71.6
m
17The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 202316Our Brands | The Warehouse
In July 2023, we launched a new brand
campaign centred around how Warehouse
Stationery helps customers 'Get the Small
Stuff Right', reminding New Zealanders
that we are here to help them succeed
in business, creativity or education. This
year, we launched our Get New Zealand
Creating initiative, engaging customers in
store and online over the school holidays
with exciting deals and activities across
arts and crafts. Over the year, we have
seen a 4.3% increase in arts and crafts
category sales.
In FY23, Warehouse Stationery renewed
its focus as a pivotal partner for New
Zealand businesses. We deliver great value
to support their growth and increased
our product and service offerings to
government agencies. Internally, we have
established a new customer mission tribe,
Business Solutions, aiming to simplify
service, enhance rewards, and offer
ongoing promotions to our customers.
As a result of sustained efforts by our
teams and our commitment to driving
sustainability, our potential to expand and
support more business and government
customers is significant. It will be a key
focus for Warehouse Stationery in FY24.
Warehouse Stationery is New
Zealand's go-to destination for
all things stationery, offering
everything from essential
supplies to office furniture,
technology, printing, and
arts and crafts. We are also a
leading supplier for businesses
across the country.
In FY23, our sales held up well, given
the strong sales over the last three
years during peak COVID-19 periods
as customers worked and learnt from
home. This year, our Print and Copy
Centres, which include personalisation
services, grew from strength to strength.
Sales increased 17.8%, and we printed
24.0 million pages on 100gsm paper,
1.4 billion mm of 6" photo paper, bound
250,000 booklets, and produced 43,000
personalised mugs.
Our store-within-a-store (SWAS)
integration strategy continues to expand
nationally, with 40 Warehouse Stationery
stores now located within The Warehouse
store network. This year, we integrated five
new SWAS stores, allowing customers to
access both brands and a wider product
range in one place. Our Warkworth SWAS
opening allowed us to trial a stand-alone
service centre next to checkouts, offering
print, copy and other services within
The Warehouse. We relocated our
Warehouse Stationery Manukau store
to a more convenient location for our
customers next to our Noel Leeming store
in the Manukau Supa Centa.
Back to School continues to be a major
event for Warehouse Stationery, offering
everything families could need to kick-start
the school year. Notably, fashion stationery
sales rose by 49.1% in FY23, including new
offerings with sustainable features, like
our 'I was a bottle' range with stationery
made from recycled plastic bottles and
notebooks with paper made from stone, a
more environmentally-friendly option.
As part of our Back to School campaign,
we partnered with KidsCan to provide over
100,000 items to 73 lower-decile KidsCan
schools across New Zealand. By adding
$1 at checkout in Warehouse Stationery
and The Warehouse stores, our customers
generously contributed over $66,000,
topped up to $74,000 by The Warehouse
and Warehouse Stationery, to support
KidsCan and help children access the
essentials they need to have a successful
start to the school year.
DO YOUR BEST WORK
OUR
BRANDS
OUR
BRANDS
down 1.7% on FY22 and gross
profit margin 46.9% for FY23
66
Gross profit
Stores
Sales
down 0.4% on FY22
$
116.6m
$
248.6m
(40 SWAS)
Operating profit
down 0.2% on FY22
$23.0
m
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20231819Our Brands | Warehouse Stationery
Noel Leeming is one of New
Zealand’s leading consumer
electronics retailers, helping
Kiwis enrich their lives
through technology. We pride
ourselves on offering Kiwis
global and home brands and
innovative world-class service.
Noel Leeming's sales were affected
by a year-on-year decline in category
spend on higher discretionary items
like televisions, driven by customers
responding to the increased cost of
living. The sales result was also impacted
by spend in previous years on working
and learning from home products during
COVID-19.
Noel Leeming has seen strong growth
in emerging categories like Gaming, up
50.8% from FY22, and Smart Home, up
40.7% from FY22. We have also seen
growth in the Communications category
through our expanded partnership with
2degrees to include pay monthly mobile
plans, as well as exclusive deals on mobile
phones and plans.
Our Noel Leeming service offering
has continued to grow, introducing
new partnerships to enhance our
customers’ technology experiences.
We launched Starlink as their first New
Zealand retail partner, offering Starlink
broadband with hardware in our stores.
Thanks to our committed team, we were
able to provide significant support to
communities heavily affected by Cyclone
Gabrielle with Starlink packages, where
critical infrastructure supply had been
interrupted.
Noel Leeming continues to achieve
high customer satisfaction ratings when
customers shop in store with us. Our Net
Promoter Score increased by 2.9 points
this year, taking our score to 75.1 for FY23.
With the removal of COVID-19 restrictions,
we’ve seen customers return to shopping
in store more frequently, with foot traffic
across Noel Leeming stores increasing by
13.1% in FY23. To support this, we continue
the regular review of our store network
to ensure we have the best availability
and footprint to support customer needs.
We welcomed a new concept store
in Warkworth this year, replacing the
smaller 11-year-old site. The new store
is four times larger than the original site
and features our full product range. In
addition, we’ve closed our Noel Leeming
George Street (Dunedin) store to support
consolidation and to provide improved
customer service from our larger-format
store in Dunedin.
Online sales have normalised to pre-
COVID-19 shopping patterns, making
up 11.1% of total sales compared to 16.3%
in FY22. Customers continue to choose
Click & Collect as a means of fulfilment
of their online purchases, with Click &
Collect orders making up 62.9% of all
online sales compared to 57.7% in FY22.
Noel Leeming’s one-hour Click & Collect
offering introduced in FY22 continues to
be popular.
In June, Noel Leeming celebrated its
50-year anniversary. Noel Leeming’s
customers enjoyed celebratory events
and special deals for the month to
commemorate the occasion. We launched
a fundraising campaign for Orange Sky
Aotearoa, which provides free laundry
services, warm showers, and genuine
connections for Kiwis experiencing
homelessness and hardship. With our
generous customers’ $1 donations at
Noel Leeming checkouts, we raised over
$20,000 for this charity.
Along with our commitment to the
community, we continue to drive forward
sustainability initiatives in Noel Leeming.
In partnership with TechCollect NZ, Noel
Leeming offers free e-waste collection
and recycling. In FY23, the programme
expanded its offering and is now
available across 28 (up from 16 in FY22)
stores nationwide.
OUR
BRANDS
OUR
BRANDS
THE AUTHORITY ON APPLIANCES,
TECHNOLOGY AND SERVICES
down 8.2% on FY22 and gross
profit margin 22.0% for FY23
67
Gross profit
Stores
Sales
down 3.3% on FY22
$
1,061m
$
233.1m
Operating profit
down 49.3% on FY22
$2 7. 3
m
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20232021Our Brands | Noel Leeming
Torpedo7 is the ultimate store
for outdoor adventures in New
Zealand. From activewear
and hiking boots to all your
camping, bike and snow gear,
and the passionate know-how
of our team, Torpedo7 has
everything you need to get
outdoors.
It has been a very challenging year for
Torpedo7, with a global demand slowdown
for bikes after a spike during COVID-19
lockdowns. A wet summer and late ski
season impacted seasonal categories like
water sports, camping and snow gear.
Profitability was compromised with
decreased margin and increased cost of
doing business, resulting in an operating
loss for the year of $22.2 million. As at FY23
year end we have provided for an inventory
impairment of $4.6 million against Torpedo7
to manage excess and aged stock.
A recovery plan is in place for the business
and this will be a major focus in FY24.
Despite the challenges in bike and seasonal
impacts, Torpedo7 has seen pleasing
growth across other categories in FY23,
with 42.8% growth in footwear, 18.8% growth
in athletic leisure wear and 26.9% growth
in electronics. Our Torpedo7 private label
ranges continue to grow and now make up
more than 34.0% of total sales.
Customers continue to enjoy the knowledge
and advice from our outdoor expert team
members, with our customer Net Promoter
Score increasing by 3 points to 71 in FY23.
In August 2023, our Torpedo7 support
office, store leadership, logistics and
fulfilment teams joined the rest of the Group
in transitioning to agile ways of working,
integrating the business under existing
support structures and product purchasing
into a new Sports and Adventure customer
mission tribe.
The shift to agile will bring our Torpedo7
brand and teams closer to the Group to
unlock efficiencies, grow our profitability
and deliver a better customer experience.
We also began the process of migrating
Torpedo7 to our new Enterprise Resource
Planning (ERP) software system. The new
platform will replace and modernise our
legacy systems, streamline our business
operations and improve the experience for
our customers.
With Torpedo7's passion for the outdoors
and our local environment, we provide
support through our community
partnerships. This year, with the help of our
customers, we raised more than $77,000
for our community partners including
Hillary Outdoors Education Trust, to help
young people experience the outdoors
and build important life skills. In June, our
stores and customers also raised $8,288
for St John's Annual Appeal.
OUR
BRANDS
OUR
BRANDS
SEE YOU OUT THERE
FY22: Operating loss $2.2m
FY23: Gross profit margin 29.9%
25
Operating loss
Stores
Sales
down 5.4% on FY22
$
162.2m
$
22.2m
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20232223Our Brands | Torpedo7
OUR
BRANDS
OUR
BRANDS
MarketClub is our free-
to-join membership
programme that gives
our customers exclusive
discounts and offers when
shopping with us. Every
time a customer uses
MarketClub, we donate a
portion of the proceeds to
a charitable cause on their
behalf.
In October 2021, we introduced
MarketClub into The Warehouse,
and this year we reached a major
milestone with over 1.3 million
customers using MarketClub. Our
Club members are our most engaged
customers, who enjoy exclusive deals
on the products they love.
Currently, members can use
MarketClub at The Warehouse
through The Warehouse app, our
online store, or by scanning the app at
our store checkouts. At TheMarket.com,
MarketClub members also get special
deals for free. In addition, we offer
MarketClub+, a subscription service
on TheMarket.com that provides free
shipping on millions of eligible items,
VIP access to exclusive offers, priority
customer service, and more.
In FY23, MarketClub members saved
nearly $18.0 million with member
discounts. The most popular deals were
our $4 and $5 Tararua 500g butter,
with over 220,000 customers scanning
MarketClub to access the offer.
Since launching the platform in
October 2021, we have raised over
$1.6 million for various causes in New
Zealand. Our charity partners include
Life Education Trust, Whānau Āwhina
Plunket, Variety – the Children's
Charity, Sustainable Coastlines, and
special campaigns
like Be the Joy, helping Kiwis in need
at Christmas.
YOU GET EXCLUSIVE
DISCOUNTS AND OFFERS
MARKETCLUB MEMBERS
an increase of 122% on FY22
1.3m
>
donated through
MarketClub in FY23
$
1m
MarketClub is a valuable addition
to our ecosystem, designed to
make shopping with us easy and
rewarding for our customers, and we
will continue to expand the platform
purposefully.
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20232425Our Brands | MarketClub
With the help of our generous
customers, since 1982 The
Warehouse Group has raised
more than $83 million for
New Zealand charities and
communities to help Kiwi
families thrive.
Since we opened our doors in 1982, our
purpose has been clear: to help Kiwis
live better every day. We're proud of our
ongoing efforts to help our communities
in meaningful ways and be there for them
in moments that matter.
We focus on areas where we can truly
make a difference, like bringing joy to
families at Christmas, ensuring young
people have access to period products,
supplying essential school supplies to
help kids thrive in school, and providing
the essentials in an emergency.
This year, through the generosity of
our customers and the engagement of
our store team members, we raised $4.1
million for New Zealand charities and
community groups.
On a national level, we partner with some
fantastic charities, including Sustainable
Coastlines, Youthline, Women's Refuge,
Variety – the Children's Charity, The
Salvation Army, Whānau Āwhina Plunket,
The Period Place, Hillary Outdoors, and
Life Education Trust.
Our community highlights
Be the Joy
Together with our partners at Women's
Refuge and Variety – the Children's
Charity, we helped to bring joy to
thousands of Kiwi families by giving them
a gift to open on Christmas Day. With
the help of our customers purchasing
$5 Be the Joy gift tags in our stores, we
delivered over 17,500 gifts to children who
would otherwise go without.
The Warehouse stores became a drop-
off hub for customers to donate new,
unwrapped gifts for each store's local
Women's Refuge. Our Store Support Office
and North Island Distribution Centre teams
took part by collecting and donating gifts
to Auckland City Mission too.
Our customers could add a dollar in store
or at checkout online as well, and this
SUPPORTING OUR
COMMUNITIES
raised over $130,000 for Women's Refuge
and Variety – the Children's Charity.
Back to School
This year for our Back to School
campaign, The Warehouse and
Warehouse Stationery partnered with
KidsCan to donate over 100,000 essential
stationery items to 73 lower-decile
KidsCan schools across New Zealand,
including sun hats, pencil cases, pencils,
pens, notebooks, rubbers, rulers, glue
sticks and sun cream.
We also invited our customers to join us
by adding $1 at checkout in Warehouse
Stationery and The Warehouse stores.
Our customers donated over $66,000
to support KidsCan and help children
access the essentials they need to start
the school year successfully. With an
additional donation from MarketClub,
over $74,000 was donated to KidsCan
to help get food, raincoats, shoes and
essentials to kids who need them.
Cyclone Gabrielle support
To help Kiwi families affected by Cyclone
Gabrielle and North Island flooding, we
turned on our emergency fundraising for
customers to add $1 at our checkouts in
all The Warehouse Group stores.
During this time, our customers gave an
incredible $250,000. The Warehouse
Group donated $200,000 (cash and
product), resulting in over $450,000
going to a mix of community groups who
were on the ground helping families in the
affected regions, including the Hawke's
Bay Foundation, SuperGrans Tairāwhiti
Gisborne, The Northland Foundation,
ButtaBean Motivation, The Middlemore
Foundation, Te Hā Oranga, and The
Salvation Army foodbanks.
Our store teams in the affected regions
played an incredible role for their local
communities during this time, donating
essential products and opening the doors to
our stores to serve the community’s needs.
Mega Toy Donation
For our Mega Toy Sale, The Warehouse
joined up with the Kindness Collective
and donated $50,000 of vouchers
for toys for deserving kids across
New Zealand. Every The Warehouse
store team used the funds from their
data, design thinking, and interviewing
customers in our stores.
Gateway students
programme
We are proud to offer Year 12 and Year
13 school students work experience and
the opportunity to achieve unit standard
credits through the Gateway programme.
In partnership with ServiceIQ, this
programme provides students with
hands-on work experience in the retail
industry and a chance to make helpful,
professional contacts for when they leave
school.
Red Shirts in Schools in The Warehouse,
Blue Shirts in Schools in Warehouse
Stationery, Torpedo7 bike hub, and
Discovering Passionate Experts in
Noel Leeming reached 1,255 student
enrolments in FY23.
The programme has a 90% completion
rate across our 122 supporting stores,
and this year, 24 students have been
employed in roles on completion of the
programme.
Access to period products
We're continuing to make period products
accessible and affordable through our
range of $1 pads, with one in every 10 sold
donated to local organisations in need
through the support of our community
partner, The Period Place.
More than 86,400 period products have
been donated through this initiative this
year, bringing our total donations to date
to over 266,000 period products. We
also provide free period products for our
team members across our stores, support
offices, and distribution centres.
Reusable bags and
local giving
Every time a customer buys a $1 red
reusable bag from The Warehouse, a
portion of the proceeds remain with that
local store team to use to support the
communities they serve at a local level.
Our local stores also play a vital role in
giving back to their communities, and this
year, we raised $1.4 million through the
sale of our red reusable bags.
17,500
gifts provided by
Be the Joy campaign,
to Kiwi kids
to support local
communities through
the sale of our red
reusable bags
more than
reusable bag proceeds to get behind
this campaign to donate an additional
$55,000 of new toys to kindies, kōhanga
or whānau services in their local area.
Our customers got behind this campaign
as well, adding $1 at checkout and raising
$77,900 to help the Kindness Collective.
Noel Leeming
50th Birthday
As part of our 50th birthday celebrations,
Noel Leeming partnered with Orange Sky
Aotearoa, a charity that provides laundry
services, warm showers, and genuine
connections for Kiwis experiencing
homelessness and hardship. With our
generous customers' $1 donations at
Noel Leeming checkouts, we raised over
$20,000 for this organisation.
P-TECH Programme
In FY23, we continued our role as a key
partner in the Pathways in Technology
(IBM P-TECH) programme. P-TECH helps
get students job-ready by developing
their digital skills and is now in 28
countries globally.
As an industry partner, The Warehouse
Group provides financial assistance, paid
internships, mentors who coach, guide
and support the students throughout
the programme, and the opportunity
for P-TECH graduates to apply for
employment roles within our Company.
This is our fourth year as a partner, and
seven interns joined The Warehouse
Group for a six-week internship. Over the
course of the programme, students were
introduced to gathering insights and
Raised
to community
groups affected
by Cyclone
Gabrielle
$
450k
$
1.4m
Sausage Sizzles
This year, our The Warehouse store teams
have given back to their local community
by firing up the barbecue and bringing
back the sausage sizzle.
For the opening weekend of our
Warkworth The Warehouse store, four
local community groups – Coastguard
Kawau, Heart of Springboard, Warkworth
Lions Club, Warkworth Scouts raised over
$4,000, which the store matched to a total
of $8,000 through sausage sizzles.
MarketClub donations
with every scan
Every time a MarketClub member
scans at The Warehouse we donate a
portion of the proceeds to a charitable
cause of their choice. Since launching
the platform in October 2021, we have
raised over $1.6 million to various causes
in New Zealand. Our charity partners
include Life Education, Whānau Āwhina
Plunket, Variety – the Children's Charity,
Sustainable Coastlines, and special
campaigns like Be the Joy, helping Kiwis
in need at Christmas.
can nominate a
charitable cause to which
The Warehouse donates
on their behalf
>
>
1.3m
over
MarketClub members
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20232627Community
v
Our Integrated Report is designed to report on
how our resources contribute through our retail
value creation model to deliver our vision to
make sustainable living easy and affordable for
everyone. These are demonstrated through the
six capitals shown below and detailed in this
report.
This is The Warehouse Group’s fifth Integrated Report
and aims to:
• Provide quality information to all stakeholders;
• Promote a holistic, cohesive and efficient
approach to corporate reporting;
• Enhance accountability and stewardship for the
application and use of inputs in the business to
deliver retail value; and
• Support integrated thinking, decision-making and
actions that focus on the creation of value over the
short, medium and long term.
At the centre of our Integrated Reporting is the
retail value creation model. This attempts to explain
how the macro and internal inputs into the business
(Capitals) are used through our strategy and
business activities to deliver performance outcomes
in FY23.
Refer to the following pages for further details on
each of these capitals.
This is the third year we have also reported under the
Global Reporting Initiatives (GRI) framework. Refer
to pages 60 and 61 of this Annual Report for further
information on the GRI reporting framework and
The Warehouse Group’s material topics, and
pages 110-113 for the GRI content index.
The Group’s Board and Management have
established internal preparation and quality control
processes to ensure the quality and integrity of this
report. While we have not sought external audit
or assurance for the non-financial information
contained throughout this Integrated Report,
we have received limited assurance on selected
standards of the Group’s GRI disclosures as well as
our carbon emissions and energy consumption which
are audited by Toitū Envirocare.
SOURCING PRODUCT
SUPPORTING NEW ZEALAND
COMMUNITIES
INTEGRATED RETAIL
SALES ENVIRONMENT
BRINGING PRODUCT
TO MARKET
UNDERSTANDING
OUR MARKET
MEMBERSHIP
INPUTSOUTPUTS
HUMAN CAPITAL
FINANCIAL CAPITAL
INTELLECT UAL CAPITAL
MANUFACTURED CAPITAL
OUR NETWORKS
SOCIAL AND
RELATIONSHIP
CAPITAL
OUR
RELATIONSHIPS
OUR
PEOPLE
NATURAL
CAPITAL
OUR
ENVIRONMENT
OUR
CUSTOMERS
• 246 stores including 40 SWAS
• 26 The Warehouse stores with grocery offering
including 12 with fresh fruit and veges
• 72 The Warehouse stores with Garden Centres
• 14.2% increased foot traffic with in-store sales
up 9.7%
• Raised $4.1m for New Zealand charities and
communities, $83.4m since 1982
• Conducted 266 Labour and Environmental
third party onsite audits
• 90% achievement on all environmental factors
• Started engaging with our suppliers on
GHG emissions management as part of our
programme to reduce (Scope 3) emissions
• Operating cashflow $214.2m (FY22: $105.4m)
• Capital expenditure $113.2m (FY22: $107.5m)
• Final dividend 8.0 cps
• $145m Sustainability Linked Loans
• Liquidity of $421.9m
• Group Store NPS up 2.6pts to 76.3
• SKU reduction of 4.8% for The Warehouse and 13.6%
for Warehouse Stationery
• Online sales 10.9% of total sales
• Click & Collect sales 51.8% of online sales from
omnichannel brands
• The Warehouse 10.6% of core retail market share
• Women in 50.0% of senior leadership roles
• 101% gender pay equity
• Established 26-week full pay Parental Leave P{olicy
• Critical events: 8 in FY23 (FY22: 52)
• TRIFR: 32.8 per million hours worked (FY22: 24.7)
• Lost-Time Injuries reduced by 10.9%
• 33% of private label sales from products with
sustainable attributes (FY22: 22%)
• 43% of our private label sales were derived from
products with packaging that is compostable or which
can be recycled via New Zealand's kerbside recycling
infrastructure or instore (FY22: 22%)
• 7,657 tCO
2
e of Scope 1 and 2 emissions (down 43.3%)
• 100% of the Group’s passenger fleet is full EV
• Diverted 72.9% of operational waste from landfills
• Diverted 198.9 tonnes of post-consumer waste from landfill
We strive to build
world-class customer
experiences and an
ecosystem enabled by
our portfolio of brands,
our supply chain
network and enterprise
systems.
Our expertise puts our
customers at the centre
of all that we do. We have
enhanced our focus
around five key strategic
customer experiences –
which are aligned with our
purpose, our vision and
our values.
We want to build strong
relationships with our
communities and our
stakeholders to deliver
sustainable value and
positive change.
We strive to create a
dynamic, purpose-
driven organisation that
enables, equips and
empowers our people to
succeed.
Our financial capital
initiatives continue
to focus on ensuring
financial resilience
while deploying more
capital to execute our
strategy.
Our vision is to make
sustainable living easy
and affordable for
everyone, to increase the
sustainability of our own
operations and help our
customers save money
while doing their bit to
save the planet.
INTEGRATED
REPORT
RETAIL VALUE
CREATION PROCESS
FINANCIAL
CAPITAL
$
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20232829Integrated Report
Risk management
The Group's risk management framework has
been designed to identify, assess, control and
monitor its key risks. The identification and
ongoing management of these key risks assists
the business in achieving its objectives and
goals.
The Group has defined its risk appetite and
recognises four main categories of risk:
• Strategic Risk – the consequence of an event
occurring which will damage the Group’s
business model, undermining its value
proposition which attracts customers and
generates revenue;
• Financial Risk – referring to the Group’s ability
to manage its debt and financial obligations
and includes credit, liquidity, market and
capital project risk;
• Operational Risk – summarising the risks the
Group undertakes when it operates within
the retail environment which includes people,
legal and compliance, business continuity,
data and security;
• Business Risk – risk to earnings arising from
developing consumer trends, supply chain
risk, pricing volatility and product risk.
Risk management framework
Our risk management framework has
incorporated agile practices, which allows the
Group to identify and manage risk, and provides
it with a mechanism to adapt and respond to the
dynamic environment retail operates within. The
Group’s blended approach to risk management
considers both traditional risk management
and the agile operating model. Responsibility
for operational risk management sits with our
Leadership Squad but also considers the agile
operating model which allows our teams to react
quickly to change. This mixed model provides
flexibility, which accommodates and learns from
risk in executing strategic initiatives.
The Group, as part of its ongoing risk
governance programme, operates an Enterprise
Risk Management Committee, which comprises
senior leaders from across the Group. The
Committee meets every two months to ensure
there is a balanced view of risk and that critical
risks are understood, reviewed, appropriately
managed and reported.
Agile application
Rapid change and increased technological
innovation within the retail sector provides
challenges for the Group to effectively compete.
This increased velocity poses new challenges
INHERENT
RISK RATING RISK
RISK
APPETITE
RESIDUAL
RISK RATING
Inability to source/retain key team members
with appropriate capabilities to deliver
initiatives and strategy
Sourcing/Retention
of Key Talent
highlowmedium
Failure to implement sustainability practices means
potential loss of trust in our brands, potential loss of
market share, and exposure to looming regulation
Sustainability
highmediummedium
Acceleration of global competition and customer
experiences could reduce Group market share, increase
customer acquisition costs and/or decrease profitability
Global Competition
and Disruption
highmediummedium
Customers face an increasing cost of living affecting
their ability to transact with the Group
Cost of Living
very highmediummedium
Legacy IT infrastructure inhibits the
Group’s ability to transform at pace
Legacy IT
highlowhigh
Failure to execute on key deliverables impedes
other activities and may mean loss of market
leading position
Pace of Change
(execution)
mediumlowlow
Evolving consumer trends are not identified,
and the Group fails to meet their demand
Changing Consumer
Trends/Behaviour
highmediummedium
Global interruption of supply chain affects the
Group’s ability to maintain stock availability –
affecting sales
Logistics and Supply
Chain Disruption
highlowmedium
Failure to adequately protect our people and
customers from harm which could result in
serious injury
Health, Safety
and Wellbeing
mediumvery lowlow
Failure of the business to deliver a range of products
and services which the market needs and demands
Purchasing
Decisions
highhighmedium
$
$
$
Key risks
The Group periodically reviews key risks with its senior Leadership Squad to identify those risks which, if realised, would materially impact the success
of the business. These risks have been assigned sponsors and are appropriately managed through the implementation of suitable control measures to
manage the risk. These risks are as follows:
to risk and compliance functions as we strive to
provide complementary practices which enable
insight and value.
To combat this rapid rate of change, the Group
has embraced an agile operating model. As
part of this agile operating model, our team's
focus is on short cyclic bursts of development,
implementation and testing. Appropriate
execution risk provides valuable decision-
enabling insight throughout the initiative life
cycle and agile delivery.
In an agile operating model, the Group applies
an iterative risk management approach which
is managed through quarterly business reviews,
sprints, stand-ups and regular reviews. In this
way risk management responses are broken up
into smaller and more manageable components
while also encouraging collaboration across
stakeholders, project team members and
sponsors.
This allows optimal challenge without slowing
down agile teams. As initiatives are developed
and implemented, technology-supported
controls and real-time performance metrics
can be utilised to monitor and mitigate the new
business risks.
Ultimately, aligning risk management with
agile execution enables the Group to improve
customer experiences swiftly, thereby giving the
Group a competitive advantage.
Materiality
Materiality in the six capitals of our Integrated
Reporting is different from financial materiality
in the financial statements. It is driven by the
risk appetite settings, and the specific outcomes
and strategies in each capital. A material
improvement in our environmental reduction
outcomes, for example, may be different this
year compared to other years depending on
the starting position and default trajectory of
performance.
Building on an improvement may mean we have
a higher appetite for change than if we were
attempting to arrest a declining performance.
Materiality is therefore relative to every strategy
and metric in each capital and is used to filter
what is reported and what is not. The Integrated
Report is not the definitive or last word that the
organisation has to say on a given topic; it is
the material performance report against those
elements in the capitals that we are trying to
influence or improve.
This is the third year we have reported under
the Global Reporting Initiatives (GRI) framework
and material topics. In 2023 we performed a
high-level internal review of the material topics
previously identified with a focus on the actual
and potential, positive and negative impacts
these topics have on our environment, the
economy and our people. Refer to pages 60 and
61 for our GRI Report and the material topics
under our GRI reporting framework.
RISK &
MATERIALITY
Mōrea me te Tūponotanga
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20233031Risk & Materiality
different products. In addition, 12 The
Warehouse stores now provide a fresh
grocery offering to our customers. This
is going very well, with all products
(except bananas) sourced locally,
supplying in-season fresh fruit and
vegetables.
Our customers are also loving our
Garden Centres in 72 of our 88 The
Warehouse stores. This year, we have
installed new garden equipment in
these stores, enabling a better growing
environment, better racking and easier
customer access areas.
Customers continue to prefer our
self-service checkouts, which have
been deployed into over half of all The
Warehouse stores. These checkouts
have become an increasing helpful
customer experience in our stores,
especially in The Warehouse stores
with a grocery offering.
We continue to optimise our
Warehouse Stationery store-within-a-
store (SWAS) integration programme
with a further five Warehouse
Stationery SWAS stores opening
during the year including Lower Hutt,
Palmerston North, Timaru, Warkworth
and Hillcrest Hamilton.
We are excited about the upcoming
new store openings in Wānaka in
October 2023, including new The
Warehouse, Warehouse Stationery
SWAS and Noel Leeming stores in this
growing region of New Zealand.
We also announced the closure of The
Warehouse and Warehouse Stationery
in Belfast, Christchurch and Noel
Leeming Northlink in September
2023. We have temporarily closed
The Warehouse Tory Street store in
Wellington following an electrical fire,
and are reviewing the location of this
Wellington store.
Decisions like these are never made
lightly and we take into consideration
a number of factors such as population
growth, foot traffic and proximity to our
nearby stores. This is part of our regular
store optimisation review to ensure we
have our people and stores in the right
place, and in the case of Belfast, we
have seen more customers choosing
Our purpose to help Kiwis
live better every day is
enabled by developing
a world-class customer
experience through:
1. Our portfolio of brands, both online
and instore;
2. A reliable and sustainable
distribution and supply chain; and
3. Our enterprise systems, processes
and data.
Our portfolio of brands –
online and in store
We are proud of our portfolio of brands
which provide a variety of products
to serve our customers, wants and
needs through our ecosystem of
online, mobile app, in store and service
offerings.
Our diversified brand portfolio delivers
a range of products – from homeware,
toys, grocery and apparel; stationery,
office and study equipment; outdoor
gear and sportswear; and a full
electronic and appliance product and
service offering to kit out every area of
our customers’ homes at a strong value
price point.
Customers have the choice to shop
at their own convenience, through
our 246 stores, 3 mobile apps, and
5 online sites – all supported by our
membership programmes which enable
us to build stronger relationships
with our customers and extend their
engagement across the Group.
Store development
Our store strategy is all about ensuring
we have the right stores, with the right
footprint, in the right place for our
customers. We undertake a great deal
of research, including population and
demographic shifts, when looking at
new store locations, and we review
store performance on an ongoing
basis. During FY23, The Warehouse,
Warehouse Stationery and Noel
Leeming have seen some consolidation
of store locations as we optimise our
store network.
In particular, in May 2023, we closed
The Warehouse Snells Beach, the
Warehouse Stationery and Noel
Leeming Warkworth stores and
opened an exciting new retail centre in
Warkworth including The Warehouse,
Warehouse Stationery (SWAS) and a
new Noel Leeming store.
In addition to the Warkworth retail
centre opening, during the year we
closed The Warehouse South City,
Warehouse Stationery Auckland
CBD and Warehouse Stationery
Johnsonville. We opened a new
Torpedo7 store in Botany, moved the
Torpedo7 Christchurch store to a larger
site, and closed the smaller of our two
Noel Leeming stores in Dunedin.
In FY23, 26 The Warehouse stores
received a new grocery customer
experience roll-out with benefits
including greater grocery, pantry
and chilled food offerings. We
have expanded our private label
Market Kitchen range to include 64
up by 5 in FY23
STORESSWAS STORESFOOT TRAFFIC
OUR
NETWORKS
Ngā Kōtuitanga
2464014.2%
to shop in our larger nearby locations,
including our new stores in Papanui.
Store team and customer
safety
Our team members and customers
safety is of utmost priority for The
Warehouse Group. As retail crime
continues to challenge our business
and our team, we work closely with
New Zealand Police to mitigate every
possible occurrence in our stores. As a
Group, we have implemented a number
of our own initiatives to keep our
people and customers safe. We have
installed fog cannons, glass guards,
strong-room door strengthening and
alarm integration in our Noel Leeming
stores, and alarm system upgrades in
110 stores across our network.
Customer shopping habits
in store and online
The year in review has seen a significant
shift as customer's shopping habits
return to normal after an unprecedented
surge in online shopping during the last
three years of COVID-19 disruption, and
customers took to shopping online to
access the goods they needed. In FY23,
customers moved back to shopping in
store with foot traffic up 14.2% and store
sales up 9.7%.
As our in-store sales increased, online
sales decreased compared to the prior
year, with online sales making up 10.9%
of total Group sales in FY23 compared
to 16.8% in FY22, but increasing
compared to pre-COVID-19 times, up
from 7.8% in FY19.
Customers continue to embrace
collecting their online orders in store
through our Click & Collect offering
– particularly at The Warehouse
and Noel Leeming stores. Total
Click & Collect sales accounted for
51.8% of omnichannel online sales
(FY22: 49.0%), including 47.8% of The
Warehouse online orders and 62.9%
of Noel Leeming online orders. This
year we updated our Click & Collect
pricing model in The Warehouse where
customers can use Click & Collect for
free when products are in stock at
their selected store, or with the option
of paying a small $3 fee to get any
product transferred to a store of their
choice.
This has been accepted across all our
store channels as we continue to offer
Warkworth
Building is constructed with smart technology and highly insulated roofing and walls with the intention to
reduce energy consumption.
The use of wooden framing means we have a lower carbon footprint in comparison with
conventional steel-framed buildings.
The building is powered by 252 solar panels on the roof, generating a reduction of 140kWh of electricity.
Our stormwater tank helps us collect and conserve rainwater, which is used in our Garden Centre's
irrigation system (this is also powered by the rainwater).
Later this year, six EV charging stations will go into the parking with more planned at a later date.
The Warehouse Warkworth is our 40th store location to offer soft-plastics recycling as part of
The Packaging Forum's Soft Plastic Recycling Scheme. Customers can drop off their used
ink and toner to the store to be recycled.
Noel Leeming Warkworth supports our e-waste programme, helping its customers to recycle
their e-waste.
Building the most energy-efficient
retail building in New Zealand
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20233233Our Networks
customers the products they want,
when and where they need them, while
ensuring we cover our own cost to
serve.
Our mobile apps continue to resonate
with customers across The Warehouse,
Noel Leeming and TheMarket. In
particular, The Warehouse app ranked
as the No.1 most downloaded shopping
app in New Zealand for 107 days in
FY23. We know our customers use it
for shopping on the go, and also use
the app to find products and compare
prices while shopping in store.
Our third-party marketplace, powered
by TheMarket.com, extended into
The Warehouse. This expansion now
allows third-party sellers to surface
their products for customers via The
Warehouse and TheMarket.com, all
through TheMarket as our centralised
third-party seller platform.
A reliable and
sustainable supply chain
The reliability and efficiency of our
supply chain is critical to getting
products from our suppliers, through
our distribution networks, into store
and available for our customers.
In recent years, supply chains
have been challenged, availability
constrained, and cost of shipments
at record highs. We are thrilled that
by working strongly with our loyal
suppliers and freight partners, these
challenges and constraints have eased
in this financial year and are returning
to relative normality. Supply chain and
shipping costs have also normalised
back to pre-COVID-19 levels.
We did experience supply congestion
during our peak trading period of
November to December 2022 and while
global supply chains and shipping
partners returned to normal supply
volume levels, their own infrastructure
took time to catch up. That did cause
some delays with products getting
through our distribution centres and
into stores, as well as in fulfilment
delivery to our customers, but again
these congestions have significantly
lessened.
The grocery supply chain has stepped
up to our increased demand levels.
Our grocery private label, Market
Kitchen, has grown at pace and while
access to equitable cost prices remain
challenged, we are seeing this supply
chain improve.
We are enabling process changes
across our own distribution and
fulfilment network, and this year saw
the go-live of our new Warehouse
Management System (WMS). We are
now embedding this new system to
create better ways of working and
unlocking operation and distribution
efficiencies including pack size
optimisation and distribution of fuller
pallets.
Our key operating metrics to monitor
the performance and efficiency of our
distribution network include cost per
units handled, distribution cost to
serve, and fulfilment cost to serve.
Our distribution cost to serve (cost per
unit of distribution to store) decreased
during the year. We saw increased
efficiencies this year as store sales
across procurement, distribution and
fulfilment. This has allowed our team
members to deliver even better in-store
and online customer experiences.
The largest initiative is the deployment
of our Enterprise Resource Planning
Finance and Inventory (ERPFI)
solution and this has been a multi-year
development programme. Testing is
expected to continue through 2023
with the go-live in the second half
of FY24, depending on progress with
testing and avoiding disruption from
peak trading.
The first phase of our Group Order
Management Solution (GOMS) went
live in October 2022. Through our
brands’ eCommerce webstore and
mobile apps, future GOMS releases will
deliver a single fulfilment optimisation
solution integrated with real-time
inventory for all our brands. This will
improve our customer experience for
online orders, for delivery and Click &
Collect.
Our Master Data Management
(MDM) system is deployed across
all our brands and products and is
integrated into our ERPFI Inventory,
WMS and eCommerce platforms. Our
last iteration will see us integrate
dimension and supplier data through
a self-service portal, expected to be
completed in FY24.
Our Human Capital Management
(HCM) system had a first release
in October 2022 which included
deployment for around 2,400
employees, with the full system going
live in August 2023. This has now been
rolled out to all 11,000 team members
including stores and distribution
centres. In addition to the Employee
Self-Service module, full deployment
includes automation through our
recruiting and new employee
onboarding processes.
Looking forward to FY24, our key
systems will include go-live of the
ERPFI solution, final roll-out of GOMS,
further data enrichment in MDM, and
the deployment of MS Dynamics 365 at
Torpedo7 to help integrate all our agile
brands across the Group.
The Warehouse app ranked
as the No.1 most downloaded
shopping app in New Zealand
for 107 days in FY23.
increased, productivity improved,
COVID-19 restrictions eased, and we
lapped FY22 which saw COVID-19
disruption in our distribution centres
including shutdown periods, rapid
antigen testing and social distance
requirements.
In comparison, our customer fulfilment
cost to serve (cost per unit of
distribution of product to customers
home or via Click & Collect) increased
during the year. As customers returned
to pre-COVID-19 shopping habits,
online sales have decreased in FY23,
resulting in less volume going through
our fulfilment centres. In addition, we
have seen a large increase in costs
from our freight-forwarding partners
including New Zealand Post. The
combination of less volume and higher
variable and fixed costs has increased
our fulfilment cost to serve.
Powered by enterprise
systems, processes and
data
In FY23 we made significant progress
in developing our operational systems
to enable access to real-time data
CLICK & COLLECTIMPROVED SUPPLY CHAIN
of omnichannel
online sales
51.8%
ONLINE SALES
of total salesdecrease in value of
goods in transit
10.9%30.5%
$
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20233435Our Networks
In FY23, our focus remained
on enhancing and delivering
our five strategic customer
experiences aligned with
our purpose, vision and
values.
1
Helping customers to find
what they’re looking for,
at prices that are great,
every time
Offering a diverse range of products at
price points that customers perceive
as great value continues to elevate
their experience with our brands.
Our approach to range and pricing
involves harnessing the power of
data alongside the expertise of our
experienced team. We curate our
ranges and manage our pricing
structures using data to pinpoint
our optimal range of Stock Keeping
Units (SKUs) and affordability. The
way our teams work with data enables
us to proactively respond to shifting
customer preferences through
forecasting, price optimisation, and
range continuity.
This year we launched Group
Marketplace initiative, which extends
our Marketplace range into The
Warehouse website and app, New
Zealand’s No.1 retail site by traffic, by
integrating products from TheMarket.
com. With over 103,000 third-
party products from 71 third-party
merchants now available to our
existing online customer base, we've
delivered $8.9 million additional sales
through Group Marketplace.
In the current economic climate, our
Price Perceptor products continue to
be a key driver for our customers, with
The Warehouse delivering strongly
through our Everyday Low Price
(EDLP) positioning. For example, The
Warehouse recently introduced a new
value range of Samsung and Dyson
products, offering a curated selection
of quality appliances at affordable
prices. The Warehouse also maintained
its No.1 position in value perception
across key competes in FY23.
1
With the surge in food prices over the
last year, presenting a challenging
reality for most New Zealanders, our
commitment to providing access
to essentials at affordable prices
such as food, pet care, baby care,
and household basics remained
unwavering.
Our strides in grocery at The
Warehouse have been significant, with
grocery sales growing 26.1% to make
up 18.7% of total The Warehouse sales.
Within this category, we experienced
91.8% growth in pantry and chilled,
26.6% growth in household cleaning
items, and 23.8% growth in pet care.
We have expanded our range and our
private label Market Kitchen, launching
butter, coffee and sauces at excellent
price points. We have also ventured
into a trial to offer fresh bulk fruit and
vegetables at affordable prices in 12
of our stores. We remain committed to
value and staying in tune with what
our customers are looking for from our
brands.
2
Helping customers to enjoy
fast, easy and reliable ways
to get what they need
Our focus remains on ensuring
availability and efficient fulfilment
through our integrated supply chain,
enabling our customers to access the
right products quickly, sustainably and
at affordable prices.
For product availability, we've refined
our assortment selection processes,
optimising ranges for each category
while upholding Everyday Low Prices.
In FY23, significant progress was
made in redesigning our delivery
and fulfilment network. Our new
Warehouse Management System
has enhanced visibility and control
over stock flow, and we've continued
to work on optimising forecasting,
planning and transportation.
This year has seen a global decline in
online shopping post COVID-19, with
customers showing a preference for
in-store shopping. Our Group online
sales have returned to pre-COVID-19
levels, achieving $376.4 million. This
represents 10.9% of total Group sales
(including Gross Merchandise Value
(GMV) sales through TheMarket.com
and Group Marketplace), compared
to 16.8% in FY22. The Warehouse
contributed $119.0 million (6.3% of
its total sales, and Noel Leeming
contributed $118.1 million (11.1% of its
total sales).
Our customers still enjoy our
same-day Click & Collect offering
at The Warehouse and 1-hour at
Noel Leeming. Click & Collect
accounted for $156.6 million in
FY23, representing 51.8% of total
omnichannel online sales.
Online shopping and Click & Collect
continue to play an important role in
helping our customers get what they
need quickly and effortlessly.
3
Helping customers to
have access to affordable
solutions that help them
live sustainably
We are committed to helping make
sustainable living easy and affordable
for our customers. Last year, we shared
our ambition to increase the share of
private label products and packaging
that are sustainable or circular to
50% by 2025 and 100% by 2035. In
addition, we're committed to reducing
our Group's Scope 3 emissions – those
generated by our suppliers – by 50%
by 2035 and 80% by 2040.
We know sustainable choices matter
to our customers. In FY23, 33% of our
private label sales were from products
that featured one or more sustainable
materials or production attributes,
up from 22% in FY22. This accounted
for 46,637 individual product lines
and sales value of $343 million. Also,
43% of our private label sales were
derived from products with sustainable
packaging, a significant increase from
22% in FY22.
OUR
CUSTOMERS
Ngā Kiritaki
SKU REDUCTION FY23
The Warehouse
(FY22: 3.0%)
Warehouse Stationery
(FY22: 14.0%)
GROUP ONLINE SALES
2
GROUP CLICK AND COLLECT
MARKETCLUB MEMBERS
4.8%13.6%
10.9% of total Group sales
(FY22: 16.8%)
51.8% of total omnichannel
online sales (FY22: 49.0%)
1
Source: The Warehouse Group Brand Tracker. The Warehouse leads on "has good everyday prices", "is easy to find great value" and "has great deals" perceptions vs key competes.
No.1
THE WAREHOUSE
Value perception
across key competes
$376.4M
$156.6M
(an increase of 122% on FY22)
1.3m
>
2
Online sales includes online sales through omnichannel brands and Gross Merchandise Value ("GMV") sales through TheMarket.
com and Group Marketplace."
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20233637Our Customers
We have continued to grow our in-
store circularity solutions, including
soft-plastic recycling in 44 The
Warehouse stores, e-waste and mobile
phone recycling in 33 Noel Leeming
and Warehouse Stationery stores, and
ink and toner recycling in 131 Noel
Leeming and Warehouse Stationery
stores.
By making sustainable products and
solutions more accessible for our
customers, we're taking significant
strides towards achieving our vision.
4
Helping customers to
feel recognised and
rewarded
Growing customer engagement
and nurturing relationships are
fundamental in the world of retail. At
The Warehouse Group, our efforts
are dedicated to delivering what our
customers want and need through our
portfolio of brands, ensuring they keep
choosing us.
MarketClub sits at the heart of our
customer engagement strategy,
offering customers added value and
discounts. Since its October 2021
launch, MarketClub's growth has
been exceptional, growing to over 1.3
million members at the end of FY23, an
increase of 122% on FY22.
We have been encouraged by the
rising number of The Warehouse
customers opting to join MarketClub.
In FY23, our members saved nearly
$18 million through MarketClub deals.
Our most popular MarketClub deal was
our $4 and $5 Tararua 500g butter,
which was enjoyed by over 220,000
members.
As we introduce new features and
brands, the expansion of MarketClub
across the Group remains a central
focus. We envision considerable
growth potential for the programme
in the future, as the platform gets
smarter and learns what our customers
love from our brands. Our commitment
to investing in MarketClub remains
steadfast, as it's a key driver of
customer value and growth.
5
Helping customers get easy
and high-quality customer
service every time
Providing great customer service, both
online and in store, is crucial to our
customers' experience. With customers
using our online platforms for research
and inspiration, and buying in-store
more, we're working to make sure we
have the right people in the right
places to give our customers the
service they expect.
We're pleased to see that our
weighted-average in-store Net
Promoter Score (NPS) for the Group,
which measures customer satisfaction,
increased in FY23 to 76.3, a 2.6 point
increase on FY22.
We continue to improve our stores
across our network to make it easier
and quicker for customers to find
what they need, and we continue to
upgrade our systems to support our
customers better. Our team members
are rostered to work where and when
they're needed, thanks to our Group
Workforce Management Solution
that collaborates with other systems.
Our ERP systems will help us predict
demand, plan, and budget accurately.
We've successfully implemented our
agile model in stores and in the field
to adapt to changing customer needs
and allocate resources effectively.
FY23 GROUP WEIGHTED-
AVERAGE IN-STORE NPS
THE WAREHOUSE NZ
CORE RETAIL MARKET SHARE
THE WAREHOUSE NZ
TOTAL RETAIL MARKET SHARE
76.3pts
up 2.6 pts on FY22
(across all four omnichannel brands)
(up 0.5pts from FY22) (down 0.5pts from FY22)
10.6%5.3%
At The Warehouse Group,
our efforts are dedicated to
delivering what our customers
want and need.
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20233839Our Customers
In June 2023, TWGB hosted an
event in Wellington to showcase the
extensive range of products and
services available to our government
and commercial customers and
show how we can support them with
their sustainability goals through
our commitment to sustainability
and ethical sourcing practices. Not
only did we demonstrate how our
brands come together in a physical
space, but we were able to share
our knowledge and challenges on
our mission to be New Zealand's
most sustainable B2B supplier. In
particular, we demonstrated how we
can support government customers
with procurement through our recent
inclusion on the Government Property
Group Workplace and Classroom
Furniture contract.
During the Hawke's Bay relief response,
the TWGB team partnered with key
government agencies to provide
emergency supplies for affected
families. Within 24 hours, we delivered
27 pallets of products to families
most in need including bedding,
towels, toys, and other essential
supplies. TWGB continues to partner
with humanitarian and government
agencies to provide ongoing
accommodation fit-out support for
families displaced in Auckland and the
Hawke's Bay. These fit-out solutions
include beds, dining and living room
furniture, and soft furnishings, with a
full delivery and installation service so
families can walk right into a furnished
home.
Our suppliers
Ethical sourcing
The Warehouse Group has had a
comprehensive ethical sourcing
programme for almost 20 years,
primarily focused on private
label products in The Warehouse,
Warehouse Stationery and Torpedo7,
to give our customers confidence
that our products have been
ethically sourced, and trust that we
are maintaining sound labour and
environmental standards throughout
our supply chain.
Our community and
government partners
Guided by our purpose of helping
Kiwis live better every day, The
Warehouse Group has been able to
continue to support our communities
with more than $4.1 million raised for
New Zealand charities and community
groups this year, bringing the total
raised to date to $83.4 million across
the Group since 1982.
At a national level our key charity
partners include Sustainable
Coastlines, Youthline, Women’s Refuge,
Variety – the Children’s Charity, The
Salvation Army, Parenting Place,
Whānau Āwhina Plunket, The Period
Place, Hillary Outdoors and Life
Education Trust. Over the course of
FY23 we have also supported many
more charities, including KidsCan
during our The Warehouse and
Warehouse Stationery Back to School
campaign, the Kindness Collective for
The Warehouse’s annual Mega Toy Sale
and Orange Sky Aotearoa when we
celebrated 50 years of Noel Leeming.
The generosity of our customers and
teams was felt during the extreme
weather events including Cyclone
Gabrielle in early 2023, with $251,680
raised by our The Warehouse,
Warehouse Stationery, Noel Leeming
and Torpedo7 customers. A further
$200,000 was donated by The
Warehouse Group, bringing the total to
$451,680 shared between community
groups including The Hawke’s Bay
Foundation, SuperGrans Tairāwhiti
Gisborne, The Northland Foundation,
ButtaBean Motivation, The Middlemore
OUR
RELATIONSHIPS
Te Ara Whanaungatanga
Foundation, Te Hā Oranga and The
Salvation Army foodbanks.
More information about our work with
national and local community groups
and organisations can be found on
pages 26 and 27.
The Warehouse Group Business
(TWGB) has been working with
organisations across New Zealand
to source and supply products and
services to multiple commercial
sectors since 2019. Our agile ways
of working means that we're well
positioned to be more responsive
to customer needs and ensure we
are delivering customer-centred
outcomes. This new way of working
will also help improve our business-to-
business (B2B) platforms and ensure
we're future-ready. This will enable
us to turn up as a 'one-stop-shop'
supplier, leveraging our extensive
supply chain to deliver complete
solutions for our B2B customers
across a variety of settings including
accommodation, education facilities,
and office environments.
Since the day Sir Stephen
Tindall founded The
Warehouse over 40 years
ago, the relationships we
have with our communities
and our stakeholders have
been critical to our success,
delivering value, creating
positive change and helping
us make a difference for
New Zealand and beyond.
This programme is underpinned by
our Ethical Sourcing Policy. This policy
outlines our requirements in eleven
dimensions: Management Systems,
Child Labour, Voluntary (Forced)
Labour, Health and Safety, Wages and
Benefits, Working Hours, Freedom of
Association and Collective Bargaining,
Environment, Subcontracting and
Business Integrity, and has recently
been expanded to include supplier
responsibilities for Greenhouse Gas
Management.
In FY23, The Warehouse Group’s
private label products were sourced
from around 680 factories primarily
located in China, New Zealand,
Australia, Bangladesh, USA, India,
Vietnam, Thailand, Malaysia and the
United Kingdom, involving about
300,000 workers.
Our private label factories must
undergo ethical, labour and
environmental assessments before
entering our supply chain. In FY23,
184 new factories qualified to enter
our supply chain via the recognition
of existing third-party credentials,
validated self-assessments or
independent third-party labour
and environmental audits. In
addition to all-important labour
rights, these assessments include
a review of our suppliers’ actions
to monitor wastewater discharge,
control air pollutants, dispose of
solid waste, enable recycling, and
deal with any hazardous waste. In
FY23, we conducted 266 labour
and environmental third party on-
site audits and maintained internal
continuous improvement oversight,
working actively with 296 factories
in the year to assist them achieve
compliance with our standards and
local regulations.
Out of our 680 active private label
factories, we found that 20 factories
(2.9% of private label factories) had
actual or potential negative social
impacts which they failed to address,
resulting in us ceasing trading
with them. Decisions to terminate
relationships with suppliers are not
taken lightly. The 20 factories we
ceased trading with consistently
failed to participate transparently
during assessments or did not meet
the baseline criteria set by our Ethical
Sourcing Policy.
The primary issue we identified during
on-site assessments was a lack of
transparency. This was evident in
42 factories (15.8% of those audited
this year). Another common actual or
potential negative social impact we
observed was maintaining legal limits
on working hours and compensation.
These findings emphasised the need
for ongoing monitoring and remedial
action, which we always require.
Our commitment remains firm: to
ensure that every partner in our supply
chain operates with the highest ethical
and social standards.
Overall assessment scores averaged
88% with a 90% average for
environmental factors, 94% average
for health and safety factors, and
96% average for employment policies
including child labour.
1
Engaging suppliers
Our programme at Tier 1 (final
manufacture) factory level is relatively
mature. We traced our orders to 680
Tier 1 factories, and we estimate these
represent 93% of private label product
orders. This year we also traced and
qualified 32 Tier 2 factories (raw
material and component suppliers to
our Tier 1 factories), relying on their
existing third-party credentials, self-
assessments with supporting evidence,
and a smaller number of on-site
assessments conducted by our own
specialists.
Training remains a critical part of our
engagement with suppliers. To help
our factories achieve The Warehouse
FACTORIES
Raised
for NZ
charities and
communities
total raised to date
across the Group
new factories qualified to enter our
supply chain via third-party audits
$
83.4m
$
4.1m
184
>
1
Refer to the Ethical Sourcing Report.
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20234041Our Relationships
Group’s ethical sourcing expectations
and develop new capabilities such
as carbon management, or the use
of more sustainable materials and
packaging, suppliers participated in
354 on-site or virtual training sessions
and completed 1,175 e-learning lessons
on various labour, environment and
greenhouse gas management topics.
In Bangladesh we and our suppliers
continue to co-fund programmes
under the Reimaging Industry to
Support Equality (RISE) initiative
which supports collaborative industry
action to advance gender equality
in global garment, footwear and
home textiles supply chains. Two new
factories joined us in this work over
the past year in addition to the two
factories whose programmes reached
completion.
Our supplier scorecard guides our
sourcing decisions and supplier
selection, and looks at labour and
environmental audit outcomes,
alongside commercial performance
measures. Going forward we intend to
include a representation of supplier’s
baseline greenhouse gas measurement
(GHG), and the presence of Science
Based Target initiative (SBTi) targets.
Our 2023 Ethical Sourcing Report with
full details of our programme will be
released in October 2023.
We have begun engaging our suppliers
on the topic of GHG Management
as part of our programme to reduce
(Scope 3) emissions within our supply
chain.
Our investors
Our relationship with our shareholders
is critical to our success as a key
provider of capital and owners of the
business.
We engage with our shareholders
through regular investor meetings,
the release of our interim and annual
reports, our annual shareholders'
meeting, governance roadshows, and
through market updates via the New
Zealand Exchange in accordance with
the principles of continuous disclosure.
We welcome all individual and group
meetings with a variety of investor
groups to gain further insights into
what is most important to them. We are
committed to transparent reporting
of both financial and non-financial
objectives. To report against all these
objectives, targets and measurements,
we report under Integrated Reporting
and Global Reporting Initiatives (GRI).
This is our fifth Integrated Report
through which we inform all
stakeholders of our full retail value
creation process – delivering key
outcomes through six capital inputs
from our networks, our customers, our
relationships, our people, our financial
capital and our environment. Refer to
pages 28 and 29 for full details.
This is the third year we have reported
under GRI as our sustainability
reporting framework. We have
maintained the view of our material
topics which are most important to our
shareholders and other stakeholders
and have reported on the relevant GRI
standards which are applicable to these
material topics. Refer to pages 60 and
61 for the GRI Report and pages 110-113
for the GRI Content Index.
In December 2022, the New Zealand
External Reporting Board (XRB)
released the Aotearoa New Zealand
Climate Standards (NZCS) for
mandatory application for annual
reporting periods beginning on
or after 1 January 2023. We have
already made progress in preparing
for these disclosures including
being a leader in the development of
New Zealand retail sector scenario
analysis for the Strategy section of
this framework. These scenarios will
be used to identify climate-related
risks and opportunities and develop
our transition plan to a 1.5-degree
world. The New Zealand retail sector
scenario public report was released on
19 September 2023 and can be found
here.
We are on the pathway to report under
the Aotearoa New Zealand Climate
Standards in FY24.
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20234243Our Relationships
We strive to create a
dynamic, purpose-driven
organisation that enables
and empowers our people
to succeed.
As volatile economic headwinds set
the tone for FY23, we recognised three
critical drivers to equip our people for
the challenging year ahead:
• Unlocking productivity and
performance through a focus on
leadership capability;
• Being the best place to work through
learning and career development,
employee benefits, and diversity and
inclusion; and
• Strengthening and streamlining
our health, safety and wellbeing
programmes so everyone gets home
healthy and safe every day.
A focus on business
productivity and
performance
Accelerating leadership
capability in our store
network
In FY23, we set out to boost leadership
capability, particularly across our store
network, starting with moving our store
leadership teams in The Warehouse,
Warehouse Stationery and Noel Leeming
to agile ways of working. This followed
two years of agile experience in our
Store Support Office (SSO), showing
how agile can empower our teams to
operate faster, better adapt to customer
needs and work cross-brand and cross-
functionally to deliver at speed.
Our store leaders are a core part of
defining business solutions, driving
positive outcomes in their stores and
regions, and have taken on opportunities
to lead initiatives and projects outside of
their stores. We’ve also seen an uplift in
cross-brand leadership succession and
an increase in gender diversity at store
and regional leadership with female
leaders increasing from 22% in FY22 to
29% in FY23.
Refining our labour
operating model
This year, we examined our labour
operating model across the business to
seek efficiencies where appropriate.
We refined our SSO agile structure
to improve our ability to deliver on
customer missions, supercharge
performance and productivity, and
strengthen our focus on operational
and financial efficiencies. In line with
these changes, we reduced our SSO
labour costs, disestablishing 340 roles.
While this was a tough decision for our
teams and business, it was an important
step in enabling us to respond to the
challenging retail environment and
changing customer priorities.
We standardised leadership and
team structures across the Group by
expanding our agile ways of working to
integrate our teams from TheMarket,
Torpedo7, Services, Customer Care,
Business Solutions and Logistics
(including distribution and fulfilment
centre management).
Be the best place to work
Growing our people
through learning
We’re proud to offer learning and growth
opportunities for our people, spanning
from retail and role-based learning,
leadership development, future skills
training, and transition assistance
programmes. Overall, there are around
140,000 hours of learning available to
our team members.
To support retail education, team
members can gain NZQA Retail
qualifications through our partnership
with ServiceIQ. This year, 23 team
members completed or began the
certificate programmes covering topics
such as service excellence, product
knowledge, health and safety on the job,
and resilience in a changing industry.
OUR
PEOPLE
Ngā Tāngata
Our The Warehouse Group Scholarship
supports those interested in completing
vocational qualifications related to
a career in retail. A total of 21 team
members have been awarded this
scholarship since it launched in FY21. In
addition, each team member has access
to the External Learning Fund, offering
up to $2,000 to fund a course or training
that supports their personal career
development.
In FY23, we expanded our store
leadership programmes, with over
41 team members taking part across
our brands. We grew our SSO Link
Leadership Development Programme,
with over 119 current and aspiring
leaders enrolled in FY23. We invited 450
leaders business-wide to attend high-
performance workshops focused on
unlocking personal and team potential.
Team members are encouraged to take
control of their own learning by making
use of Udemy, our digital learning
platform which offers 204,000 digital
courses across an array of topics.
Ensuring that our team members
understand their role in keeping our
customers, business and each other
safe is important. Anti-corruption
policies have been communicated to
all governance body members and
team members. In the year ended 30
July 2023, 86.3% of SSO team members
and 95.5% of store team members have
completed compliance module training.
Overall, we spent approximately 64,000
hours training our team members in
FY23, equating to 5.8 hours training per
person per year.
Looking after our teams
in 2023
We offer our people a variety of
employee benefits.
At the start of FY23, we supported our
team through COVID-19 with Care Leave
so they could take time off and adhere
to government regulations without
impacting their sick or annual leave
entitlements.
This year, we introduced Here for Good
Leave, giving team members paid
time off to volunteer for groups and
organisations that do good for people,
our communities and the planet. Being
Here for Good is an important part of our
DNA – so we’re proud to offer our team
the opportunity to lend a helping hand.
We’re pleased to see 79 team members
make use of our Parental Leave Policy
this year, which offers 26 weeks full
pay, topping up the Government’s paid
parental leave payments to 100% of a
permanent team member’s salary
or wage.
Full-pay Parental Leave Policy
79 team members utilised
this leave in FY23
26
weeks
of senior leaders
are female
Lost Time Injuries
50.0%
10.9%
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20234445Our People
where compliance obligations become
second nature.
To enable this, we embedded our health
and safety system ecoPortal in 2022 and
saw significant improvement in incident
reporting, data tracking and team
member response to safety huddles.
We maintained our tertiary level of
performance under the ACC Accredited
Employers' Partnership Programme,
which is the highest level. We also
reintroduced our store Health and Safety
Champion Programme, recognising
individuals for their active role in keeping
store environments safe.
Critical risk management
An essential part of our HSW strategy is
critical risk management, which monitors
and addresses high-risk activities with
the potential to result in fatality or a
life-altering injury. Our specific focuses
continue to be violent and aggressive
behaviour (VAB) and traffic management,
with their high potential to occur and
result in severe consequences.
By year end, 224 VAB incidents had been
reported, with one incident escalated
to WorkSafe. This increase reflects
improved reporting from our team and
ongoing increase of VAB incidents
across our network and our communities.
To mitigate VAB risks, all store team
members complete annual Situational
Our ongoing wage commitment offers a
minimum of $23.58 an hour to employees
at The Warehouse and Warehouse
Stationery with at least a year’s worth
of service, compared to New Zealand’s
minimum wage of $22.70 an hour. Noel
Leeming sales team members receive a
minimum of $22.70 an hour and $23.50
an hour for non-sales roles, while our
Torpedo7 sales roles receive an entry-
level wage of $22.70. Sales roles in
Torpedo7 and Noel Leeming can earn
commission. Currently, 12.7% of our
employees are covered by collective
agreements.
This year, recruitment slowed as we
navigated a tight talent market. The
average number of days to fill roles was
38 in FY23, up from 33 in FY22. Despite
this, we continued to fill critical roles
across the network and through peak
recruitment. In the second half of the
year, the talent market began to improve,
reducing our average number of days to
fill roles to 32.
We are pleased that our employee
turnover has decreased this year from
28.4% in FY22 to 26.9% in FY23.
Celebrating diversity
and inclusion
In FY23, we worked to empower our
teams to bring our diversity and inclusion
strategy to life by launching four team
member-led community groups: Te Ao
Māori, Pride, Wāhine (women) Advocates
and Neurodiversity. Members are enabled
to drive programmes and initiatives
that are important to them and help
elevate events such as Matariki and
Māori Language Week, International
Women’s Day and Pride Month. We plan
to empower and strengthen these groups
in FY24.
Gender equity remains a core focus and
we’re pleased to achieve 101% gender
pay equity. Female leaders hold 50.0%
of senior leadership roles, up from 46.6%
in FY22, and the Board comprises 50.0%
female directors since August 2022.
Refer to the full Diversity and Inclusion
Report on page 105 for more diversity
and inclusion objectives, initiatives and
metrics.
Health, safety and
wellbeing (HSW)
The health and safety of our people
and customers is top priority, with
conversations, reporting and action plans
spanning every level of the organisation,
from the HSW Board committee, our
Leadership Squad and our teams on the
shop and distribution centres floors.
In FY23, we strengthened and
streamlined our training programmes and
initiatives to increase health and safety
confidence and reduce risk of injury.
This reflects our intention to move from a
culture of compliance to a culture of care,
Incident Management training covering
de-escalation and prevention skills. To
compliment our training, we invested
$1.8 million this year to strengthen store
security measures, particularly within our
Noel Leeming stores.
To improve traffic management practices,
we introduced a new learning programme
across our sites and implemented
consistent reviews and management
processes through ecoPortal. Only one
critical traffic management incident was
reported in FY23, down from 11 in FY22.
Eight other critical risk events (previously
known as Severity 1 events) were reported
this year, significantly down on FY22’s
52 events reported. We’re pleased to see
our Lost Time Injuries reduce by 10.9%.
Similarly, the Lost Time Injury Frequency
Rate (LTIFR) was 13.7, down from 14.2 in
FY22.
In FY23, Total Recordable Injuries (TRI)
increased 21.8% to 470, up from 386
in FY22. The Total Recordable Injury
Frequency Rate (TRIFR) was higher at
32.8 per million hours worked, based on
14.3 million hours, compared to 24.7 per
million hours worked in FY22, based on
15.6 million hours.
This year, same-day injury reporting was
90%, up from 89% in FY22 and on track to
reach our target of 96% by FY25. However,
incidents closed within 10 days dipped to
87% compared to 90% in FY22.
per million hours
worked
(FY22: 24.7)
TRIFR
32.8
We continue
to evolve our
wellbeing
approach
to focus
on holistic
wellbeing for
our teams.
There are no workers who are not
employees controlled by the Group for
which the organisation is responsible.
There were no fatalities in FY23.
Safety assurance reviews
As an ACC Accredited Employer, Safety
Assurance Reviews play an integral
role in managing our hazards and risks,
and ensure best practice and legal
requirements are applied across all our
sites. In FY23, we conducted 113 reviews,
including 11 across our logistics and
fulfilment centre locations for the first
time. These provide both assurance and
valuable insights for us to plan future
improvements and identify areas
of focus.
Wellbeing
We continue to evolve our wellbeing
approach to focus on holistic wellbeing
for our teams. FY23 saw us bring more
structure to our wellbeing strategy
focusing on four key areas: mental,
physical, financial and ways of working.
Across each pillar, we developed
engagement programmes and offered
optional learning opportunities to help
boost team member wellbeing. We
worked closely with our partner Benestar
to offer confidential support to our
team members, including professional
coaching, personal counselling and
access to a self-serve Wellness portal.
Critical risk
events
8
(FY22: 52)
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20234647Our People
categories such as grocery, pantry and
chilled items in The Warehouse and smart
home, mobile phones, and appliances in
Noel Leeming.
Gross margin was disappointing in the
first half as the costs of products and
freight were impacted by inflation and
global supply chain disruption. While
striving to continue to deliver value to our
customers by keeping prices as low as
possible, we did not move quickly enough
to manage these costs through our
margin. In the second half we took action
through margin management initiatives to
recover some of this loss while preserving
value on critical items. Overall Group
margin increased from 32.7% in the FY23
half year to 33.4% for the FY23 full year.
Gross profit margin decline in the second
half was 180 basis points versus 200
basis points in the first half. Although an
improvement, this is still down from 35.3%
in FY22, and we continue to put in place
initiatives to recover this.
Operating profit1 was $61.2 million,
down from $116.8 million in FY22.
Lower operating profit for the year
was significantly impacted by the
decrease in gross margin, combined
with increased CODB. While the CODB
increased in dollar terms we were able
to decrease this as a percentage of
sales from 31.8% in FY22 to 31.6% in
FY23. The CODB increased mainly due
to the immediate expensing of key
information systems costs (Software as
a Service) and incremental depreciation
driven by increased capital expenditure
in recent years.
Adjusted net profit after tax (NPAT)
2
was
$37.5 million, compared to $85.5 million
in FY22.
In the second half of the year, the Group
undertook a number of actions including
Our financial capital initiatives
continue to focus on ensuring
financial resilience while
deploying capital to execute
our strategy. Our demand
for capital within the Group
reached a new high in
FY23, with core systems
and investment in our store
network being the largest
areas of investment. This
demand for capital is reducing
as we are through the peak of
this investment.
Our strategy on financial capital focuses
on the following key areas:
• Financial resilience through tough
economic times;
• Preserving gross profit margin while
maximising gross profit;
• Efficient allocation and prioritisation of
capital based on Group strategy and
return metrics; and
• Providing sustainable and long-term
returns to shareholders.
Financial resilience
This has been a challenging year,
operationally and financially, as our
customers face increased cost of living
pressures driven by inflation and interest
rates impacting their disposable income,
while our own cost of doing business
increased. Although we have seen sales
growth in The Warehouse, other brands
faced sales declines as customers
experienced a tightening of their
disposable income. Our margins were put
under pressure as we absorbed increased
costs of product and freight that we did
not pass on to customers.
After a disappointing decline in gross
profit margin and increased CODB in the
first half of the year, margin management
initiatives have improved gross margin
in the second half across all brands. We
made the difficult decision to restructure
areas of the business, particularly in the
Store Support Office, and have carefully
managed store labour. As a result, we
have seen efficiency gains and employee
expenses have remained flat year on year
despite wage pressures.
This pressure on financial performance
has seen us further ration capital
investment. We expect total project
spend for FY24 to be between $70 million
and $80 million.
Financial performance –
preserving gross profit
margin
Total Group revenue was $3.4 billion, up
3.2% from FY22. We are pleased to report
sales growth in FY23 following a decrease
in sales last year, resulting in FY23 sales
returning to FY21 record levels.
While the first half experienced relatively
strong sales growth of 4.8%, the second
half saw softer growth of 1.4% as the
increased cost of living constrained
customers’ discretionary spending.
Driving profitable sales growth has been
challenging in a constrained economic
environment. Category mix has changed
year on year as COVID-19 driven spending
behaviour in categories like office
furniture, bikes and large discretionary
items normalise and move to growth in
FINANCIAL
CAPITAL
Tahua Hautaonga
OPERATING CASH FLOWS
compared to $105.4m in FY22
CAPITAL EXPENDITURE
$107.5m in FY22 after the impact
of Cloud Computing Arrangement
accounting adjustments (SaaS)
$214.2m
$113.2m
down from 35.3% in FY22
GROUP GROSS
PROFIT MARGIN
33.4%
1
Operating Profit excludes the impact of IFRS 16 but includes Cloud Computing Arrangements accounting
adjustments (“SaaS”) which is now taken to the Profit and Loss rather than Balance Sheet capital expenditure.
2
Adjusted NPAT is before unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure. A reconciliation between Adjusted and
Statutory NPAT is located in Note 5 of the financial statements for the year ended 30 July 2023.
FINAL DIVIDEND
No interim dividend was
declared at the FY23 half year
8
cps
a restructuring of our Store Support
Office, integration of TheMarket.com
into the Group’s agile structure and
the closure of the unprofitable 1-day
business. Restructuring costs of $10.9
million ($7.9 million after tax) are made
up of staff redundancy costs, the write-
off 1-day business assets and the costs
connected with the disposal of 1-day
inventory.
Reported NPAT was $29.8 million,
compared to $89.3 million in FY22.
The Warehouse sales increased 9.6%
in FY23 to $1,892 million – the brand's
highest annual sales ever. Following a
very strong first half with 13.2% sales
growth, the second half was softer with
5.7% sales growth. Gross profit margin
declined in the first half to 36.3% but
recovered in the second half to 38.7%,
resulting in a full year Gross profit margin
of 37.4%, compared to 40.3% in FY22.
Gross profit margin was particularly
impacted by freight cost increases,
MarketClub promotional activity and
changes in product mix with sales
growth in lower-margin categories such
as grocery, pantry and chilled, and sales
decline in higher-margin categories such
as home furnishings and apparel.
Warehouse Stationery sales held up
relatively well, declining slightly by 0.4%
to $248.6 million in FY23. While customers
purchased working and learning from
home equipment during COVID-19 in
FY20 and FY21, sales plateaued in FY22
and FY23. FY23 saw sales growth of
1.7% in the first half, while sales declined
2.5% in the second half. Similar to its red
counterpart, gross profit margin declined
in the first half to 45.9% but improved
in the second half to 47.9%, resulting in
a full year gross profit margin of 46.9%,
compared to 47.5% in FY22.
Noel Leeming sales were impacted by
customers’ reduced and redeployed
discretionary income and follows a global
trend of a reduction in sales of big-ticket
items. Sales decreased 3.3% in the year
to $1,061 million; however, this is lapping
very strong years in FY21 and FY22 which
saw an increase in customers purchasing
big-ticket items as they lived, worked and
learnt from home during COVID-19, and
reflects 14.7% sales growth on FY19 (pre-
COVID-19). The Noel Leeming gross profit
margin was also impacted by product mix
with growth in lower-margin categories
such as communication products offset
by decreased sales in higher-margin
categories such as televisions.
While Torpedo7 sales decreased 5.4%
compared to FY22 to $162.2 million,
this brand was most impacted by
customers’ reduced discretionary
income. Comparisons are impacted by
exceptionally strong COVID-19 impacted
sales growth in FY21 and FY22. There has
also been a significant dislocation of the
bike market, Torpedo7’s largest category,
which had a negative effect on gross
profit margin with the current brand and
range mix. As at FY23 we provided for
an inventory impairment of $4.6 million
against Torpedo7 to manage excess
and aged stock. Decreased gross profit
margin, increased COBD, combined with
the inventory impairment, have resulted
in an operating loss for the year of $22.2
million. We have a recovery plan in place
for the business and this will be a major
focus in FY24.
Reported NPAT
down from $89.3m
in FY22
$29.8
m
TOTAL LIQUIDITY
(FY22: $378.8m)
$421.9m
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20234849Financial Capital
Cash flow and financial
Position
Operating cash flows were $214.2 million,
an increase of 103.2% with a decrease in
trading earnings before interest, taxes,
depreciation and amortisation(EBITDA)
offset by a material improvement in
working capital due to reduced inventory
and receivables. Other benefits to
operating cash flow include lower taxes
paid in FY23 compared to FY22.
The capitalised portion of Project Spend
amounted to $113.2 million in FY23 (FY22:
$107.5 million). Cash flows in relation to
this investment amounted to $115.1 million
for the year, after adjustments for timing
of cash payments (FY22: $107.5 million).
During the year, we sold the Royal Oak
property which was one of our owned
store sites. The sale proceeds were $30.5
million under a sale-and-lease-back
arrangement with the proceeds being
used to reduce debt.
Dividend payments were lower this
year due to no FY23 interim dividend
declared. Therefore, dividends paid in
FY23 were $35.0 million being the FY22
final dividend of 10.0 cents per share paid
during the year.
The above receipts and payments resulted
in net debt of $48.1 million at FY23 year
end, compared to $41.2 million as at FY22
year end, and a significant improvement
on the net debt of $83.4 million at FY23
half year.
Efficient allocation of capital
During a challenging trading period, we
have invested a significant amount of
capital in addressing our core systems,
store development, Store Support Office
and North Island Distribution Centre
facilities. We are excited about the
efficiencies and operational improvements
these investments will bring to the Group.
We are conscious that we spend capital
on the right initiatives and projects which
will deliver our strategic priorities and
drive shareholder value.
Much of the investment undertaken
in FY23 related to key Software as a
Service (SaaS) projects that are a blend
of capitalised and expensed spend.
The combination of capitalised and
expensed investment is referred to as
Total Project Spend.
Total project expenditure was $154.4
million including capital expenditure,
prepayments, SaaS expenditure and
operating expenditure. This comprised
capitalised project spend of $113.2
million in FY23 (FY22: $107.5 million) and
prepayments of $11.4 million in relation to
SaaS projects in FY23 (FY22: $8.2 million).
In addition to the capitalised portion,
expensed project spend relating to SaaS
projects amounted to $21.9 million and
non-SaaS-related expensed project
spend amounted to $7.9 million in FY23.
Similar to last year, the Group’s major
investments in the year were in core
systems, including the development of
ERP Finance and Inventory (ERPFI) for
which the Finance module was deployed
in FY22. Testing on the final end-to-
end inventory module will continue
through the first half of FY24 with go-live
scheduled for the second half of FY24.
Our core systems investment also
included delivery of our Group Order
Management System, Warehouse
Management System, Master Data
Management, and the implementation of
our new people and HR system, Human
Capital Management (HCM).
Store development continued in FY23,
but at a lesser pace than in FY22. New
stores opened this year included a new
Warkworth retail centre including The
Warehouse, Warehouse Stationery and
Noel Leeming, a new Torpedo7 store in
Botany Auckland, and the relocation
of Torpedo7 Christchurch to a bigger
site. Our Warehouse Stationery SWAS
integration programme continues, with
five new SWAS stores opening during the
year including Lower Hutt, Palmerston
North, Timaru, Warkworth and Hillcrest
(Hamilton) – taking the total number of
SWAS stores to 40.
Capitalised project spend as a
percentage of depreciation and
amortisation was 170% in FY23, compared
to 209% in FY22 (after SaaS adjustment).
As we near the end of many of our large
core system investment projects, capital
expenditure is expected to decrease in
FY24 to be between $60 million to $70
million (after SaaS adjustments), and
total project expenditure will be capped
at $80 million.
Access to capital
To ensure financial resilience and to
maintain our liquidity policy thresholds,
we maintain access to a variety of capital
sources. The Group manages three
primary sources of capital – operating
cash flow, debt and equity.
The Group’s operating cash flow has
increased significantly in FY23 due to
an improvement in working capital, with
operating cash flow of $214.2 million in
FY23, compared to $105.4 million in FY22.
The Warehouse Group has been listed
on the NZX for 29 years, and we were
pleased to be included in the NZX50
index again from May 2022. The last
year has seen a significant decline
in the Group’s share price, driven by
our financial performance against a
backdrop of a weakening macroeconomic
environment, consumers under cost
of living pressures and uncertainty in
outlook. The company share price has
decreased from $3.25 at FY22 to $1.80 at
FY23 year end and a market capitalisation
of $624 million.
During FY23, the Group secured
additional bank facilities of $50 million,
increasing our total facilities to $470
million. Bank facilities include $145 million
of Sustainability Linked Loans which
affirm our commitments and targets
under sustainable packaging, ethical
sourcing, reduction of carbon emissions,
and gender equity.
The Sustainability Linked Loans include
commitments to four key performance
indicators (KPIs), including:
• Sustainable packaging – at least 50% of
private label sales (by $ value) to have
sustainable packaging by 31 July 2025;
• Ethical sourcing – achieve traceability
of all Tier 2 sources for at least 50% of
Tier 1 suppliers by 31 July 2025;
• Greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions –
reduction in annual Scope 1 and Scope
2 GHG emissions by at least 20%
against baseline by 31 July 2025; and
Cash/(Net debt)
-100
-50
0
50
100
FY19
-76.2
-41.2
-48.1
168.1
160.5
FY20FY21FY22FY23
Total liquidity⁴
0
100
200
300
400
500
229.3
498.1
490.5
378.8
421.9
FY19FY20FY21FY22FY23
• Gender pay equity and women in
leadership – achieve at least 100%
gender pay equity and at least 50%
women in senior leadership roles by 31
July 2025.
Ernst & Young Limited have provided
limited assurance over the annual
performance of the KPIs within our
Sustainability Linked Loans, and the
disclosures against these made in this
Annual Report.
Cash on hand of $28.3 million, combined
with committed bank facilities of $470.0
million, less Group borrowings of $76.4
million, provides total liquidity of $421.9
million at FY23 year end, compared to
$378.8 million at FY22 year end. This is
in line with the Group’s Liquidity Policy
target range of between $350 million and
$450 million.
Sustainable and long-term
returns to shareholders
The Group has declared a final dividend
of 8.0 cps for the 2023 financial year. Due
to trading at the time, uncertain outlook
and liquidity below Group policy, no
interim dividend was declared at the FY23
half year.
The Group Total Shareholder Return
(TSR) was down 41.5% in FY23, compared
to 2.5% in FY22, due to a share price
decrease of 44.6% from $3.25 to $1.80
as at 30 July 2023, and the FY22 final
dividend paid during the year with no
FY23 interim dividend declared.
The Group’s TSR compares with the
performance of the market with the
NZX50 gross index growth of 4.8%
in FY23.
The Group measures and monitors return
on invested capital (ROIC) as one of the
key indicators of business performance.
ROIC represents the return generated
by the operating assets of the business
and, relative to return on funds employed,
includes the value of right-of-use assets
which largely relate to leased premises of
physical stores, distribution centres and
fulfilment centres. The Group is delivering
shareholder value where ROIC is greater
than its cost of capital. In FY23, ROIC was
6.3% (FY22: 9.9%).
$million
FY23
Capex Spend
FY23
Prepayments
FY23
SaaS Spend
FY23
Opex Spend
FY23 Total
Project
Core Systems15.411.216.23.646.4
Store Development26.6--
-
26.6
Other Information Systems20.1-3.72.226.0
Digital and Customer6.9
-
1.81.410.1
Supply Chain10.9
-
-
-
10.9
Other33.30.20.20.734.4
Total Project Spend113.211.421.97.9154.4
Capital
Expenditure
$113.2m
29.4%
13.6%
23.5%
17.8%
6.1%
9.6%
3
The difference between Capital Expenditure of $113.2 million and Capital Expenditure per Statement of Cash Flows of $115.1 million is due to timing of accruals and creditor payments.
4
Liquidity comprises cash on hand plus committed bank facilities less Group borrowings.
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20235051Financial Capital
Forest Stewardship Council (FSC), FSC
Mix or Programme for the Endorsement
of Forest Certification (PEFC) criteria
accounted for $66 million in sales
representing 5,500 products in FY23.
These certifications ensure the forests
at the origin of products within our
stationery, art and craft, furniture
and homeware ranges are managed
sustainably and provide a verified supply
chain.
Our memberships of initiatives like BCI
and The Packaging Forum, along with
certifications such as FSC, OEKO-TEX
®
100, Rainforest Alliance, and the Global
Recycling Standard, help extend our
influence on the origin of raw materials
and give our customers confidence that
their purchases are making a positive
difference.
With our apparel partners, we are looking
at more sustainably-made fabrics.
Key suppliers are already investing in
reducing water and energy use and
waste and investing in rooftop solar to
reduce their carbon footprint. Polyester
is a widely used material in garments
and home décor but has a significant
environmental impact. We are working
with suppliers to increase the use of
recycled polyester recovered from waste
fabrics and plastic bottles, like our puffer
jackets with outer fabric and inner filling
made from recycled polyester, each
equivalent to about 20 plastic bottles.
In FY23, 6,800 products within our
garment ranges were made with recycled
polyester, accounting for $34 million in
sales.
Packaging sustainability
Our customers want products with less
plastic packaging and expect packaging
to be easily recyclable through kerbside
collection.
Building capability
This year, we launched the Tomorrow
Test – a platform that empowers our
team to deliver sustainability outcomes,
big or small. Team members ask, "Does it
pass the tomorrow test?" in everything
they do to challenge, ideate and make
change happen.
The Tomorrow Test has driven the
integration of sustainability into some
team members' remuneration models
and position descriptions. These
team members' annual performance
is now directly assessed against their
contribution to our sustainability metrics.
To help our team members activate the
Tomorrow Test, we have equipped them
with sustainability training, launching
the The Warehouse Group Sustainability
Academy. This training builds our team
members' knowledge, craft and mindset
to achieve our ambitious sustainability
goals.
We continue to focus on the 2040
Sustainable Living Plan targets we
set last year. Our plan is grounded in
four building blocks, which are now our
default way of working as we roll out the
initiatives required to meet the targets
we have set:
Product and
packaging
sustainability
leadership
Improving the sustainability of our
products and packaging is one of
our biggest contributions to making
sustainable living easy and affordable
for everyone.
Our Targets:
• To increase the share of private
label sales
1
from products and
packaging which are more
sustainable or have a circularity
solution to 50% by 2025 and 100%
by 2035; and
• To reduce the Group’s Scope
3 emissions
2
generated by our
suppliers by 50% by 2035 and by
80% by 2040
We have made significant improvements
in product and packaging sustainability
in FY23. We are proud of our team
members and suppliers lifting the bar in
this space through sourcing practices,
improved production methods, material
choices, and reducing plastic waste in
packaging.
Our focus is on our private label products,
where we directly control product
specifications, processes and packaging.
Product sustainability
In FY23, 33% of private label sales in The
Warehouse and Warehouse Stationery
were from products with one or more
sustainable features, up from 22% in FY22.
This represents 46,637 individual product
lines and $343 million in sales.
We are a member of the Better Cotton
Initiative (BCI) – the world's largest
sustainable cotton initiative, operating
in 26 countries globally and accounting
for almost 20% of global cotton
production. In FY23, 81% of our private
label cotton garment and home textile
sales in The Warehouse were linked to our
investments in BCI production technique,
representing 30,000 individual product
items.
Wood and paper products certified to
TARG E TS
OUR 2040 SUSTAINABLE LIVING PLAN
FY23 PROGRESS
Enabling sustainable living solutions
that help our customers live a healthy,
low-carbon lifestyle
Providing circularity solutions
that reduce the amount of post-
consumer waste going to landfill
Increasing the sustainability
performance of our operations and
decreasing our operational carbon
emissions (Scope 1 & 2) to zero by 2040
Become a zero-waste status
organisation by 2025.
Reduce Scope 1 and 2
emissions, aligned to a
1.5-degree trajectory, by
42% by 2030 compared to
our 2020 base year
3
and
with the pathway to zero
emissions by 2040.
Reduce domestic and
international freight
emissions by 40% by 2030
and only use sustainable
transportation fuel by 2040
33% of private label sales were
derived from products with one
or more sustainable material or
production features (FY22: 22%).
13 of the 28 The Warehouse
stores which offer free EV
charging have been upgraded to
25kW DC rapid chargers.
• Soft-plastic recycling:
44 The Warehouse stores recycled 88.1 tonnes
(up 38.7% from FY22).
• e-waste recycling:
33 Noel Leeming and Warehouse Stationery stores
recycled 91.5 tonnes (up 55.3% from FY22).
• Ink and toner recycling:
131 Noel Leeming and Warehouse Stationery
stores collected 10.3 tonnes (up 17.0% from FY22).
• We diverted a total of 198.9 tonnes of post-
consumer waste from landfill disposal in FY23.
43% of our private label sales were derived from
products with packaging that is compostable or
which can be recycled via New Zealand's kerbside
recycling infrastructure or instore (FY22: 22%).
Engaged with our direct suppliers
representing around 80% of private label
orders to start measuring their Scope 1 and
2 emissions (our Scope 3) to set a baseline
of Scope 3 emissions by 2025.
1
Target boundary includes private label products at The Warehouse and Warehouse Stationery.
2
Target boundary includes private label products at The Warehouse and Warehouse Stationery, with planned expansion to other brands, against a baseline yet to be established.
3
FY20 was set as our base year in accordance with our SLL agreement which aligns our Scope 1 and 2 emissions reduction targets to 1.50C degree SBTi criteria.
Diverted 72.9% of operational waste from
landfill in FY23 (FY22: 73.4%).
• Scope 1 and 2 emissions decreased 43.3%
compared to FY22 and decreased 40.4%
compared to our 2020 base year.
• The Group’s light passenger fleet is now 100%
EV (FY22: 98%).
• 41% of our store sites now have 100% LED
lighting (FY22: 32%).
• Sea freight emissions reduced by 1,224.7 tCO2e
(9.8%) compared to FY22 and 3,784.8 tCO2e (25.2%)
compared to FY20 (Scope 3); and
• International airfreight emissions reduced by 333
tCO2e (62.5%) compared to FY22 and 288 tCO2e
(59.1%) compared to FY20 (Scope 3).
Increase the share of private
label sales
1
from more sustainable
products, or products with
circularity solutions to 50% by
2025 and 100% by 2035
Install electric vehicle (EV)
charging stations at all
possible stores by 2030
Enable 2.5 million
customers to
use our waste
recycling or
circular reuse
solutions by 2030
Increase the share of private label
sales
1
from products with more
sustainable packaging to 50% by
2025 and 100% by 2035
To reduce the Group’s Scope
3 emissions
2
generated by our
suppliers by 30% by 2030, 50% by
2035, and by 80% by 2040
Sustainable
living solutions
Circularity
solutions for
customers
Running a
Sustainable
Operation
Increasing the number of more
sustainable products and packaging
and helping our suppliers reduce their
GHG emissions
Product and
packaging
sustainability
leadership
CARING FOR OUR
ENVIRONMENT
Manaaki Taiao
for our people, our customers
and the planet
Our vision is to make sustainable living easy and affordable
for everyone. Increasing product and packaging sustainability
for our customers and reducing our waste and emissions is
no longer a nice to have – it is a must-do for our people, our
customers, and the planet.
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20235253Our Environment
Our suppliers continue to innovate to
reduce plastic packaging and improve
transport efficiency by optimising the
spatial characteristics of packaging.
We are exploring an innovative solution
to replace expanded polystyrene that
provides shock protection for consumer
electronics. To remove expanded
polystyrene used for this purpose
completely, we are piloting a solution
using moulded cardboard and a form of
mushroom-based packaging for one of
our TVs.
We have replaced almost all the vinyl
(PVC) satchels used across our bedding,
sheeting and duvet ranges with reusable
cloth bags or recyclable cardboard
bands.
In FY23, 43% of our private label sales
were derived from products with
packaging that is compostable or which
can be recycled via New Zealand's
kerbside recycling infrastructure or
instore, up from 22% in FY22.
Roadmap to measuring
Scope 3 emissions
For retailers globally, it is estimated
that Scope 3 emissions constitute
up to 96% of their overall emissions.
3
These emissions are difficult to measure
and influence as they are outside
our direct control and span complex
interconnected supplier networks and
geographies.
In our Sustainable Living Plan, we have
set an ambitious target to reduce Scope
3 emissions from private label products
at The Warehouse and Warehouse
Stationery by 50% by 2035 and 80%
by 2040, against a baseline yet to
be established. Most of our Scope 3
emissions are linked to the production
of goods in our supply chains, the use
of products by our customers, and their
disposal at the end of the product's life.
As of today, we only report on our
measured Scope 3 emissions generated
from the moment we take ownership of
the products we source. This includes
our freight emissions, transportation
and shipping from the port of ownership
to our distribution centres, stores and
customers, and the emissions generated
from our operational waste. In FY23, our
measured Scope 3 emissions reduced
by 13.4% compared to FY22 and 13.5%
compared to our 2020 base year.
We have continued to engage our
suppliers to deepen our understanding
of Scope 3 emissions and opportunities
to improve our data. We have begun
to expand our private-label supplier
ethical assessment process to capture
their Scope 1 and 2 emissions data (our
Scope 3) and their reduction targets and
initiatives. Refer to Our Relationships
section on page 40 of this report for
further details.
In the coming year, we plan to revisit
the baseline calculation of our overall
Scope 3 footprint across our entire value
chain. The methodologies and emission
factors used to generate these estimates
are continuously evolving. We will re-
examine our earlier work to ensure we
have the most accurate understanding
and deploy our emissions reduction
efforts where they are most impactful.
Our existing Scope 3 targets may also be
updated as a result of this work.
We are working with our shipping
partners to reduce the emissions
generated by the shipping of our
products. For example, we worked with
our sea freight partners to purchase
a fossil-based LNG and biomethane
mix, with a guarantee of origin shipping
fuel. This fuel can reduce the emissions
generated by the transport of sea
shipping containers by 25% of well-to-
wake emissions
4
.
The fuel purchase is attributed to our
shipments CO2e reduction through
declarations that are in accordance with
methodologies from the Clean Cargo
Working Group and ISO standards
14020/14021/14067.
This fuel purchase resulted in 134.1
tonnes tCO2e reduction in emissions. We
plan to expand the use of low-emission
fuels as their cost curve improves.
Sustainable
living solutions
We are establishing a new customer
value proposition around sustainable
living solutions. This area is in its
infancy, with initiatives currently
being developed, and we hope to
provide solutions to reduce our
customers' energy and water usage
and increase customer benefits to
help them live more sustainably.
Our Target:
• To install electric vehicle (EV)
charging stations at all possible
stores by 2030
Today, 28 The Warehouse stores offer
free EV charging, with 13 offering 25kW
DC rapid chargers.
Our sourcing and buying teams
already focus on sourcing and selling
sustainable living products for our
customers, including considering water
and energy efficiency. An example is
working with our suppliers to supply
more water – or energy-efficient, four-
and five-star-rated appliances in Noel
Leeming and The Warehouse.
While customer solutions are unfolding
organically, we need to build a structure
around this building block and build
the data capability and reporting of the
targets associated with these initiatives.
Circularity
solutions for
customers
In addition to reducing and improving
our packaging, we continue to offer
and expand circular solutions for our
customers to help them minimise
waste to landfill.
Our Target:
• To provide waste recycling and
circular solutions in all our stores,
where possible, enabling up to 2.5
million customers to reduce their
own waste by 2030, particularly
from the products we sell
In FY23, we trialled My Recycling Hub
at The Warehouse in Royal Oak. This
pilot programme helped us understand
how we can deliver integrated post-
consumer solutions that encourage
recycling hard-to-recycle items like
apparel, toys, oral care products
and coffee capsules. We collected
significant consumer insights and
data to inform our future circularity
programmes. This initiative highlighted
the need for increased collaboration
with government agencies, local
councils, and industry partners to fulfil
high customer demand and make wider
post-consumer recycling capabilities
successful.
We have continued to expand cost-
effective recycling and circular solutions
offered in our stores, including soft
plastics, e-waste, and ink and toner
recycling.
In FY23, we expanded our e-waste
recycling service to a further 12 Noel
Leeming stores. Our Soft Plastic
Recycling Scheme is now available in 44
The Warehouse stores, with six stores
launching this year, and we are now
offering an ink and toner recycling service
at all Noel Leeming and Warehouse
Stationery stores.
More customers are using our recycling
services, with the average collection
volume per store increasing by 15% from
1.7 tonnes to 2.0 tonnes. We are pleased
to continue the TerraCycle NZ recycling
programme with three The Warehouse
stores collecting hard-to-recycle
products and packaging like toothpaste
tubes and coffee capsules.
Through these post-consumer recycling
initiatives, we diverted 198.9 tonnes
of post-consumer waste from landfill
disposal in FY23.
In July 2020, the Government
announced six 'priority products' to
establish regulated product stewardship
schemes under the Waste Minimisation
Act 2008 (WMA). To ensure these
schemes are convenient, practical
and feasible for New Zealand, we are
participating in the Plastic Packaging
and Expanded Polystyrene Product
Stewardship Schemes design process.
Our engagement involves participating
in steering committees, technical
working groups and government
consultations, and we are co-designing
product packaging regulation, improving
process capability, and incentivising
waste minimisation practice.
Scope 2 emissions (tonnes CO
2
e)
Scope 1 emissions (tonnes CO
2
e)
Measured Scope 3 emissions (tonnes CO
2
e)
THE WAREHOUSE GROUP'S
EMISSIONS REDUCTION
PROGRESS
Emissions factors are sourced from the
Ministry for the Environment 2023
Measuring Emissions Guide.
The Warehouse Group has restated its Scope 2
emissions in FY20 (base year), FY21 and FY22,
to account for the August 2022 MfE revised
emission factors for electricity, which was a
change in methodology. A base year restatement
is required in accordance to our ISO 14064 and
Toitū CarbonReduce certification when an emission
factor change in methodology occurs.
2,6783,0162,799
2,342
10,162
10,98510,699
5,315
24,32624,68524,301
21,033
FY20FY21FY22FY23
SCOPE 3 EMISSIONS
compared to FY22 and reduced
by 13.5% compared to our
2020 base year
33%13.4%
PRIVATE-LABEL SALES
FROM PRODUCTS
WITH SUSTAINABLE
ATTRIBUTES
4.
Well-to-wake emissions include all marine fuel upstream and downstream emissions, including fuel production, delivery and use on board ships.
derived from products with
packaging that is compostable
or which can be recycled via
New Zealand's kerbside recycling
infrastructure or instore
43%
PRIVATE-LABEL SALES
up from 22% in FY22
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20235455Our Environment
Running a
sustainable
operation
Reducing our direct carbon emissions
(Scope 1 and 2) is one of the most
important parts of our sustainability
plan. Our ambition is to reach zero
emissions in our operations by 2040 –
without using carbon offsets.
Our Targets
• Reduce Scope 1 and 2 emissions
aligned to a 1.5-degree trajectory,
reducing 42% by 2030 compared
to our 2020 base year and with
a pathway to zero emissions by
2040;
• Reduce domestic and international
freight emissions by 40% by
2030 and only use sustainable
transportation fuel by 2040; and
• Become a zero-waste status
organisation by 2025.
On the path to sourcing
our electricity from 100%
renewable sources
In September 2023, we have a new
Solar Power Purchase Agreement with
Lodestone Energy, a new developer
and operator of solar electricity farms.
Over 260 The Warehouse Group sites,
including The Warehouse, Warehouse
Stationery, Noel Leeming and Torpedo7
stores, will be 100% powered by solar
energy as early as 2026. We’ll gradually
transition our Aotearoa New Zealand
sites to Lodestone Energy solar farms,
and by the end of December 2026, we
anticipate we’ll have eliminated close
to 100 per cent of all our New Zealand
electricity emissions.
Our partnership with Lodestone will
support the development of additional
renewable generation, supporting
New Zealand's goal to achieve 100%
renewable electricity generation by
2030. Lodestone's electricity provided
to The Warehouse Group will be
certified 100% renewable through the
New Zealand Energy Certificate System
maintained by Certified Energy. The use
of renewable certificates will ensure that
the Group's use of renewable electricity
is reflected in the New Zealand
Electricity Grid Carbon Intensity.
Overview of our carbon
emissions
Total measured emissions (Scope 1, 2
and measured Scope 3) for FY23 was
28,690 tCO2e, compared to 37,799 tCO2e
in FY22, a reduction of 24.1% from FY22,
and a reduction of 22.8% compared to
our 2020 base year.
We have reduced our electricity
consumption by 2.5% compared to FY22
and 6.0% compared to FY20. Scope
1 and 2 emissions decreased 43.3%
compared to FY22 and deceased 40.4%
compared to our FY20 base year.
Our significant reduction in emissions is
primarily due to two reasons. In August
2022, the Ministry for the Environment
(MfE) revised its methodology for
calculating Scope 2 emissions, which
required the Group to backdate
and restate our FY20 base year and
subsequent years. Secondly, the 2023
MfE emission factors were significantly
lower than historical years due to lower
use of fossil fuels and an increase in
renewable energy generation on the
national grid.
Our measured Scope 3 emissions
5
decreased 13.4% compared to FY22
and decreased 13.5% compared to our
2020 base year. This was primarily due
to the Group shipping significantly less
product in FY23, especially in the final
quarter as we normalised our inventory.
Initiatives that have had a specific
impact on the reduction of our
emissions include:
• The Group’s light passenger fleet
is now 100% EV, resulting in the
Group’s total fleet emissions, includ-
ing our light commercial utes, vans
and trucks, decreasing by 27.3 tCO2e
compared to FY22 and 36.8 tCO2e
compared to FY20 (Scope 1 & 3);
• 41% of our store sites now have 100%
LED lighting (up from 32% in FY22)
(Scope 2);
• Sea freight emissions reduced by
1,224.7 tCO2e (9.8%) compared to
FY22 and 3,784.8 tCO2e (25.2%) com-
pared to FY20 (Scope 3); and
• International airfreight emissions
reduced by 333 tCO2e (62.5%)
compared to FY22 and 288 tCO2e
(59.1%) compared to FY20 (Scope 3).
Total emissions (Scope 1, 2, and
measured Scope 3) intensity ratio
decreased from 11.5 total gross GHG
emissions per revenue (tCO2e/$million)
in FY22 to 8.4 in FY23, down 26.7%.
Our base year is FY20 in accordance
with our SLL agreement, which aligns
our Scope 1 and 2 emissions reduction
targets to 1.5°C SBTi criteria.
Emissions reporting
For our FY23 emissions, we have
updated our Toitū Envirocare
(Toitū) certification with the Toitū
CarbonReduce certification. This move
follows our announcement of a new solar
electricity procurement agreement with
Lodestone Energy, allowing the Group to
reduce our Scope 2 emissions to zero by
FY27. From FY24, we will shift our focus
and investments towards accelerating
our Scope 3 emission reductions.
Working with our suppliers, we believe
we will make a significant difference in
lowering our products' impact, emissions
and waste.
We are proud of what we have
achieved since February 2019, when we
became the first retailer in New Zealand
to achieve Toitū Net CarboNZero
certification. Since then, The Warehouse
Group has:
• Invested $1.65 million offsetting
189,812 tonnes of carbon emissions
through our carbon offset partners;
and
• Built the capacity needed to address
our Scope 3 emissions, the most
material and challenging area of
emissions impact for mass retailers.
E-WASTE RECYCLING
SOFT-PLASTIC
RECYCLING
44 The Warehouse stores
recycled 88.1 tonnes of soft-plastic
waste (up 38.7% from FY22),
equivalent to 14.0 million pieces
of soft-plastic waste
INK AND TONER RECYCLING
All ink and toner brands
131 Noel Leeming and
Warehouse Stationery stores
collected 10.3 tonnes,
(up 17.0% from FY22)
equivalent to 36,478 units in FY23
ENERGY CONSUMPTION WITHIN THE ORGANISATION
6
FY23 Energy intensity ratio
7
FY23 Reduction of energy
consumption
7,815.62 GJ / $m of revenue
down from 8,245.62 GJ / $m in FY22
915,747 GJ reduction
(-3.3% compared to FY22)
FY23 consumption
(litres/kWh)
FY23
consumption (GJ)
GJ increase/
(decrease) vs FY22
Diesel509,05719,451,067-3.9%
LPG
170,5944,527,565-3.7%
Petrol – Premium13,919492,461-36.4%
Petrol – Regular 50,6761,782,26423.8%
Scope 1 Fuel
Consumption
744,24626,253,356-3.3%
Electricity
Consumption
86,865,821312,714-2.5%
Scope 2 Electricity
Consumption
86,865,821312,714-2.5%
Total Scope 1 and 2
Energy Consumption
87,610,06726,566,071-3.3%
5
Measured Scope 3 emissions covers product
transportation, business travel and waste services.
6
Includes diesel, LPG, petrol and electricity energy
consumption used within the organisation.
7
Energy intensity ratio includes energy
consumption within the organisation only;
it excludes any Scope 3 energy consumption.
33 Noel Leeming
and Warehouse Stationery stores
recycled 91.5 tonnes of
e-waste (up 55.3% from FY22)
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20235657Our Environment
Toitū Envirocare Kaiwhakahaere matua
CEO Teressa Betty says The Warehouse
Group is helping to set an example
for other New Zealand companies by
shifting from a Toitū net carbonzero
certified organisation, to a Toitū
CarbonReduce certified organisation
for FY23.
“The Warehouse Group has been
striving to be a sustainable business
over the years and has now reached
the point in its carbon reduction
journey where it is shifting all its offset
spending to pure reduction initiatives
as these will have the most impact.
It’s great to see the company is also
planning to accelerate its Scope 3
emission reductions, which is a big
challenge.”
Our annual carbon emissions reporting
continues to follow the strictest audit
standards (Toitū CarbonReduce
certification) of our reporting partner,
Toitū. Our reduction targets align with
the New Zealand Climate Leaders
Coalition commitments, which reflect
the Paris Agreement guidelines. The
Warehouse Group is certified in
accordance with ISO 14064-1:2018 and
ISO 14064-3:2019.
The Group reports to the Carbon
Disclosure Project (CDP). This not-for-
profit runs the global disclosure system
for investors, companies, cities, states
and regions to help them manage
their environmental impacts. CDP
rates companies on themes such as
transparency, risk management, and
initiatives they have in place to reduce
carbon emissions. These scores give
organisations an overall rating from A
(best) to D (worst). The rating highlights
how well the organisation performs
to best practices concerning climate
change.
For our 2022 assessment, our
Group scored a B, putting us in
the 'Management' category for
performance on climate change.
'Management' means the Group is
taking co-ordinated action on climate
issues. The Group's score is higher than
the Oceania regional average of C, as
well as the Global Retail Average and
overall Global Average of C.
We have taken steps this year to
improve our score, and we hope to
improve our score to our 2020 score of
A- in the coming years.
For an in-depth review of performance
against energy and greenhouse gas
emissions, please refer to The Warehouse
Group Emissions Inventory Report
https://www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz/
sustainability/emissions-inventory-report.
Become a zero-waste
organisation by 2025
To become a zero-waste organisation
by 2025 will require us to reduce
unnecessary, non-recyclable shipping
and freight packaging, and, where
residual waste does occur, ensure it is
diverted from landfill.
The majority of our internal waste is
generated from shipping and freight
packaging which is removed and
disposed of at our distribution centres,
and general use waste in our stores
and Store Support Office (SSO). All
operational waste is generated onsite.
Our waste data is consolidated from
individual reports, provided by our waste
and recycling service providers.
Waste diversion from disposal was
slightly lower in FY23 than the prior year
(72.9%, compared to 73.4%) due to store
refurbishment and SSO construction,
where a large proportion of the
construction waste could not be recycled.
When waste is sent to landfill, we use
landfills with Landfill Gas Recovery
Facilities (LGRF) that capture greenhouse
gas generated from the breakdown of
organic matter to reduce the negative
climate impacts of landfill gas. In FY23,
93.6% (FY22: 89.5%) of landfill waste was
sent to landfills with LGRF.
Our national waste and recycling
service providers supply
comprehensive waste-minimising
solutions in our stores, including
commingled paper and cardboard
recycling. At our SSO, we provide
various recycling services to our
team members, including food waste
services, which diverted 15 tonnes of
compostable organic waste in FY23
(FY22: 13 tonnes).
The Warehouse Group disposed of 1.86
tonnes of hazardous waste in FY23
(FY22: 0.09 tonnes). All hazardous
waste is professionally collected,
transported, treated and disposed of by
our licensed waste service provider.
Future focus areas
In FY24 and beyond, we will continue
our progress to make sustainable living
easy and affordable for everyone. This
includes:
1. Maintaining our progress to embed
sustainability in our business
operations, finance, process,
learning and development, data
systems and governance. We will
continue to review opportunities
and mechanisms to make our carbon
emissions and waste impact tangible
for our teams, customers and broader
stakeholders.
2. Extending the Retail Sector Climate
Risk disclosure we led in FY23 and
deliver the next chapter of The
Warehouse Group's specific Climate-
Operational Waste
Waste
generated
(tonne)
Waste diverted
from landfill
(tonne)
Waste directed
to landfill
(tonne)
General waste3,829-3,829
Paper, cardboard and plastic wrap9,1779,177-
Mixed recycling and other1,0991,099-
Hazardous waste2-2
Total operational waste
14,10710,2763,831
FY23 operational waste diverted
and directed to landfill
72.9%27.1%
related risk disclosure and transition
plan following the new XRB Aotearoa
New Zealand Climate Standards.
3. Accelerate our work to address our
Scope 3 suppliers' emissions, which
will deliver more sustainably sourced
THE GROUP’S LIGHT
PASSENGER FLEET
DIVERTED
OPERATIONAL WASTE
OF POST-CONSUMER
WAST E
100% EV
in FY23
from landfill
(FY22: 73.4%)
from landfill disposal
in FY23
72.9%
and packaged products for our
customers.
4. Continue to make recycling easy for
our customers by making our stores
the go-to destination for free and
convenient post-consumer waste
solutions, and expand our current
e-waste solution availability in FY24.
5. Participate in consultations and
provide advice on policies and actions
that help our sector and country move
towards a more sustainable future.
198.9 tonnes
Diverted
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20235859Our Environment
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20236061GRI Report
The Warehouse Group has reported in accordance with
the GRI Standards for the period 1 August 2022 to 30 July
2023. We have applied the 2021 GRI reporting principles,
including Accuracy, Balance, Clarity, Comparability,
Completeness, Sustainability Context, Timeliness and
Verifiability when determining what material topics and
disclosures to include in this report.
Determining material topics
In 2021 we undertook an in-depth internal and external
stakeholder mapping exercise, assessment and interview
process. This included groups which our organisation has
a significant impact on, and those stakeholders who have a
high interest in or considerable influence on the success of
our business. These include:
• Retail customers;
• Business customers;
• Employees;
• Suppliers;
• Community partners;
• Shareholders.
This process has informed and developed our list of
material topics in accordance with the requirements under
2021 GRI Standard 3: Material Topics – determining the
impacts of these issues on the business and how the Group
manages these issues.
In 2023 we performed a high-level internal review of the
material topics previously identified to confirm these are
still valid and with a focus on the actual and potential,
GLOBAL REPORTING INITIATIVES (GRI)
MATERIAL TOPICS – ASSESSMENT AND REPORTING
positive and negative impacts these topics have on the
environment, the economy and our people.
This review concluded there have been no significant
changes in the material topics this year. However, we have
consolidated our focus on the most material topics which
have the highest importance to stakeholders, the highest
value at stake and therefore the highest impact on the
environment, economy and our people. This has not changed
our reporting as we already reported on the GRI Standards
applicable to these material topics in prior years.
Our 2023 material topics are:
1. Sustainable products and packaging
2. Supply chain management
3. GHG emissions
4. Waste reduction
5. Responsible and ethical sourcing
6. Employee health, safety and wellbeing
7. Employee engagement, diversity and inclusion
8. Business ethics and human rights.
The Group’s material topics has been approved by the
Environmental and Social Sustainability Committee.
We intend to perform a complete materiality assessment in
FY24 as a combined review of reporting under GRI and the
XRB Aotearoa New Zealand Climate Standards.
The Warehouse Group is active in the New Zealand retail sector.
A GRI sector-specific standard is not yet available for the retail
sector. Refer to pages 110-113 for the GRI Content Index.
GRI REPORT
Material TopicImpact / CommitmentHow we measure
performance
GRI Reporting StandardIntegrated Report
Capital
1. Sustainable products
and packaging
To increase the share of private label
sales from products and packaging which
are more sustainable, or which have a
circularity solution, to 50% by 2025 and
100% by 2035.
• Percentage of private label sales in
The Warehouse and Warehouse
Stationery were derived from products
with one or more sustainable material or
production features;
• Percentage of private label sales were
derived from products with packaging
which can be recycled via New Zealand’s
kerbside recycling infrastructure, or
circularity solutions.
N/AOur Environment
Enable 2.5 million customers to use our
waste recycling or circular reuse solutions
by 2030.
• Number of tonnes of post-consumer
waste recycled.
N/AOur Environment
2. Supply chain management
To build a reliable and sustainable supply
chain network.
• Assessment scores of ethical, labour
and environmental audits;
• Number of new and existing suppliers
screened using environmental audits.
GRI 414-1
GRI 414-2
Our Networks
Our Relationships
Ensure products get from our suppliers,
through our distribution networks, into
store and available for our customers.
• Amount of goods in transit and stock
availability;
• Distribution cost to serve;
• Fulfilment cost to serve.
N/AOur Networks
3. GHG emissions
Reduce Scope 1 and 2 emissions by 42%
by 2030, and zero emissions by 2040.
• Scope 1 and 2 reduction in emissions
year on year and compared to 2020
base year.
GRI 305-1
GRI 305-2
GRI 305-3
GRI 305-4
GRI 305-5
Our Environment
4. Waste reduction
Become a zero-waste status organisation
by 2025.
• Percentage of waste diverted from
landfill year on year.
GRI 306-1
GRI 306-2
GRI 306-3
GRI 306-4
GRI 306-5
Our Environment
5. Responsible and ethical
sourcing
To build a reliable and sustainable supply
chain network.
• Percentage of private label sales
derived from products with one or more
sustainability features;
• Number of new and existing suppliers
screened using environmental audits;
• Supplier audit and results.
GRI 407-1
GRI 408-1
GRI 409-1
GRI 414-1
GRI 414-2
Our Relationships
Our Environment
Ethical Sourcing Policy
Ethical Sourcing Report
Work with suppliers, associations and
initiatives for sustainable sourcing and
materials e.g. BCI, FSC.
Membership of sustainable material
initiatives.
GRI 2.28Our Environment
Corporate Disclosures
Statutory Disclosures
6. Employee health, safety
and wellbeing
Build a strong and effective high-
performance and agile culture that gets
everyone home healthy and safe at the
end of their day.
Critical Risk Management and Safety
Assurance Reviews, including:
• Number of violent and aggressive
behaviour incidents;
• Number of traffic management critical
events;
• Total Severity 1 Frequency Rate (SV1FR);
• Total Recordable Injury Frequency Rate
(TRIFR).
GRI 403-9Our People
7. Employee engagements,
diversity and inclusion
Be the best place to work by creating an
environment of belonging and connection.
• eNPS;
• Promotion of worker health.
N/A
GRI 403-6
Our People
Provide learning pathways and
career development.
• Average training hours per year per
employee;
• Programmes for upgrading employee
skills and transition assistance
programmes.
GRI 404-1
GRI 404-2
Our People
Celebrating diversity and providing equal
opportunities for everyone.
• Percentage of senior leaders who are
female;
• Gender pay equity;
• Rainbow Tick accreditation;
• Diversity, inclusion and wellbeing
initiatives and objectives.
GRI 405-1
GRI 405-2
Our People
Diversity & Inclusion Report
8. Business ethics and
human rights
The Company is committed to fostering
the highest standards of ethical behaviour
and good conduct.
• Adherence to NZX Corporate
Governance Code, Principle 1;
• Compliance with Code of Ethics,
Financial Products Trading Policy, and
Market Disclosure Policy;
• Supplier and factory labour and
environmental audits.
GRI 2.23 – 2.27
GRI 205-2
GRI 205-3
GRI 206-1
GRI 407-1
GRI 408-1
GRI 409-1
Corporate Governance
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20236263Financial Statements
62
2023 THE WAREHOUSE GROUP
FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
The financial statements have been presented in a style which attempts to make them less complex and more relevant to shareholders. The note disclosures have been grouped
into six sections: ‘basis of preparation’, ‘financial performance’, ‘operating assets and liabilities’, ‘financing and capital structure’, ‘financial risk management’ and ‘other disclosures’.
Each section sets out the significant accounting policies in green text boxes applied in producing the relevant notes, along with details of any key judgements and estimates
used. The purpose of this format is to provide readers with a clearer understanding of what drives financial performance of the Group.
These financial statements have been approved for issue by the Board of Directors on 27 September 2023.
The Warehouse Group Limited is a limited liability company incorporated and domiciled in New Zealand.
The address of its registered office is Level 4, 4 Graham Street, PO Box 2219, Auckland.
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS Page
Consolidated income statement 64
Consolidated statement of comprehensive income 64
Consolidated balance sheet 65
Consolidated statement of cash flows 66
Consolidated statement of changes in equity 67
BASIS OF PREPARATION
1.1 Reporting entity 68
1.2 Compliance statement 68
1.3 Basis of preparation 68
1.4 Changes in accounting policies, interpretations and
agenda decisions 68
1.5 Reporting period 68
1.6 Critical accounting judgements, estimates and assumptions 68
1.7 Non-GAAP financial information 68
FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE
2.0 Segment information 69
2.1 Operating performance 69
2.2 Adjustment for NZ IFRS 16 (Leases) 69
2.3 Torpedo7 impairment considerations 69
3.0 Income and expenses 70
3.1 Other income 70
3.2 Employee expense 70
3.3 Depreciation and amortisation expense 70
3.4 Other operating expenses 70
3.5 Auditors' fees 70
3.6 Net interest expense 70
4.0 Taxation 71
4.1 Taxation - income statement 71
4.2 Taxation - balance sheet current taxation asset/(liability) 71
4.3 Taxation - balance sheet deferred taxation asset 71
5.0 Adjusted net profit 72
6.0 Earnings per share 72
7.0 Dividends 73
7.1 Dividends paid 73
7.2 Dividends policy reconciliation 73
7.3 Imputation credit account 73
OPERATING ASSETS AND LIABILITIES Page
8.0 Working capital 74
8.1 Inventory 74
8.2 Trade and other receivables 74
8.3 Trade and other payables 74
8.4 Provisions 75
9.0 Non current assets 75
9.1 Property, plant and equipment 75
9.2 Intangible assets 76
10.0 Lease liabilities and right of use assets 77
10.1 Right of use assets 77
10.2 Lease liabilities 77
10.3 Lease liability maturity analysis 77
FINANCING AND CAPITAL STRUCTURE
11.0 Equity 78
11.1 Capital management 78
11.2 Bank and debt facilities 78
11.3 Contributed equity 78
11.4 Reserves 79
11.5 Minority interest 79
FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT
12.0 Financial risk management 80
12.1 Financial risk factors 80
12.2 Derivative financial instruments 80
12.3 Liquidity risk 81
12.4 Credit risk 81
12.5 Market risk 81
OTHER DISCLOSURES
13.0 Key management 82
14.0 Commitments 82
15.0 Contingent liabilities 82
16.0 Related parties 82
Financial Statements
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
CONTENTS
Joan Withers
Board Chair
27 September 2023
Dean Hamilton
Audit and Risk Committee Chair
27 September 2023
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20236465Financial Statements
Consolidated Income Statement
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
Note20232022
$ 000$ 000
Net profit for the period
29,937 87,088
Items that may be reclassified subsequently to the income statement
Movement in foreign currency translation reserve
(206)294
Movement in derivative cash flow hedges
(18,510)8,873
Tax relating to movement in hedge reserve
5,183 (2,484)
Other comprehensive income
(13,533)6,683
Total comprehensive income
16,404 93,771
Attributable to:
Shareholders of the parent
16,277 95,994
Minority interest
11.5 127 (2,223)
Total comprehensive income
16,404 93,771
Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
Note2023 2022
$ 000$ 000
ASSETS
Current assets
Cash and cash equivalents
11.2 28,330 24,999
Trade and other receivables
8.2 76,274 87,853
Inventories
8.1 493,308 562,313
Derivative financial instruments
12.2 5,208 29,491
Current taxation
4.2 5,038 1,505
Total current assets
608,158 706,161
Non current assets
Trade and other receivables
8.2 20,747 11,664
Property, plant and equipment
9.1 222,289 224,355
Intangible assets
9.2 168,239 151,825
Right of use assets
10.1 661,025 673,278
Investment in associate
- 3,839
Deferred taxation
4.3 88,476 89,227
Total non current assets
1,160,776 1,154,188
Total assets
1,768,934 1,860,349
LIABILITIES
Current liabilities
Borrowings
11.2 76,400 66,150
Trade and other payables
8.3 407,339 480,596
Derivative financial instruments
12.2 7,320 668
Lease liabilities
10.3 98,996 95,849
Provisions
8.4 49,292 49,831
Total current liabilities
639,347 693,094
Non current liabilities
Lease liabilities
10.3 704,162 724,991
Provisions
8.4 22,405 21,165
Total non current liabilities
726,567 746,156
Total liabilities
1,365,914 1,439,250
Net assets
403,020 421,099
EQUITY
Contributed equity
11.3 360,235 360,235
Reserves
11.4 10 12,739
Retained earnings
41,825 48,940
Total equity attributable to shareholders
402,070 421,914
Minority interest
11.5 950 (815)
Total equity
403,020 421,099
Consolidated Balance Sheet
As at 30 July 2023
Note2023 2022
$ 000$ 000
Retail sales
2.1 3,399,112 3,294,332
Cost of retail goods sold
8.1 (2,262,388)(2,129,950)
Gross profit
1,136,724 1,164,382
Other income
3.1 8,585 7,683
Employee expense
3.2 (574,352)(575,361)
Depreciation and amortisation expense
3.3 (162,696)(146,122)
Other operating expenses
3.4 (306,211)(291,812)
Operating profit
2.1 102,050 158,770
Unusual items
5.0 (13,935)-
Earnings before interest and tax
88,115 158,770
Net interest expense
3.6 (44,521)(36,831)
Profit before tax
43,594 121,939
Income tax expense
4.1 (13,657)(34,851)
Net profit for the period
29,937 87,088
Attributable to:
Shareholders of the parent
29,810 89,311
Minority interests
11.5 127 (2,223)
29,937 87,088
Earnings per share attributable to shareholders of the parent
Basic earnings per share
6.0 8.6 cents 25.9 cents
Diluted earnings per share
6.0 8.6 cents 25.9 cents
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20236667Financial Statements
Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
Note2023 2022
$ 000 $ 000
Net profit
29,937 87,088
Non cash items
Depreciation and amortisation expense
3.3 162,696 146,122
Right of use asset impairment
10.1 226 -
Share based payment expense
3.2 804 -
COVID-19 landlord rent relief
10.2 - (1,775)
Movement in deferred tax
4.3 5,934 4,239
Total non cash items
169,660 148,586
Items classified as investing or financing activities
Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment
2,634 1,128
Loss from investment in associate
3,839 661
Gain on lease terminations
2.2 (977)(2,681)
Supplementary dividend tax credit
4.2 223 481
Total investing and financing adjustments
5,719 (411)
Changes in assets and liabilities
Trade and other receivables
2,496 (15,564)
Inventories
69,005 (105,162)
Trade and other payables
(59,802)30,159
Provisions
701 (26,890)
Income tax
(3,533)(12,383)
Total changes in assets and liabilities
8,867 (129,840)
Net cash flows from operating activities
214,183105,423
Note2023 2022
$ 000 $ 000
Cash flows from operating activities
Cash received from customers
3,409,163 3,304,417
Payments to suppliers and employees
(3,139,848)(3,119,707)
Income tax paid4.2
(11,033)(42,514)
Interest paid
(44,099)(36,773)
Net cash flows from operating activities
214,183 105,423
Cash flows from investing activities
Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment
30,667 456
Purchase of property, plant and equipment and computer software
(115,088)(107,469)
Purchase of associate
- (4,500)
Purchase of minority interest11.5
(691)( 1,716 )
Net cash flows from investing activities
(85,112)(113,229)
Cash flows from financing activities
Proceeds from borrowings
10,250 66,150
Lease principal repayments
(101,171)(98,264)
Treasury stock dividends received
138 381
Dividends paid to parent shareholders
(34,907)(95,863)
Dividends paid to minority shareholders
(50)(125)
Net cash flows from financing activities
(125,740)(127,721)
Net cash inflow/(outflow)
3,331 (135,527)
Opening cash position
24,999 160,526
Closing cash position
11.2 28,330 24,999
Reconciliation of Operating Cash Flows
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
Note
Share
Capital
Treasury
Shares
Hedge
Reserves
Foreign
Currency
Translation
Reserve
Employee
Share
Benefits
Reserve
Retained
Earnings
Minority
Interest
Total
Equity
$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
Balance at the beginning of the period
365,517 (5,282)12, 560 179 - 48,940 (815)421,099
Profit for the period
- - - - - 29,810 127 29,937
Movement in foreign currency translation reserve
- - - (206)- - - (206)
Movement in derivative cash flow hedges
- - (18,510)- - - - (18,510)
Tax relating to movement in hedge reserve
4.3 - - 5 ,18 3 - - - - 5,183
Total comprehensive (loss)/income
- - (13, 327 )(206)- 29,810 127 16,404
Contributions by and distributions to owners
Share rights charged to the income statement
- - - - 804 - - 804
Minority put options exercised
- - - - - (2,379)1,688 (691)
Dividends paid
7.1- - - - - (34,684)(50)(34,734)
Treasury stock dividends received
- - - - - 138 - 138
Balance at the end of the period
365,517 (5,282)(767)(27)804 41,825 950 403,020
(note: 11.3) (note: 11.3) (note: 11.4) (note: 11.4) (note: 11.4) (note: 11.5)
For the 52 week period ended 31 July 2022
Balance at the beginning of the period
365,517 (5,282)6 ,171 (115)- 60,573 (2,694)424,170
Profit/(loss) for the period
- - - - - 89,311 (2,223)87,088
Movement in foreign currency translation reserve
- - - 294 - - - 294
Movement in derivative cash flow hedges
- - 8,873 - - - - 8,873
Tax relating to movement in hedge reserve
4.3
- - (2,484)- - - - (2,484)
Total comprehensive income/(loss)
- - 6,389 294 - 89,311 (2,223)93,771
Contributions by and distributions to owners
Minority put options exercised
- - - - - (5,943)4,227 (1,716)
Dividends paid
7.1- - - - - (95,382)(125)(95,507)
Treasury stock dividends received
- - - - - 381 - 381
Balance at the end of the period
365,517 (5,282)12, 560 179 - 48,940 (815)421,099
(note: 11.3) (note: 11.3) (note: 11.4) (note: 11.4) (note: 11.4) (note: 11.5)
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20236869Financial Statements
Percentage Ownership
Name of EntityPrincipal ActivityNote
2023 2022
The Warehouse LimitedRetail
100 100
Torpedo7 LimitedRetail
100 100
TheMarket.Com LimitedOnline marketplace11.5
100 97
Eldamos Investments LimitedProperty
100 100
The Warehouse Nominees LimitedInvestment
100 100
Notes to the Financial Statements - Basis of Preparation
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
Notes to the Financial Statements - Financial Performance
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
Operating segments
The Group has five retail brands trading in the New Zealand retail sector which include a specialty online marketplace (TheMarket.com). These brands form the basis
of internal reporting used by senior management and the Board of Directors to assess performance and assist with strategy decisions. Brand trading performance
is assessed using operating profit, which is a non-GAAP measure that excludes the impacts of NZ IFRS 16 Leases, and is considered a better measure of underlying
brand performance. Brand assets and liabilities are not distinct following the amalgamation of the Group’s legal entities and are managed and reported to senior
management and the Board of Directors on a consolidated basis.
Customers can purchase product from the four main retail chains either online or through the Group’s physical retail store network. At period end the Group’s
physical store network consists of 88 The Warehouse stores, 66 Warehouse Stationery stores (including 40 stores trading within The Warehouse stores), 67 Noel
Leeming stores and 25 Torpedo7 stores. The Warehouse predominantly sells general merchandise and apparel, Noel Leeming sells technology and appliance
products, Torpedo7 sells outdoor and sporting equipment and Warehouse Stationery sells stationery products.
Other Group operations include a property company, a chocolate factory and the residual cost of unallocated support office functions.
2.3 Torpedo7 impairment considerations
Significant judgements and estimates
It has been a challenging year for Torpedo7 and other retail specialists exposed to the bike market, as the sector attempts to reduce an inventory over supply
through discounted sales. The Group believes the outdoor and sporting goods sector will remain challenging for the next two financial years and has developed a
Recovery Plan in response to the expected economic conditions to turn the business around from its current year operating loss of $22.2 million and back into profit
within 3 years.
The Group was mindful that the Torpedo7 trading performance and sector outlook were indicators of potential asset impairment. The Group considered the
merits of the Recovery plan and also looked at alternative scenarios, weighing up the associated risk and likely outcomes of these scenarios. It was concluded that
the Torpedo7 inventory impairment provisions should be increased by $2.9 million to bring the total inventory provision to $4.6 million and that no other assets
should be impaired at this time. The assets held in Torpedo7 at balance date are Inventory – net of provisioning ($56.3 million), Receivables ($4.6 million), Plant and
Equipment ($10.8 million) and Right of Use Assets ($26.3 million).
The impairment calculations have been performed using a fair value less cost of disposal approach and required the Group to make judgements to estimate future
cash flows and likely economic conditions as part of its impairment assessment. The Group considered a wide range of factors including the Group’s financial
budgets, strategic plans, external benchmarks and historical performance to formulate the cash flow projections. The Group also engaged an external expert to
determine an appropriate post tax discount rate (11.1%) and long-term growth rate (2.1%), integral to the valuation of the Torpedo7 cash generating unit. The key
judgements made are sensitive to the Recovery Plan gross margin and revenue recovery assumptions, which, if not executed, might result in future impairment of
the above asset classes.
2.0 SEGMENT INFORMATION
2.1 Operating performance
Retail SalesOperating ProfitRetail Operating Margin
Note2023 2022 2023 2022 2023 2022
$ 000$ 000$ 000 $ 000
The Warehouse
1,892,351 1,726,936 71,596 75,742 3.8% 4.4%
Warehouse Stationery
248,629 249,749 23,004 23,058 9.3% 9.2%
TheMarket.com
33,652 49,954 (22,001)(24,734)
Warehouse segment
2,174,632 2,026,639 72,599 74,066 3.3% 3.7%
Noel Leeming
1,061,026 1,096,744 27,342 53,907 2.6% 4.9%
Torpedo7
162,200 171,474 (22,204)(2,240)-13.7% -1.3%
Other Group operations
8,395 6,866 (16,549)(8,961)
Inter-segment eliminations
(7,141)(7,391)- -
Group
3,399,112 3,294,332 61,188 116,772 1.8% 3.5%
Adjustments for NZ IFRS 16
2.2 40,862 41,998
Operating profit
102,050 158,770
Unusual items
5.0 (13,935)-
Earnings before interest and tax
88,115 158,770
Retail sales
Retail sales are recognised when the customer receives the goods which typically occurs at the point of sale for in-store sales or where the goods are
purchased online when the goods have been delivered to the customer. Revenue from the sale of goods is recognised at the fair value of the consideration
received or receivable, net of returns, discounts and excluding GST.
2.2 Adjustment for NZ IFRS 16 (Leases)
Note2023 2022
$ 000 $ 000
Pre NZ IFRS 16 rent expense
135,889 133,931
Right of use asset amortisation
10.1 (96,004)(94,614)
Gain on lease terminations
977 2,681
Impact on operating profit
2.1 40,862 41,998
Lease liability interest
3.6 (36,199)(36,683)
Impact on net profit before tax (excluding unusual items)
5.0 4,663 5,315
Lease impairments classified as unusual items
5.0 (226)-
Impact on net profit before tax
4,437 5,315
1.0 BASIS OF PREPARATION
1.1 Reporting entity
The Warehouse Group Limited (the Company) and its subsidiaries (together the Group) trade in the New Zealand retail sector. The Company is a limited liability
company incorporated and domiciled in New Zealand. The Group is registered under the Companies Act 1993 and is an FMC Reporting Entity under Part 7 of
the Financial Markets Conduct Act (FMCA) 2013. The address of its registered office is Level 4, 4 Graham Street, PO Box 2219, Auckland. The Company is listed
on the New Zealand Exchange (NZX).
1.2 Compliance statement
These financial statements have been prepared in accordance with Generally Accepted Accounting Practice (GAAP), FMCA 2013 and NZX listing rules.
They comply with New Zealand Equivalents to International Financial Reporting Standards (NZ IFRS), other applicable Financial Reporting Standards, and
authoritative notes as appropriate for a for-profit entity. The financial statements also comply with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS).
1.3 Basis of preparation
The measurement basis adopted in the preparation of these financial statements is historic cost, as modified by the revaluation of certain assets and liabilities
at fair value. The financial statements are presented in New Zealand dollars and all values are rounded to the nearest thousand, unless otherwise stated. Certain
comparative amounts have been reclassified to conform with the current year’s presentation.
The principal accounting policies applied in the preparation of these financial statements are set out in the accompanying notes where an accounting choice is
provided by NZ IFRS, is new or has changed, is specific to the Group’s operations or is significant or material. Where NZ IFRS does not provide any accounting policy
choice, the Group has applied the requirements of NZ IFRS but a detailed accounting policy has not been specifically included.
The consolidated financial statements comprise the financial statements of the Company and its subsidiaries. Material subsidiaries at year end are listed below.
Group structure
At the commencement of the financial year the Group legally amalgamated Noel Leeming Group Limited with The Warehouse Limited. This amalgamation was
designed to simplify processes by merging the support office functions and combining the balance sheet management of both operations. The amalgamation
did not result in any significant changes to the store operations or branding. In August 2022 the Group also acquired the remaining 3% minority interest in
TheMarket.com for a consideration of $0.7 million.
1.4 Changes in accounting policies, interpretations and agenda decisions
In December 2022 the External Reporting Board published it's Climate-related Disclosures standards. The Group has begun planning how it will prepare for the
necessary climate-related disclosures and what information and external assistance it will require. The Group will be including climate-related disclosures based on
the three new climate standards in the July 2024 Annual Report. The Group intends to specifically review and report on exposure to climate-related risk as required
in the consolidated financial statements for the year ended July 2024.
In May 2023 the International Accounting Standards Board issued amendments to IAS 7 ‘Statement of Cash Flows’ and IFRS 7 ‘Financial Instrument Disclosures’,
that do not affect recognition or measurement principles, but require the Group to provide specified disclosures regarding its supplier financing arrangements.
The new disclosure requirements will be effective for the Group’s annual July 2025 reporting period. There are no other new or amended standards or
interpretations that become effective on or after balance date that would have a material impact on the Group’s financial statements.
1.5 Reporting period
These financial statements are for the 52 week period 1 August 2022 to 30 July 2023. The comparative period is for the 52 week period 2 August 2021 to
31 July 2022. The Group operates on a weekly trading and reporting cycle which means most financial years represent a 52 week period. A 53 week catch-up
year occurs once every 5 to 6 years and next occurs in the 2025 financial year.
1.6 Critical accounting judgements, estimates and assumptions
The preparation of the financial statements requires the Group to make judgements, estimates and assumptions that effect the reported amounts of assets and
liabilities at balance date and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the year. Judgements and estimates which are material to the financial
statements are found in the following notes:
(a) Lease liabilities and right of use assets (notes 10.1 and 10.2)
(b) Inventories (note 8.1)
(c) Derivative financial instruments (note 12.2)
(d) Torpedo7 impairment considerations (note 2.3)
1.7 Non-GAAP financial information
The Group uses operating profit, earnings before tax and interest, unusual items and adjusted net profit to describe financial performance as it considers these
line items provide a better measure of underlying business performance. These non GAAP measures are not prepared in accordance with NZ IFRS and may not be
comparable to similarly titled amounts reported by other companies. The Group’s policy regarding unusual items and adjusted net profit is detailed in note 5.0.
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20237071Financial Statements
Notes to the Financial Statements - Financial Performance
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
The following table details the major deferred income tax assets and (liabilities) recognised by the Group and the movements during the current and prior year.
4.3 Taxation – balance sheet
deferred taxation asset
NoteInventoryLeases
Property,
Plant
Equipment
and
Software
Employee
ProvisionsDerivativesOtherTotal
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000
Opening balance
10,700 40,149 22,591 15,733 (4,884)4,938 89,227
Charged/(credited) to the income statement
4.1 1,606 (1,094)(4,599)(658)- (1,189)(5,934)
Net charged to other comprehensive income
- - - - 5,183 - 5,183
Closing balance
12,306 39,05517,992 15,075 299 3,74988,476
For the 52 week period ended 31 July 2022
Opening balance
12,941 41,648 18,328 17,483 (2,400)7,958 95,958
Charged/(credited) to the income statement
4.1 (2,241)(1,499)4,263 (1,750)- (3,012)(4,239)
Net charged to other comprehensive income
- - - - (2,484)(8)(2,492)
Closing balance
10,700 40,149 22,591 15,733 (4,884)4,938 89,227
4.2 Taxation - balance sheet current taxation asset/(liability)
Note20232022
$ 000 $ 000
Opening balance
1,505 (10,878)
Current year income tax payable
4.1 (7,723)(30,612)
Net taxation paid
11,033 42,514
Supplementary dividend tax credit
223 481
Closing balance
5,038 1,505
The following table details the movement in income tax receivable/(payable) during the current and prior year.
4.0 TAXATION
A reconciliation between the tax expense recognised in the income statement and tax expense calculated per the statutory income tax rate is detailed below.
Income taxation
The income tax expense for the period is the tax payable on the current year’s taxable income based on the income tax rate adjusted by changes in deferred tax
assets and liabilities attributable to temporary differences between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts in the financial statements.
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognised for temporary differences at the tax rates expected to apply when the assets are recovered or liabilities are
settled, based on those tax rates which are enacted or substantively enacted. The relevant tax rates are applied to the cumulative amounts of deductible and
taxable temporary differences to measure the deferred tax asset or liability.
Deferred tax assets are recognised for deductible temporary differences and unused tax losses only if it is probable that future taxable amounts will be available
to utilise those temporary differences and losses. Deferred tax liabilities and assets are not recognised for temporary differences between the carrying amount
and tax bases of investments in subsidiaries and associates where the parent entity is able to control the timing of the reversal of the temporary differences and
it is probable that the differences will not reverse in the foreseeable future.
Current and deferred tax balances attributable to amounts recognised in equity are similarly recognised in equity.
Goods and services tax (GST)
The income statement and statement of cash flows have been prepared so that all components are stated exclusive of GST. All items in the balance sheet are
stated net of GST with the exception of receivables and payables which include GST invoiced.
4.1 Taxation - income statement
Note2023 2022
$ 000$ 000
Profit before tax
43,594 121,939
Taxation calculated at 28%
12,206 34,143
Adjusted for the tax effect of:
Non deductible expenditure
302 540
Associate investment
1,075 185
Income tax under/(over) provided in prior year
74 (17)
Income tax expense
13,657 34,851
Income tax expense comprises:
Current year income tax payable
4.2 7,723 30,612
Deferred taxation
4.3 5,934 4,239
Income tax expense
13,657 34,851
Notes to the Financial Statements - Financial Performance
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
3.0 INCOME AND EXPENSES
3.1 Other income
Note2023 2022
$ 000$ 000
COVID-19 landlord rent relief
10.2 - 1,775
COVID-19 Leave support
1,668 -
Tenancy rents received
1,991 2,165
Other
4,926 3,743
Other income
8,585 7,683
3.2 Employee expense
Note2023 2022
$ 000 $ 000
Wages and salaries
561,337 566,174
Directors' fees
936 884
Performance based compensation
11,275 8,303
Equity settled share based payments expense
13.0
804 -
Employee expense
574,352 575,361
3.3 Depreciation and amortisation expense
Note2023 2022
$ 000 $ 000
Property, plant and equipment
9.1 44,863 38,204
Computer software
9.2 21,829 13,304
Right of use assets
10.1
96,004 94,614
Depreciation and amortisation expense
162,696 146,122
3.4 Other operating expenses
2023 2022
$ 000 $ 000
Other operating expenses include:
Bad debt and movement in provision for doubtful debts expense
144 2,467
Loss on disposal of plant and equipment
1,655 1,128
Donations
168 106
Net foreign currency exchange (gain)
(125)(67)
3.5 Auditors’ fees
20232022
$ 000 $ 000
Auditing the Group financial statements
878 711
Reviewing the half year financial statements
120 112
Other non-audit or review services:
- Agreed upon procedures
27 24
- Taxation services
12 10
- Other services
41 71
Total fees paid to PricewaterhouseCoopers
1,078 928
3.6 Net interest expense
Note20232022
$ 000 $ 000
Interest on deposits and use of money interest received
(748)(592)
Interest on borrowings
9,070 740
Interest on leases
10.2 36,199 36,683
Net interest expense
44,521 36,831
Audit fees - Corporate Governance
In accordance with the Group's policies regarding audit governance and independence, other non-audit services are approved by the Group’s Audit and
Risk Committee. The Group’s policy permits the audit firm to provide non-audit services that are not considered to be in conflict with the preservation of the
independence of the auditor, subject to Audit and Risk Committee approval.
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20237273Financial Statements
Notes to the Financial Statements - Financial Performance
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
7.0 DIVIDENDS
7.1 Dividends paid
2023 2022 2023 2022
$ 000$ 000CENTS PER SHARECENTS PER SHARE
Prior year final dividend
34,684 60,698 10.0 17.5
Interim dividend
- 34,684 - 10.0
Total dividends paid
34,684 95,382 10.0 27.5
7.2 Dividend policy reconciliation
Note2023 2022 2023 2022
$ 000 $ 000 CENTS PER SHARECENTS PER SHARE
Interim dividend
- 34,684 - 10.0
Final dividend (declared after balance date)
27,747 34,684 8.0 10.0
Total dividends declared in respect of the current financial year
27,747 69,368 8.0 20.0
Group adjusted net profit
5.0 37,458 85,484
Pay-out ratio (%)
74.1% 81.1%
7.3 Imputation credit account
2023 2022
$ 000$ 000
Imputation credits at balance date available for future distribution
130,226 132,796
Dividend policy
In a typical year the Group declares two dividends, the first in respect of the half year (interim dividend) and second in respect of the full year result (final
dividend). Dividends are declared at the discretion of the Board and subject to trading performance, market conditions and liquidity requirements. The Group’s
dividend policy is to distribute at least 70% of the Group's full year adjusted net profit.
Due to the challenging economic outlook, financial performance remaining uncertain, and currently heightened capital expenditure, the Board decided not to
pay an interim dividend and determined the final dividend based on the full year result for the current year.
In accordance with this policy the Board declared a fully imputed final dividend of 8.0 cents per ordinary share on 27 September 2023 to be paid on 1 December
2023 to all shareholders on the Group's share register at the close of business on 16 November 2023.
The above amounts represent the balance of the Group’s imputation credit account at balance date, adjusted for imputation credits that will arise from the
payment of the amount of the remaining current year provision for income taxation.
Notes to the Financial Statements - Financial Performance
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
5.0 ADJUSTED NET PROFIT
6.0 EARNINGS PER SHARE
Adjusted net profit reconciliation
Note20232022
$ 000$ 000
Net profit attributable to shareholders of the parent
29,810 89,311
Add back: Unusual items
Gain on sale of property
(413) -
Restructuring costs
10,876-
Associate impairment
3,472-
Unusual items
13,935-
Adjustments for NZ IFRS 16
2.2 (4,663) (5,315)
Income tax relating to above items
(1,624) 1,488
Adjusted net profit
37,458 85,484
Earnings per share calculation
Note2023 2022
Net profit attributable to shareholders of the parent ($000s)
29,810 89,311
Adjusted net profit ($000s)
5.0 37,458 85,484
Basic
Weighted average number of ordinary shares (net of treasury shares) on issue (000s)
345,354 345,354
Basic earnings per share (cents)
8.6 25.9
Adjusted basic earnings per share (cents)
10.8 24.8
Diluted
Effect of dilutive potential share rights (000s)
1,684 -
Weighted average number of ordinary shares for the purpose of diluted earnings per share (000s)
347,038 345,354
Diluted earnings per share (cents)
8.6 25.9
Gain on sale of property
The Group sold its Royal Oak store property (Auckland) in July 2023 for $30.5 million as part of a ‘sale and lease back’ arrangement, which realised a gain on sale
of $0.4 million and a reduction in the right of use asset related to the new leases of $0.5 million (refer note 10.1).
Restructuring costs
In response to a decline in profitability due to customers cutting back their spending caused by higher living costs and a deteriorating economy the Group
restructured its operations to lower its cost of doing business. The Group also postponed certain capital expenditure projects and paused recruitment. The
restructure included the integration of TheMarket.com into the Group's Agile structure and closing the 1-day business. The restructure costs represent staff
redundancy costs, the write-off of redundant 1-day business assets and costs connected with the disposal of the 1-day inventory.
Associate impairment
In August 2021 the Group invested $4.5 million to acquire a 26% interest in Zoom Healthcare, a health technology company, with a view that the Group could
potentially, in the future take a controlling interest in the company. Zoom Heathcare has not achieved the anticipated outcomes set by the Group, resulting in
the impairment of the carrying amount of its investment.
Certain transactions can make the comparison of profits between years difficult. The Group uses adjusted net profit as a key indicator of performance and
considers it a better measure of underlying business performance. Adjusted net profit makes allowance for the after tax effect of unusual items which are
not directly connected with the Group’s normal trading activities. The Group defines unusual items as any gains or losses from property disposals, goodwill
and brand impairment, costs relating to business acquisitions or disposals, ineffective hedge derivatives and costs connected with restructuring the Group.
Following the adoption of NZ IFRS 16 the non-cash impact relating to the lease accounting standard are also excluded from adjusted net profit.
Earnings per share (EPS) is the amount of post tax profit attributable to each share. Basic EPS is calculated by dividing net profit attributable to
shareholders by the weighted average number of ordinary shares (net of treasury shares) outstanding during the year. Adjusted basic EPS is similarly
calculated using adjusted net profit as the numerator.
Diluted EPS adjusts for any commitments the Group has to issue shares in the future that would decrease the basic EPS. Diluted EPS is calculated by
adjusting the weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding and earnings to assume conversion of the Group's share rights (refer note 13.0).
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20237475Financial Statements
Notes to the Financial Statements - Operating Assets and Liabilities
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
9.0 NON CURRENT ASSETS
A provision is recognised if, as a result of a past event, the Group has a present legal or constructive obligation that can be estimated reliably, and it is
probable that an outflow of economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation.
Employee entitlements
(i) Annual leave and sick leave
Liabilities for annual leave and accumulating sick leave expected to be settled within 12 months of the reporting date are recognised in provisions in respect
of employees’ services up to the reporting date and are measured at the amounts expected to be paid when the liabilities are settled. Liabilities for non-
accumulating sick leave are recognised when the leave is taken and measured at the rates paid or payable.
(ii) Performance based compensation
The Group recognises a liability and expense for incentives payable to employees where either a contractual or constructive obligation arises to pay an
employee based on achieving an agreed level of individual and company performance.
(iii) Long service leave
The liability for long service leave is recognised in the provision for employee benefits and measured as the present value of expected future payments
to be made in respect of services provided by employees up to the reporting date. Consideration is given to expected future wage and salary levels,
experience of employee departures and periods of service. Expected future payments are discounted using market yields at the reporting date on New
Zealand government bonds with terms to maturity that match, as closely as possible, the estimated future cash outflows.
Make good provision
The Group has an obligation to restore certain leasehold sites to their original condition when the lease expires. This provision represents the present value
of the expected future make good commitment. Amounts charged to the provision represent both make good costs incurred and costs incurred which
mitigate the final liability prior to the lease expiry.
Sales return provision
The Group provides various guarantees and warranties to replace, repair or refund customers for faulty or defective products sold. This provision represents
the estimated sales return obligation at balance date based on historical sale return rates.
Property, plant and equipment are measured at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses. The cost of purchased property, plant and
equipment is the value of the consideration given to acquire the assets inclusive of directly attributable costs incurred to bring the assets to the location and
condition necessary for their intended use.
Property, plant and equipment are depreciated on a straight-line basis to allocate the cost, less any residual value, over their useful life. The estimated useful
lives of property, plant and equipment are as follows:
• Freehold land indefinite • Freehold buildings 50 - 100 years
• Plant and equipment 3 - 15 years • Work in progress not depreciated
The Group annually reviews the carrying amounts of property, plant and equipment for impairment. An asset’s carrying amount is written down immediately
to its recoverable amount if the asset’s carrying amount is greater than its estimated recoverable amount. In assessing whether an asset is impaired, reference
is made to individual store profitability and any other known events or circumstances that may indicate that the carrying amount of an asset may be impaired.
Gains and losses on disposals of assets are determined by comparing proceeds with the carrying amount. These gains and losses are included in the income
statement. Costs incurred on repairs and maintenance are charged to the income statement during the financial period in which they are incurred.
8.4 Provisions
CurrentNon currentTotal
2023 2022 20232022 2023 2022
$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000
Employee entitlements
43,298 43,305 16,016 14,323 59,314 57,628
Make good provision
1,683 1,660 6,389 6,842 8,072 8,502
Sales return provision
4,311 4,866 - - 4,311 4,866
Provisions
49,292 49,831 22,405 21,165 71,697 70,996
9.1 Property, plant and equipment
Land and BuildingsPlant and EquipmentWork in ProgressTotal
Note20232022202320222023202220232022
$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000
Cost
94,098 93,527 678,732 657,409 47,326 11,389 820,156 762,325
Accumulated depreciation
(16 ,10 9)(15,293)(579,692)(552,413)- - (595,801)(567,706)
Opening carrying amount
77,989 78,234 99,040 104,996 47,326 11,389 224,355 194,619
Additions
- 571 93,620 32,668 (19,001)35,937 74,619 69,176
Disposals
(28,918)- (2,904)(1,236)- - (31,822)(1,236)
Depreciation
3.3 (793)(816)(44,070)(37,388)- - (44,863)(38,204)
Closing carrying amount
48,278 77,989 145,686 99,040 28,325 47,326 222,289 224,355
Cost
60,590 94,098 734,908 678,732 28,325 47,326 823,823 820,156
Accumulated depreciation
(12,312)(16,109)(589,222)(579,692)- - (601,534)(595,801)
Closing carrying amount
48,278 77,989 145,686 99,040 28,325 47,326 222,289 224,355
Notes to the Financial Statements - Operating Assets and Liabilities
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
8.0 WORKING CAPITAL
8.1 Inventory
2023 2022
$ 000$ 000
Finished goods
448,895 485,486
Inventory provisions
(20,973)(17,244)
Retail stock
427,922 468,242
Goods in transit from overseas
65,386 94,071
Inventory
493,308 562,313
8.2 Trade and other receivables
20232022
$ 000 $ 000
Trade receivables
31,257 35,526
Prepayments
35,755 34,256
Rebate accruals and other debtors
30,009 29,735
Trade and other receivables
97,021 99,517
Less non current prepayments
(20,747)(11,664)
Current trade and other receivables
76,274 87,853
8.3 Trade and other payables
2023 2022
$ 000 $ 000
Local trade creditors and accruals
246,059 280,208
Foreign currency trade creditors
72,668 113,722
Goods in transit creditors
23,941 32,684
Capital expenditure creditors
1,109 2,995
Goods and services tax
16,132 7,475
Reward schemes, lay-bys, Christmas Club deposits and gift vouchers
27,413 22,692
Payroll accruals
20,017 20,820
Trade and other payables
407,339 480,596
Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost is calculated using a weighted average method and includes expenditure incurred
to purchase the inventory and transport it to its current location. Net realisable value is the estimated selling price of the inventory in the ordinary course
of business less costs necessary to make the sale. The cost of inventories consumed during the period are recognised as an expense and included in cost of
goods sold in the income statement.
Trade receivables arise from sales made to customers on credit or through the collection of rebates from suppliers not otherwise deducted from suppliers’
payable accounts. Trade receivables are non-interest bearing and are generally on 30 to 60 day terms. Trade receivables are recognised based on the
value of the invoice sent to the customer and adjusted for expected credit losses to provide for future unrecovered debts. The expected collectability of
trade and other receivables is reviewed on an ongoing basis.
Trade payables represent liabilities for goods and services provided to the Group prior to the end of financial year which are unpaid. The amounts are normally
unsecured and local creditors typically settled within 60 days and foreign creditors up to 120 days of recognition. Due to the short-term nature of these
payables, their carrying value is assumed to approximate their fair value.
Significant judgements and estimates
Assessing provisions for inventory obsolescence, net realisable value and shrinkage involves making estimates and judgements in relation to future selling prices
and expected shrinkage rates between the most recent store stock counts and balance date. Shrinkage is a reduction in inventory due to shoplifting, employee
theft, record keeping errors and supplier fraud. The Group considers a wide range of factors including historical data, current trends and product information
from buyers as part of the process to determine the appropriate value of these provisions.
Goods in transit from overseas
Goods in transit from overseas are recognised when title to the goods is passed to the Group. Title to the goods is passed when valid documents (which usually
include a ‘bill of lading’) are received, and terms, as set out in a supplier’s letter of credit or in the supplier’s terms of trade, are met.
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20237677Financial Statements
Notes to the Financial Statements - Operating Assets and Liabilities
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
COVID-19 landlord rent relief
The Group negotiated rent reductions with its landlords as a result of the temporary store closures caused by the COVID-19 pandemic last year. The Group applied
the NZ IFRS 16 (Leases) practical expedient introduced in May 2020 to account for the landlord rent concessions which meant the rent reductions were accounted
for as negative variable lease payments.
Significant judgements and estimates
To quantify lease liabilities and ‘right of use’ carrying values requires the Group to use judgement to assess the appropriate lease term and estimates to determine
the incremental borrowing rate applied to calculate these amounts. These judgements and estimates can significantly impact the carrying value of both the right of
use asset and lease liabilities recognised in the balance sheet and corresponding expenses recorded in the income statement.
The Group uses the judgement of experts within its property department to assess the lease term at the inception of a lease and to reassess a lease term
when a significant event or significant change in circumstances within the control of Group affects the prospect that a right of renewal contained in a lease
will be exercised.
The Group engages an independent valuation expert to establish the incremental borrowing rates applied to new and modified leases during the year. The average
incremental borrowing rate used to calculate the value of lease liabilities at balance date was 4.88% (2022: 4.48%).
The Group leases various warehouses, retail stores, equipment and vehicles. Property leases represent around 99% of the carrying value of the Group’s ‘right of
use assets’. The property leases are negotiated on an individual basis, typically for an initial period of 6 to 10 years and usually include extension options, but may
also contain a wide variety of other terms and conditions. Extension options provide the Group with operational flexibility in terms of managing the Group’s retail
intensity within different catchment areas. The majority of extension and termination options may only be exercised by the Group and not by the landlord.
10.0 LEASE LIABILITIES AND RIGHT OF USE ASSETS
10.1 Right of use assets
CostAccumulated DepreciationCarrying Amount
Note20232022 2023 2022 2023 2022
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000
Opening balance
1,502,650 1,505,137 (829,372)(768,613)673,278 736,524
Foreign exchange movement
(142)95 55 (22)(87)73
Additions
99,416 34,092 - - 99,416 34,092
Depreciation
- - (96,004)(94,614)(96,004)(94,614)
Reassessment of lease terms
10.2 (11,945)(1,075)- - (11,945)(1,075)
Sale and lease back adjustment
5.0 (494)- - - (494)-
Lease impairments
5.0 (226)- - - (226)-
Lease surrenders and terminations
(65,722)(35,599)62,809 33,877 (2,913)(1,722)
Closing balance
1,523,537 1,502,650 (862,512)(829,372)661,025 673,278
10.3 Lease liability maturity analysis
Gross Lease PaymentsInterestCarrying Amount
2023 20222023 2022 2023 2022
As at 30 July 2023
$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000
Within one year
134,934 129,927 (35,938)(34,078)98,996 95,849
One to two years
124,959 120,767 (31,746)(30,241)93,213 90,526
Two to five years
311,774 311,475 (71,811)(70,202)239,963 241,273
Beyond five years
423,847 456,230 (52,861)(63,038)370,986 393,192
Lease liability
995,514 1,018,399 (192,356)(197,559)803,158 820,840
Current lease liability
98,996 95,849
Non current lease liability
704,162 724,991
Lease liability
803,158 820,840
10.2 Lease liabilities
Note
2023 2022
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
$ 000$ 000
Opening balance
820,840 892,191
Foreign exchange movement
(91)75
Additions
99,416 34,092
Interest for the period
3.6 36,199 36,683
Reassessment of lease terms
10.1 (11,945)(1,075)
COVID-19 landlord rent relief
3.1 - (1,775)
Lease repayments
(137,370)(134,947)
Lease surrenders and terminations
(3,891)(4,404)
Closing balance
803,158 820,840
A ‘lease liability’ and a corresponding ‘right of use’ asset is recognised when the Group commences a lease with a term exceeding 12 months and has
sufficient value to not be characterised as a low value lease. The initial lease liability and corresponding ‘right of use’ asset represents the present value
of future lease payments discounted using the Group’s incremental borrowing rate over the lease term including any contractual lease extension options
considered reasonably certain to be exercised. The future lease payments adjust for contractual fixed rate lease payment adjustments but no adjustment is
made for inflation-indexed lease payment increases.
Lease payments are allocated between the lease liability and the finance cost. The finance cost is charged to the income statement over the lease period to
produce a constant periodic rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability for each period. The right of use asset is depreciated over the shorter of
the asset’s useful life and the lease term on a straight-line basis.
Notes to the Financial Statements - Operating Assets and Liabilities
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
9.2 Intangible assets
GoodwillBrand NamesComputer SoftwareTotal
Note2023202220232022202320222023 2022
$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000
Cost
94,380 94,380 23,523 23,523 113,354 75,371 231,257 193,274
Impairment and accumulated amortisation
(36,924)(36,924)(8,023)(8,023)(34,485)(21,148)(79,432)(66,095)
Opening carrying amount
57,456 57,456 15,500 15,500 78,869 54,223 151,825 127,179
Additions
- - - - 38,584 38,270 38,584 38,270
Disposals
- - - - (341)(320)(341)(320)
Amortisation
3.3 - - - - (21,829)(13,304)(21,829)(13,304)
Closing carrying amount
57,456 57,456 15,500 15,500 95,283 78,869 168,239 151,825
Cost
94,380 94,380 23,523 23,523 151,367 113,354 269,270 231,257
Impairment and accumulated amortisation
(36,924)(36,924)(8,023)(8,023)(56,084)(34,485)(101,031)(79,432)
Closing carrying amount
57,456 57,456 15,500 15,500 95,283 78,869 168,239 151,825
Goodwill
Goodwill arises on the acquisition of subsidiaries and represents the excess of the consideration paid above the fair value of the net identifiable assets, liabilities
and contingent liabilities acquired.
Brand names
Brand names acquired in a business combination are recognised at fair value at the acquisition date. Brand names are considered to have indefinite useful lives
as the Group have rights to use these names in perpetuity.
Impairment of goodwill and brand names
Assets that have an indefinite useful life are reviewed annually for impairment or whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the
carrying amount of the asset may not be recoverable. An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by which the asset’s carrying amount exceeds its
recoverable amount.
Computer software (excluding cloud computing arrangements)
Internal and external costs directly incurred in the purchase or development of software controlled by the Group are recognised as intangible assets, including
subsequent improvements, when it is probable that they will generate a future economic benefit. Computer software is amortised using the straight-line method
over periods ranging from two to ten years.
Cloud computing arrangements
Cloud computing arrangements provide the Group with the right to access a supplier's cloud based software for a specified contract period. If the Group does
not control the cloud based software, the related development costs (external and internal) are recognised as either:
(a) an expense when they are incurred for internal costs and the costs of an integrator not related to the software provider, or
(b) as a prepayment and then expensed over the term of the cloud computing arrangement for the costs of the software provider or its subcontractor.
Brand and goodwill impairment testing
The Group performs an annual impairment test of its brand and goodwill intangible assets which involves comparing the recoverable amount of the assets
to the carrying values. The recoverable amounts are calculated using the ‘fair value less costs to sell’ method. The discounted cash flow valuation method is
based on projections regarding future operating performance. The Group considers a wide range of factors including the Group’s financial budgets, strategic
plans, external benchmarks and historical performance to formulate the future cash flow projections. The Group also engages external advisors to determine
appropriate discount rates and long term growth rates, integral to the valuations. The valuations are then scaled down to align with the average values assessed
by a selection of the Group's external equity research analysts.
The Group's goodwill and brand assets are allocated to cash generating units and form the basis for impairment testing. Cash generating units represent the
lowest level within the Group at which the assets are monitored for internal management purposes. Details of the carrying amounts of goodwill and brand assets
and the allocation to cash generating units along with the key assumptions used in the impairment tests to extrapolate cash flows beyond the 5 year projection
period, are set out in the table below.
Operating margin represents earnings before interest, taxation, unusual items and the impact of NZ IFRS 16. The Warehouse segment also includes the Warehouse
Stationery business, the operating margin assumptions for this business division are different from those of the primary business at 10.5% (2022: 11.9%). The annual
impairment testing for both Noel Leeming and The Warehouse cash generating units indicated ample headroom and that the carrying amounts of the attributed
goodwill and brand assets were not impaired.
Impairment testing
Noel LeemingThe Warehouse
2023202220232022
$ 000 $ 000 $ 000 $ 000
Goodwill
31,776 31,776 25,680 25,680
Brand names
15,500 15,500 - -
Closing carrying amount
47,276 47,276 25,680 25,680
Key assumptions
Terminal operating margin (%)
4.5 5.3 5.2 5.7
Terminal growth rate (%)
2.1 2.0 2.1 2.0
Pre-tax discount rate (%)
16.5 14.2 14.8 13.1
Post-tax discount rate (%)
11.9 10.2 10.7 9.4
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20237879Financial Statements
Notes to the Financial Statements - Financing and Capital Structure
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
11.0 EQUITY
11.2 Bank and debt facilities
2023
2022
$ 000 $ 000
Cash and cash equivalents
28,330 24,999
Borrowings
(76,400)(66,150)
Net debt
(48,070)(41,151)
Committed bank credit facilities
470,000 420,000
Liquidity buffer
421,930 378,849
11.3 Contributed equity
Contributed EquityOrdinary Shares
2023
2022 2023
2022
$ 000 $ 000 000000
Share capital
365,517 365,517 346,843 346,843
Treasury shares
(5,282)(5,282)(1,489)(1,489)
Contributed equity
360,235 360,235 345,354 345,354
Notes to the Financial Statements - Financing and Capital Structure
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
11.1 Capital management
Capital is defined by the Group to be the total equity as shown in the balance sheet. The Group’s capital management objectives are to safeguard the Group’s
ability to continue as a going concern, to provide an appropriate rate of return to shareholders, optimise the Group’s cost of capital and maintain a liquidity
buffer (refer note 11.2).
The Group reviews its capital structure annually, unless there is a material change requiring an earlier response, and may make adjustments by means including
changes to the Group’s dividend pay-out ratio, issue of new shares, debt issuance, sale of assets or a combination of these.
Externally imposed capital requirements
The Group has a negative pledge arrangement with its funding providers that requires the parent and its guaranteeing Group companies to comply with certain
quarterly debt ratios and restrictive covenants. The calculation of these ratios is adjusted to exclude the impact of the NZ IFRS 16 lease accounting standard.
The two principal covenants are:
(a) The gearing ratio will not exceed 60% during the first quarter ending October or exceed 50% in each of the remaining quarters of the year;
(b) Interest cover will not be less than 2 times operating profit.
The Group was in compliance with all aspects of the negative pledge covenants throughout the current and previous financial year.
Ordinary shares are classified as equity. Incremental costs, directly attributable to the issue of new shares, are shown in equity as a deduction from the
proceeds of the share issue.
Where the Group purchases its own equity share capital (treasury shares), the consideration paid, including any directly attributable incremental costs
is deducted from equity attributable to the shareholders until the shares are cancelled or reissued. Where such shares are reissued, any consideration
received, net of any directly attributable incremental transaction costs, is included in equity attributable to shareholders.
Ordinary shares on issue are fully paid and carry one vote per share and participate equally in dividends, other distributions from equity and any surplus on a
winding up of the Group. The Group retains its own ordinary shares which are used for employee share based payment arrangements. Voting rights attached to
the shares are held by the trustees of the employee share plans, and dividends paid on the shares are retained by the trustee for the benefit of the Group.
The Group’s liquidity policy is to have a minimum liquidity buffer of $300 million and an optimal range of between $350 million to $450 million.
Sustainability Linked Loans
The Group has structured $145 million of its committed bank credit facilities as Sustainability Linked Loans (SLLs) which met the requirements of the Loan
Market Association’s Sustainability Linked Loan Principles (2021) when they began in October 2021. The facility fee pricing for the SLLs is linked to the
achievement of mutually agreed sustainability targets that span a 4 year period. There are four sustainability targets and the facility pricing can be reduced by a
maximum of 8 basis points if all the sustainability targets are achieved and increased by the same if the targets are not met.
There were no changes to the Group's contributed equity during the current year and previous year.
11.4 Reserves
Note2023 2022
$ 000 $ 000
Cash flow hedge reserve
(767)12,560
Foreign currency translation reserve
(27)179
Share based payments reserve
13.0 804 -
Reserves
10 12,739
Cash flow hedge reserve
This reserve records the portion of the gain or loss on a hedging derivative in a cash flow hedge that is determined to be an effective hedge. The
cumulative deferred gain or loss on the hedge is recognised in the income statement when the hedged transaction impacts the income statement, or
depending on the nature of the hedge, is included in a non-financial hedged item when the hedged event occurs. (Refer to the consolidated statement of
changes in equity and accounting policies detailed in note 12.2).
Foreign currency translation reserve
Exchange differences arising on translation of the Group's subsidiaries in India and China are recognised in other comprehensive income and accumulated
in a separate reserve within equity. The cumulative amount is reclassified to the income statement when the net investment is sold.
Share based payments reserve
Share rights are granted to employees in accordance with the Group’s executive share rights plan. The fair value of share rights granted under the plan are
measured at grant date and recognised as an employee expense over the vesting period with a corresponding increase in equity. The fair value at grant
date of the share right's are independently determined using an appropriate valuation model that takes into account the terms and conditions upon which
they were granted. (Note 13.0 provides further details regarding the plan and fair value calculations).
This reserve is used to record the accumulated value of the unvested shares rights, which have been recognised as an expense in the income statement.
Upon the vesting of share rights, the balance of the reserve relating to the share rights is offset against the cost of treasury shares allotted to settle
the obligation, with any difference in the cost of settling the commitment transferred to retained earnings. (Refer also to the consolidated statement of
changes in equity).
11.5 Minority interest
2023 2022
$ 000 $ 000
Opening balance
(815)(2,694)
Net profit/(loss) attributable to minority interest
127 (2,223)
Minority put options exercised
1,688 4,227
Dividends paid to minority shareholders
(50)(125)
Closing balance
950 (815)
Minority interest reserve
A minority interest is an ownership position in a Group subsidiary where the minority shareholder owns less than 50% of outstanding shares and has no
control over decisions. Minority interests are measured based on the minority shareholder's proportionate share of the net asset value of the subsidiary.
At balance date minority shareholders held a 50% (2022: 50%) shareholding in ChocolateWorks and in the prior year a 3.0% shareholding in TheMarket.com. In August
2022 the Group acquired the remaining 3.0% minority shareholding in TheMarket.com for a consideration of $691,200 through exercising an existing put option.
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20238081Financial Statements
Notes to the Financial Statements - Financial Risk Management
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
12.1 Financial risk factors
The Group’s activities expose it to various financial risks including liquidity risk, credit risk and market risk. The Group’s overall risk management programme focuses
on the uncertainty of financial markets and seeks to minimise potential adverse effects on the Group’s financial performance.
The Group enters into forward currency contracts to manage the currency fluctuation risks arising from the Group’s overseas purchases.
Risk management is carried out by a central treasury department (Group Treasury) under policies approved by the Board of Directors. Group Treasury identifies,
evaluates and hedges financial risks in close co-operation with the Group’s operating units. The Board provides written principles for overall risk management,
as well as written policies covering specific areas, such as mitigating foreign exchange, interest rate and credit risks, use of derivative financial instruments and
investing excess cash.
Significant judgements and estimates
Valuation
The Group’s derivatives are not traded in an active market, which means quoted prices are not available to determine the fair value. To determine the fair value, the Group
uses valuation techniques which rely on observable market data. For accounting purposes (NZ IFRS 13) these valuations are deemed to be Level 2 fair value measurements
as they are not derived from a quoted price in an active market but rather, a valuation technique that relies on other observable market data.
Hedge effectiveness
When calculating the hedge effectiveness of the Group's currency derivatives the Group is required to forecast the next 18 months overseas purchases to test if the
hedged transactions are still highly probable to occur. The method of testing adopted is based on matching the critical terms of the hedged transaction to those of
the derivative. The results of this testing demonstrated an expectation of high hedge effectiveness.
Notes to the Financial Statements - Financial Risk Management
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
12.0 FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT
12.2 Derivative financial instruments
2023 2022
$ 000$ 000
Forward exchange contract assets
5,208 29,491
Forward exchange contract liabilities
(7,320)(668)
Derivative financial instruments
(2,112)28,823
Classified as:
Cash flow hedges
(1,066)17,444
Fair value hedges
(1,046)11,379
Derivative financial instruments
(2,112)28,823
Derivatives are initially recognised at fair value on the date a derivative contract is entered into and are subsequently remeasured to their fair value. The method
of recognising the resulting gain or loss depends on whether the derivative is designated as a hedging instrument, and if so, the nature of the item being hedged.
For the purposes of hedge accounting, hedges are classified as:
• Cash flow hedges when they hedge an exposure to a highly probable forecast transaction; or
• Fair value hedges when they hedge the exposure to changes in fair value of a recognised asset or liability.
The Group documents at the inception of the transaction the relationship between hedging instruments and hedged items, as well as its risk management
objective and strategy for undertaking the hedge transactions. An assessment, both at hedge inception and on an ongoing basis is also documented, of whether
the derivatives that are used in hedging transactions have been and will continue to be highly effective in offsetting changes in fair values or cash flows of
hedged items.
Cash flow hedges
The Group applies cash flow hedge accounting to manage the currency risk associated with purchasing inventory in foreign currencies. The effective
portion of changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as cash flow hedges is recognised in equity in the cash flow hedge reserve.
The gain or loss relating to the ineffective portion is recognised immediately in the income statement.
Amounts accumulated in equity are recycled in the income statement in the periods when the hedged item will affect profit or loss. However, when the
forecast transaction that is hedged results in the recognition of a non-financial asset (for example, inventory), the gains and losses previously deferred in
equity are transferred from equity and included in the measurement of the initial cost or carrying amount of the asset or liability.
When a hedging instrument expires or is sold or terminated, or when a hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, any cumulative gain or loss
existing in equity at that time remains in equity and is recognised when the forecast transaction is ultimately recognised in the income statement. When
a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss that was reported in equity is immediately transferred to the income
statement.
Fair value hedges
The Group applies fair value hedge accounting for hedging to manage the currency risk associated with foreign currency trade creditors. Changes in the
fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as fair value hedges are recorded in the income statement, together with any changes in the fair
value of the hedged asset or liability that are attributed to the hedged risk. If the hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, or the hedge is
not fully effective, then the hedge or portion of the hedge which is not effective is recognised immediately in the income statement as a foreign exchange
gain or loss.
Derivatives that do not qualify for hedge accounting
Certain derivative instruments do not qualify for hedge accounting. Changes in the fair value of any derivative instrument that does not qualify for hedge
accounting are recognised immediately in the income statement.
+ 10 percent- 10 percent
Foreign currency sensitivity table
NoteAmountProfit Equity Profit Equity
At 30 July 2023
$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000
Foreign currency trade creditors
8.3 (72,668)4,756 4,756 (5,814)(5,814)
Derivative financial instruments
Currency forward contracts - cash flow hedges
12.2 (1,066)- (23,071)- 28,207
Currency forward contracts - fair value hedges
12.2 (1,046)(4,720)(4,720)5,770 5,770
Total increase/(decrease)
36 (23,035)(44)28,163
At 31 July 2022
Foreign currency trade creditors
8.3 (113,722)7,443 7,443 (9,098)(9,098)
Derivative financial instruments
Currency forward contracts - cash flow hedges
12.2 17,444 - (20,033)- 24,488
Currency forward contracts - fair value hedges
12.2 11,379 (7,413)(7,413)9,061 9,061
Total increase/(decrease)
30 (20,003)(37)24,451
12.3 Liquidity risk
Prudent liquidity risk management implies maintaining sufficient cash and the availability of funding through committed credit facilities to meet financial obligations when
they are due and being able to close out market positions if necessary. The Group monitors rolling forecasts of the Group’s liquidity position based on expected cash flows
to ensure a liquidity buffer is maintained in accordance with policy limits approved by the Board. The Group maintains funding flexibility by maintaining availability using
committed credit lines. The Group’s liquidity policy and committed credit facilities at balance date are detailed in note 11.1.
The table below details the Group’s derivatives and other financial liabilities (excluding lease liabilities - refer note 10.3).
12.4 Credit risk
Credit risk arises from the financial assets of the Group which are exposed to potential counter-party default, with a maximum exposure equal to the carrying amount
of these assets. In the normal course of business the Group incurs credit risk from trade and other receivables, derivatives and transactions with financial institutions.
The Group places its cash and short-term investments and derivatives with high credit quality financial institutions approved by the Board and in accordance with
specified treasury policy limits. The Group’s treasury policy requires bank counter-parties to have a minimum Standard & Poor’s credit rating of at least A (2022: A).
The Group controls its credit risk from trade and other receivables by the application of credit approval, limits and monitoring procedures. Receivable balances are
monitored on an ongoing basis to ensure the Group’s bad debt exposure is not significant. Concentrations of credit risk exist when changes in economic, industry or
geographical factors similarly affect the group of counterparties whose aggregate credit exposure is significant in relation to the Group’s total credit exposure. As the
Group transacts with a diversity of counterparties it does not have any significant exposure to any individual customers, industry or economic sector.
12.5 Market risk
Foreign exchange risk
The Group purchases inventory directly from overseas suppliers, primarily priced in US dollars. In order to protect against exchange rate movements and manage
the inventory costing process, the Group enters into forward exchange contracts to purchase foreign currencies. These contracts hedge highly probable forecast
purchases and are timed to mature when the payments are scheduled to be settled. Management work to a Board approved Treasury Policy to manage this foreign
exchange risk. The policy parameters for hedging forecast currency exposures are:
• to hedge 80% to 100% of US dollar commitments expected in the next 0 to 4 months
• to hedge 50% to 90% of US dollar commitments expected in the next 5 to 12 months
• where exposures to other currencies arise, the Group hedges these risks once a firm commitment is in place
• specific approval is required to hedge foreign currency commitments extending beyond a 12-month time horizon.
Currency position at balance date
Carrying ValueNotional Amount (NZD)Average Exchange Rate12 Month Hedge Level
2023 2022 2023 2022 2023 2022 2023 2022
$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000CENTSCENTS%%
Currency forward contracts
Buy US dollars/Sell New Zealand dollars
(2,112)28,823 437,383 397,213 0.61250.6742 74.7 68.9
The spot rate used to determine the mark-to-market carrying value of the US dollar forward contracts at balance date was $0.6156 (2022: $0.6290).
The following sensitivity table, based on currency contracts and foreign currency trade creditors in existence at balance date, shows the positive/(negative) impact
of reasonably possible exchange rate movements on after tax profit and equity, with all other variables held constant.
Based on forecast projections and historical performance currency contracts designated as cash flow hedges were assumed to be 100% hedge effective.
Liabilities/(assets)
0 - 6 Months7 - 12 MonthsTotal
Note2023 2022 2023 2022 2023 2022
$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000
Trade and other payables
8.3 407,339 480,596 - - 407,339 480,596
Derivatives - gross settled
(currency exchange contracts)
- outflow
12.5 260,005 223,430 177,378 173,783 437,383 397,213
- inflow
(256,490)(244,543)(178,702)(181,254)(435,192)(425,797)
Financial liabilities and derivatives
410,854 459,483 (1,324)(7,471)409,530 452,012
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20238283
Notes to the Financial Statements - Other Disclosures
For the 52 week period ended 30 July 2023
13.0 KEY MANAGEMENT
14.0 COMMITMENTS
16.0 RELATED PARTIES
15.0 CONTINGENT LIABILITIES
Key management includes the Directors of the Company and those employees deemed to have disclosure obligations under subpart 6 of the Financial Markets
Conduct Act 2013, being the Group Chief Executive Officer and his 9 (2022: 9) direct reports.
Compensation made to Directors and other members of key management of the Group is set out in the two tables below:
In addition, J W M Journee and R J Tindall each received fees of $6,875 (2022: $13,750) and D R Hamilton a fee of $6,875 (2022: $7,563) in their capacities as
directors of a Group subsidiary company (TheMarket.Com Limited).
Share based compensation
The Group granted share rights as a retention incentive to the CEO and five members of the Group's senior leadership in October 2022 and November 2022
respectively. For each share right the participant is eligible to be issued or transferred, for nil consideration 1 share on the vesting date (together with dividend
equivalents), providing certain non-market performance conditions are met. The participants will be delivered the shares net of tax, with the number of pre-tax
shares to be delivered reduced by the number of shares equal to the participant's PAYE obligation.
Capital expenditure contracted for at balance date, but not recognised as liabilities, is set out below:
During the period, the Group has not entered into any material contracts involving related parties or Directors' interests which are not disclosed. No amounts
owed by related parties have been written off or forgiven during the period.
Directors’ fees
2023 2022
$ 000$ 000
J Withers (Chair)
183 177
A J Balfour
119 112
W K Easton (resigned May 2022)
- 75
D R Hamilton
114 111
J W M Journee
104 98
C M Rainsford (appointed August 2022)
84 -
J M Raue
124 116
R E Taulelei
114 104
R J Tindall
94 91
Total
936 884
20232022
$ 000$ 000
Standby letter of credit
17,500 17,500
Bank guarantees provided to landlords and the New Zealand Exchange Limited
315 456
Total contingent liabilities
17,815 17,956
Capital commitments
2023 2022
$ 000 $ 000
Within one year
8,387 17,628
Key management
Note2023 2022
$ 000$ 000
Base salary
7,045 7,157
Retention (cash settled)
3,126 -
Three year performance based compensation (cash settled)
438 1,629
Share based compensation
11.4 804 -
Termination benefits
- 846
Total
11,413 9,632
Tranche 2 Tranche 1
Share rights granted
770,711 1,600,000
Lapsed
(167,546)-
Share rights at balance date
603,165 1,600,000
Date granted
November 2022October 2022
Vesting date
October 2025October 2026
Weighted average cost of equity (%)
8.5 8.9
Average share price at grant date ($)
3.01 3.13
Estimated fair value at grant date ($)
2.93 2.96
Our opinion
In our opinion, the accompanying financial statements of The Warehouse Group Limited (the Company), including its subsidiaries (the Group),
present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Group as at 30 July 2023, its financial performance and its cash flows for
the 52 week period then ended in accordance with New Zealand Equivalents to International Financial Reporting Standards (NZ IFRS) and
International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS).
What we have audited
The Group’s financial statements comprise:
●• ●the consolidated balance sheet as at 30 July 2023;
●●• ●the consolidated income statement for the 52 week period then ended;
●●• ●the consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the 52 week period then ended;
●●• the consolidated statement of changes in equity for the 52 week period then ended;
●●• the consolidated statement of cash flows for the 52 week period then ended; and
●●• the notes to the financial statements, which include significant accounting policies and other explanatory information.
Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (New Zealand) (ISAs (NZ)) and International Standards on
Auditing (ISAs). Our responsibilities under those standards are further described in the Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial
statements section of our report.
We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.
Independence
We are independent of the Group in accordance with Professional and Ethical Standard 1 International Code of Ethics for Assurance Practitioners
(including International Independence Standards) (New Zealand) (PES 1) issued by the New Zealand Auditing and Assurance Standards Board and
the International Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants (including International Independence Standards) issued by the International Ethics
Standards Board for Accountants (IESBA Code), and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these requirements.
Our firm carries out other services for the Group in the areas of executive remuneration benchmarking, access to the 2022 Executive Reward
report, agreed upon procedures at the Annual Shareholders’ Meeting, agreed upon procedures relating to the calculations of the Negative Pledge
Agreement and revenue and total assets confirmation and a tax audit for an overseas subsidiary. In addition, certain partners and employees
of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading activities of the Group. The provision of these other
services and relationships have not impaired our independence as auditor of the Group.
Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of the financial statements of
the current 52 week period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming our
opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.
Independent Auditor’s Report
To the shareholders of The Warehouse Group Limited
PricewaterhouseCoopers, 15 Customs Street West, Private Bag 92162, Auckland 1142, New Zealand
T: +64 9 355 8000, F: +64 9 355 8801, pwc.co.nz
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20238485
Description of the key audit matterHow our audit addressed the key audit matter
Inventory valuation and costing
The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 30
July 2023 was $493.3 million (2022: $562.3 million) with
inventory provisions of $21.0 million (2022: $17.2 million).
To calculate the cost of inventory, the Group uses
a weighted average method and also includes
expenditure incurred to purchase the inventory and
transport it to its current location. To value inventory,
the Group measures inventory at the lower of cost and
net realisable value by deducting a provision from the
cost of inventory that is determined based on various
factors including historical data, current trends and
product information from buyers.
Determining the appropriate level of provisions
involves judgement, including management's
expectations of future sales levels and estimation
of selling price adjustments. Due to the judgements
involved in estimating the inventory provisions, and
the significance of the inventory balance, this is an
area of focus for the audit.
Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the
accounting policy for inventory and the judgements
and estimates applied by management to determine
the inventory provision.
We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls
surrounding inventory costing and provisioning and assessed the design
and implementation of relevant inventory controls, especially controls over
the cyclical count process.
Our procedures to audit the cost of inventory included the following, on a
sample basis:
●• testing the accuracy of the weighted average cost calculation by
reperforming the calculation; and
●• checking the cost of inventory to supplier and freight invoices and
supplier rebate contracts.
On inventory provisions, our procedures included:
●• observing management's stocktake procedures, throughout the period, at
a sample of selected locations, to confirm existence of inventory and that
aged and clearance items were identified and accounted for;
●• holding discussions with management to understand and corroborate the
assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;
●• assessing management’s forecast accuracy by comparing management's
retrospective review of inventory provisions in the prior period against
actual inventory write offs in the current period;
●• on a sample basis, testing the net realisable value of finished goods by
comparing the cost to the most recent retail price less the cost to sell,
and that finished goods were valued at the lower of cost or net realisable
value;
●• on a sample basis, inspecting the inventory aging schedules and
checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in accordance
with Group policy;
●• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by
comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the period;
●• comparing all inventory provisions for each inventory category as a
percentage of the gross carrying amount versus the prior 52 week period,
and understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes; and
●• considering the appropriateness of disclosures in the financial
statements.
Description of the key audit matterHow our audit addressed the key audit matter
Impairment of Torpedo7 property, plant and
equipment and right-of-use assets
As disclosed in note 2.1 of the financial statements, the
Torpedo7 operating segment incurred an operating
loss of $22.2 million for the 52 week period ended 30
July 2023. The trading performance and sector outlook
(particularly those relating to the bike market) were
identified as indicators of impairment. The total carrying
value of Torpedo7’s property, plant and equipment and
right-of-use (ROU) assets amounted to $10.8 million and
$26.3 million, respectively.
For the purposes of testing property, plant and
equipment and ROU assets for impairment, each
individual store is considered to be a separate cash
generating unit (CGU).
Management performed an impairment assessment
using a fair value less cost of disposal (FVLCD) model.
The Group engaged an external expert to determine
the appropriate post tax discount rate of 11.1% and the
long-term growth rate of 2.1%. Key assumptions, to which
the model is sensitive, are the average revenue recovery
assumption of 4% and the Recovery Plan gross margin
of 43% in the terminal year. The Group concluded that
there is no impairment of property, plant and equipment
and ROU assets. Non-achievement in the Recovery
Plan may result in impairment of these assets.
This is an area of audit focus due to Torpedo7’s
underperformance over recent years and the inherent
judgement in assumptions used in impairment testing.
Further, we consider there is execution risk in the
Recovery Plan due to the underperformance, current
market conditions and the time horizon over which the
recovery is expected to occur.
Our audit procedures included:
●• updating our understanding of the business process applied by
management in preparing the impairment assessment, including the level
at which a CGU is defined;
●• analysing store performance data to identify whether an impairment
indicator existed at period end;
●• in respect of lease reassessments, inspecting a sample of lease
agreements to understand the changes to key terms and conditions and
tracing these through to the adjustments made by management in the
underlying accounting records;
●• agreeing the cash flow projections in the FVLCD impairment assessment
to the Recovery Plan;
●• obtaining an understanding of the strategic and operational initiatives
as set out in the Recovery Plan and, with the assistance of our auditor’s
valuation expert, performing sensitivity analysis over the FVLCD model
to consider which assumptions the model is most sensitive to, and
benchmarking the projected margins with comparable companies’
margins;
●• assessing the appropriateness of the terminal growth and discount rates
used in the FVLCD model;
●• checking the mathematical accuracy of the impairment model by
reperforming the calculation; and
●• considering the appropriateness of the disclosures in the financial
statements.
Independent Auditor’s Report
To the shareholders of The Warehouse Group Limited
Independent Auditor’s Report
To the shareholders of The Warehouse Group Limited
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20238687
Other information
The Directors are responsible for the other information. The other information comprises the information included in the Annual Report, but does
not include the financial statements and our auditor's report thereon.
Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information and we do not express any form of audit opinion or assurance
conclusion thereon.
In connection with our audit of the financial statements, our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether
the other information is materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the audit, or otherwise appears to
be materially misstated. If, based on the work we have performed on the other information that we obtained prior to the date of this auditor’s
report, we conclude that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact. We have nothing to
report in this regard.
Responsibilities of the Directors for the financial statements
The Directors are responsible, on behalf of the Company, for the preparation and fair presentation of the financial statements in accordance with
NZ IFRS and IFRS, and for such internal control as the Directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are
free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.
In preparing the financial statements, the Directors are responsible for assessing the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing,
as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis of accounting unless the Directors either intend to liquidate
the Group or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.
Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements, as a whole, are free from material misstatement,
whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but
is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (NZ) and ISAs will always detect a material misstatement when it exists.
Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to
influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial statements.
As part of an audit in accordance with ISAs (NZ), we exercise professional judgement and maintain professional scepticism throughout the audit.
We also:
●• Identify and assess the risks of material misstatement of the financial statements, whether due to fraud or error, design and perform audit
procedures responsive to those risks, and obtain audit evidence that is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion. The risk of
not detecting a material misstatement resulting from fraud is higher than for one resulting from error, as fraud may involve collusion, forgery,
intentional omissions, misrepresentations, or the override of internal control.
• Obtain an understanding of internal control relevant to the audit in order to design audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances,
but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Group’s internal control.
●• Evaluate the appropriateness of accounting policies used and the reasonableness of accounting estimates and related disclosures made by
management.
• Conclude on the appropriateness of the use of the going concern basis of accounting by those charged with governance and, based on the
audit evidence obtained, whether a material uncertainty exists related to events or conditions that may cast significant doubt on the Group’s
ability to continue as a going concern. If we conclude that a material uncertainty exists, we are required to draw attention to our auditor’s report
to the related disclosures in the financial statements or, if such disclosures are inadequate, to modify our opinion. Our conclusions are based
on the audit evidence obtained up to the date of the auditor’s report. However, future events or conditions may cause the Group to cease to
continue as a going concern.
• Evaluate the overall presentation, structure and content of the financial statements, including the disclosures, and whether the financial
statements represent the underlying transactions and events in a manner that achieves fair presentation.
• Obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding the financial information of the entities or business activities within the Group to express
an opinion on the financial statements. We are responsible for the direction, supervision and performance of the group audit. We remain solely
responsible for the audit opinion.
Independent Auditor’s Report
To the shareholders of The Warehouse Group Limited
Overall Group materiality: $8,497,000, which represents approximately 0.25% of total revenues.
We chose total revenues as the benchmark because, in our view, it is a key financial statement
metric used in assessing the performance of the Group and it is a generally accepted benchmark.
In recent periods we have used a three-period weighted average adjusted profit before tax
measure as the benchmark. We have changed the benchmark in the current period due to the
volatility of the Group's profit. Using revenue as the benchmark for this period results in a similar
overall materiality level to previous periods, which we consider is appropriate.
Full scope audits were performed for two of the five trading entities within the Group based on their
financial significance, which represents approximately 87% of the Group's retail sales for the period.
Specified audit procedures and analytical review procedures were performed on the remaining
entities and on consolidation entries.
As reported above, we have two key audit matters, being:
●• Inventory valuation and costing
●• Impairment of Torpedo7 property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets
As part of designing our audit, we determined materiality and assessed the risks of material misstatement in the financial statements. In
particular, we considered where management made subjective judgements; for example, in respect of significant accounting estimates that
involved making assumptions and considering future events that are inherently uncertain. As in all of our audits, we also addressed the risk of
management override of internal controls, including among other matters, consideration of whether there was evidence of bias that represented
a risk of material misstatement due to fraud.
Materiality
The scope of our audit was influenced by our application of materiality. An audit is designed to obtain reasonable assurance about whether
the financial statements are free from material misstatement. Misstatements may arise due to fraud or error. They are considered material if,
individually or in aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of the financial
statements.
Based on our professional judgement, we determined certain quantitative thresholds for materiality, including the overall Group materiality for
the financial statements as a whole as set out above. These, together with qualitative considerations, helped us to determine the scope of our
audit, the nature, timing and extent of our audit procedures and to evaluate the effect of misstatements, both individually and in aggregate, on
the financial statements as a whole.
How we tailored our group audit scope
We tailored the scope of our audit in order to perform sufficient work to enable us to provide an opinion on the financial statements as a whole,
taking into account the structure of the Group, the accounting processes and controls, and the industry in which the Group operates.
We identified subsidiaries that, due to their financially significant contribution to the Group’s overall results, required a full scope audit. In
addition, we also performed specific audit procedures on certain balances and transactions of other subsidiaries. Audits of each subsidiary are
performed at a materiality level calculated with reference to a proportion of the Group materiality relative to the financial significance of the
business concerned.
Materiality
Group Scoping
Key Audit
Matters
Our audit approach
Overview
Independent Auditor’s Report
To the shareholders of The Warehouse Group Limited
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20238889
Independent Auditor’s Report
To the shareholders of The Warehouse Group Limited
We communicate with those charged with governance regarding, among other matters, the planned scope and timing of the audit and
significant audit findings, including any significant deficiencies in internal control that we identify during the audit.
We also provide those charged with governance with a statement that we have complied with relevant ethical requirements regarding
independence, and to communicate with them all relationships and other matters that may reasonably be thought to bear on our
independence, and where applicable, actions taken to eliminate threats or safeguards applied.
From the matters communicated with those charged with governance, we determine those matters that were of most significance in the
audit of the financial statements of the current period and are therefore the key audit matters. We describe these matters in the auditor’s
report unless law or regulation precludes public disclosure about the matter or when, in extremely rare circumstances, we determine that a
matter should not be communicated in the auditor’s report because the adverse consequences of doing so would reasonably be expected to
outweigh the public interest benefits of such communication.
Who we report to
This report is made solely to the Company’s shareholders, as a body. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state those
matters which we are required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we
do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the Company and the Company’s shareholders, as a body, for our audit work,
for this report or for the opinions we have formed.
The engagement partner on the audit resulting in this independent auditor’s report is Lisa Crooke.
For and on behalf of:
Chartered Accountants Auckland
27 September 2023
At The Warehouse Group we are committed to the
highest standards of corporate governance and
ethical conduct.
We believe that these values help to create sustainable long-
term value for our shareholders, build a strong team, improve
the experience we offer our customers and contribute to our
place within the wider community.
This corporate governance statement provides an overview of
the policies and processes that are in place at The Warehouse
Group Limited (the Company) which ensure that the highest
standards of corporate governance are maintained. The
Company notes and supports the updated NZX Corporate
Governance Code dated 1 April 2023 (NZX Code). This
statement follows the structure of the NZX Code and addresses
its recommendations. As at the date of the publication of
this Annual Report, the Company considers its governance
practices are compliant with the NZX Code. The Company’s
constitution, the Board and committee charters, codes and
policies referred to in this statement are available at www.
thewarehousegroup.co.nz/aboutus/corporate-governance.
GOVERNANCE
REPORT
Left to right:
Jeremy O’Brien, Robert Tindall, Antony (Tony) Balfour,
Julia Raue, Rachel Taulelei, Joan Withers,
Dean Hamilton, John Journee and Caroline Rainsford.
90The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 202391Governance Report
Robert (Robbie) Tindall
BA, BSc
Non-Executive Director
Robbie was elected as a director
of the Group in November
2020, having previously been
Sir Stephen Tindall’s alternate
director since 2017. He studied Arts
and Science at the University of
Auckland before spending eight
years at The Warehouse in various
merchandise and buying roles.
Since 2011 Robbie has been an
Investment Director at K One W
One, a family investment company,
where his involvement in some
of New Zealand’s most exciting
technology and innovation
companies sees him uniquely
placed in understanding a broad
range of technology trends as they
come to market. Robbie is also a
Trustee of The Tindall Foundation
and the Finn Lowery Foundation.
COMMITTEES
• Disclosure Committee
• Corporate Governance and
Nominations Committee
• People and Remuneration
Committee
• Health, Safety and Wellbeing
Committee
OTHER DIRECTORSHIPS
• K One W One Limited
• Foundation Services Limited
• The Tindall Foundation
( Trus te e)
• Finn Lowery Foundation
( Trus te e)
John Journee
BCom, CFinstD, MAICD
Independent Non-Executive Director
John has had an extensive retail
career, including executive
experience across sectors that
span general merchandise,
fashion apparel, FMCG, consumer
electronics, telecommunications,
hospitality and electricity retailing.
Over his 30 year career he has
spent 15 years with The Warehouse
Group, starting as a joint-venture
partner in 1990 and progressing
through senior roles in operations,
marketing, merchandise,
international sourcing and business
development. John has also held
CEO roles with Noel Leeming and
foodservice distributor Southern
Hospitality.
COMMITTEES
• Audit and Risk Committee
• Health, Safety and Wellbeing
Committee
• Environmental and Social
Sustainability Committee
OTHER DIRECTORSHIPS
• Farmlands Society
• Colonial Motor Company
Limited
• West Auckland Trust Services
Limited
• Advisory Board Member –
Data Insights Group Limited
Julia Raue CMinstD, GAICD
Independent Non-Executive Director
Julia has extensive digital, customer,
data, strategy and business
transformation experience across
a number of sectors including
airline, telecommunications, local
government and not-for-profit
in New Zealand and Australia.
She has a strong track record
of delivering award-winning,
innovative, customer-facing
products and services. Julia has
been a professional director for
eight years, holding governance
roles across a range of sectors
including media, broadcasting,
energy, retail, insurance, technology
and healthcare. She has previously
held director positions at Television
New Zealand Limited and Z Energy
Limited. Prior to governance, Julia
was the Chief Information Officer of
Air New Zealand, and in 2009 she
was awarded the New Zealand CIO
of the Year award.
COMMITTEES
• Health, Safety and Wellbeing
Committee (Chair)
• Audit and Risk Committee
• Environmental and Social
Sustainability Committee
OTHER DIRECTORSHIPS
• Jade Software Corporation
Limited
• Southern Cross Medical Care
Society
• Southern Cross Healthcare
Limited
• MOVE Logistics Group Limited
• Southern Cross Health Trust
( Trus te e)
• Global Women NZ (Trustee)
• New Zealand Rugby Appointments
and Remuneration Committee
(Chair)
Joan Withers MBA, CFinstD
Chair
Independent Non-Executive Director
Joan has been a professional
director for more than 20 years and
spent over 25 years working in the
media industry, previously holding
CEO positions at The Radio Network
and Fairfax Media. In addition to
her Chair role with The Warehouse
Group, Joan is also a director
of ANZ Bank NZ Limited, Origin
Energy Limited and Sky Network
Television Limited and Chair of the
Appointments Panel for Fonterra
farmer-elected directors. She has
previously held Chair positions at
Television New Zealand Limited and
Auckland International Airport.
Joan is a Trustee of the Sweet Louise
Foundation and is Chair of a steering
committee working to increase the
percentage of South Auckland Māori
and Pacific Island students taking
up roles in the health sector. She
is also co-founder and a director
of On Being Bold Ltd, a group of
senior businesswomen working to
help New Zealand women fulfil their
career potential in tandem with
enjoying a fulfilling personal life.
COMMITTEES
• Corporate Governance and
Nomination Committee (Chair)
• Audit and Risk Committee
• Disclosure Committee
• People and Remuneration
Committee
• Health, Safety and Wellbeing
Committee
• Environmental and Social
Sustainability Committee
OTHER DIRECTORSHIPS
• Sky Network Television Limited
• ANZ Bank NZ Limited
• Sweet Louise Foundation
( Trus te e)
• Origin Energy Limited
• On Being Bold Limited
Dean Hamilton BCA
Independent Non-Executive Director
Dean has significant CEO and
financial markets experience. Most
recently he was CEO of Silver Fern
Farms Limited, where he led the
business successfully through
a period of significant change
and improvement in financial
performance, staff and supplier
engagement, sustainability, and
consumer trust in brand. His prior
experience includes 12 years at
global investment bank Deutsche
Bank, working in both Australia
and New Zealand, where he
advised a wide range of companies
on mergers and acquisitions,
capital management, corporate
restructuring and capital raising.
COMMITTEES
• Audit and Risk Committee
(Chair)
• Disclosure Committee (Chair)
• Health, Safety and Wellbeing
Committee
• Corporate Governance and
Nomination Committee
OTHER DIRECTORSHIPS
• Fulton Hogan Limited (Chair)
• Auckland International Airport
Limited
• Tappenden Holdings Limited
• Ryman Healthcare Limited
(Chair)
Caroline Rainsford BCom
Independent Non-Executive Director
Caroline is the Country Director
for Google NZ, where she is
responsible for driving the overall
revenue and business strategy
for New Zealand. Partnering with
government, policy teams and
New Zealand business leaders, she
is focused on helping New Zealand
businesses grow and transform
in the digital age. Prior to joining
Google in 2017, Caroline was the
Marketing and Product Director
for the Latitude NZ (previously GE
Capital) business as well as the
Brand Director for the Australian
and New Zealand regions. Her
earlier career included roles
with Philips Royal Electronics
in the Middle East, Turkey and
Africa. Caroline holds a Bachelor
of Commerce (Hons) from the
University of Auckland.
COMMITTEES
• Health, Safety and Wellbeing
Committee
• People and Remuneration
Committee
OUR BOARD
Rachel Taulelei LLB
Ngāti Raukawa ki te Tonga, Ngāti Rārua
Independent Non-Executive Director
Rachel is a prominent business
leader and a strong advocate
for the Māori economy, values-
based business models, and New
Zealand's food and beverage
industry. Her commitment to
kaitiakitanga has been evident
throughout her career, as founder
of sustainable seafood company
Yellow Brick Road in 2006, to
her time as CEO of Māori-owned
food and beverage company
Kono, and now in her current
role as co-founder of business
design and brand strategy firm
Oho. Rachel has held a number of
governance roles, with particular
expertise in primary industries. She
presently chairs Moana NZ and the
Wellington Regional Stadium Trust,
serves as a director on the board of
Sealord Group Limited and ANZCO
Foods Limited, is a member of the
APEC Business Advisory Council,
acts as an advisor to venture
capital firm Movac and chairs the
Fonterra Sustainability Panel.
COMMITTEES
• Environmental and Social
Sustainability Committee (Chair)
• People and Remuneration
Committee
• Health, Safety and Wellbeing
Committee
OTHER DIRECTORSHIPS
• Wellington Regional Stadium
Trust (Chair)
• Moana NZ (Chair)
• Sealord Group Limited
• ANZCO Foods Limited
• Advisory Board Member
- Movac
• Limited Partner, Movac Fund
5 LP
• New Zealand APEC Business
Advisory Council (Member)
• Fonterra Sustainability
Panel (Chair)
Jeremy O’Brien BCom (Hons)
Future Director
Jeremy is a highly experienced
senior executive who excels in
strategy, sales and marketing, with
significant business experience
across a number of industries
ranging from aviation, financial
services, telecommunications,
food and beverage and media.
He holds the position of General
Manager, Short Haul Airline
at Air New Zealand, where he
is responsible for commercial
and customer delivery across
Air New Zealand’s Tasman and
Pacific Islands network. Prior to
this Jeremy held the position
of General Manager, Brand and
Marketing where he led the group
brand and marketing division for
Air New Zealand comprising global
brand strategy, marketing strategy,
digital marketing, retail marketing,
loyalty marketing, social media,
tourism, regional affairs, cultural
affairs, customer research and in-
house media planning and strategy.
He completed an Accelerated
Development Programme at
the London Business School in
2011 and has a BCom (Hons) in
Marketing from the University of
Otago.
Jeremy joined The Warehouse
Group as a Future Director in April
2023.
Antony (Tony) Balfour BCom
Independent Non-Executive Director
Tony has extensive global retail
and eCommerce experience with
a strong track record in a diverse
range of industries. Most recently,
he was General Manager (Markets)
for Icebreaker Clothing, with
responsibility for the company’s
global business units in New
Zealand, Australia, USA, Canada,
Europe and Asia as well as the
development of the company’s
rapidly growing eCommerce and
retail business units. His prior
experience includes senior roles in
Monster.com and Seek.com, both
successful online recruitment sites,
and nine years in global senior
roles with Nike, including General
Manager of Asia Pacific. Tony’s
governance career has included
independent director roles at Silver
Fern Farms, Methven Limited,
Les Mills International and RealNZ.
COMMITTEES
• People and Remuneration
Committee (Chair)
• Corporate Governance and
Nominations Committee
• Health, Safety and Wellbeing
Committee
• Environmental and Social
Sustainability Committee
OTHER DIRECTORSHIPS
• Les Mills International Limited
• RealNZ Limited
• Pioneer Energy Limited
• Bluelab Limited
• Ravensdown Ventures Limited
FUTURE DIRECTOR
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20239293Our Board
The Leadership Squad leverages a 'collective leadership' model, fostering an environment
where cross-functional teams work collaboratively towards achieving a mission. This model
focuses on working together to lead the business in an ever-changing environment, with
most areas of our business having two Leadership Squad co-sponsors.
LEADERSHIP
SQUAD
Nick Grayston
Group Chief Executive Officer
Nick was appointed Chief Executive of the Group
in December 2015. His role focuses on building a
profitable and sustainable business and leading
a high performing team, putting our customers at
the heart of everything that we do. Nick has led
the business through a significant transformational
programme to modernise the Company and
implement the infrastructure necessary to build
a customer-centric ecosystem and make the
company future fit.
As the leader of the Group, Nick works with the
Board and the Leadership Squad to set the business
strategy and drive our core values of think customer,
do good and own it, ensuring that sustainability
is woven into our thinking and planning and The
Warehouse Group is here for good.
Jonathan Oram
Group Chief Financial Officer
Jonathan was appointed Group Chief
Financial Officer in March 2018. He leads
the finance, legal, compliance and risk, and
property functions and co-sponsors the
Business Solutions tribe. Jonathan resigned
from the role of Chief Financial Officer in
July and will leave the business in October.
Tania Benyon
Chief Product Officer
Tania is responsible for sourcing,
merchandise and supply chain, building the
best assortment of products for customers
across our brands and ensuring they are
delivered in the most efficient and timely
fashion. She co-sponsors the Source to
Customer Integrated Supply Chain, Supply
Chain Execution, Nourish and Wellbeing,
Technology, Dress My Family and Sports
and Adventure tribes.
Ian Carter
Chief Store Operations Officer
Ian is responsible for developing and
implementing store strategies that deliver
great in-store experiences for our customers
and team while maximising store sales and
profitability. He co-sponsors the Group
Store Sales, Group Business Operations,
and Nourish and Business Solutions tribes.
Edwin Gear
Chief Information Officer
Edwin is responsible for leading the
information services team, ensuring systems
security and business continuity while
leading technology transformation. He
co-sponsors the Platforms, Productivity and
Development, Group Business Operations,
Source to Customer Integrated Supply
Chain and Supply Chain Execution tribes.
Sarah Kearney
Chief Digital Officer
Sarah was appointed as our Chief Digital
Officer in October 2021. She is responsible
for our customer platforms, e-commerce
channels and loyalty. Sarah co-sponsors
that Group Online Sales, Customer
Engagement, Platforms, Productivity and
Development and Better Living tribes.
Richard Parker
Chief Human Resources Officer
Richard is responsible for attracting and
retaining world-class retail talent and for
ensuring that the Group is the best place
to work in New Zealand for all of our team
members. He co-sponsors the Human
Resources, Agile COE and Executive
Support functions.
Anna Shipley
Chief Corporate Affairs Officer
Anna leads our Corporate Affairs function
and strategic approach, shaping and
sharing the stories that matter most to
our business and team, as well as with
Kiwis across the country. She sponsors the
Corporate Affairs function and co-sponsors
the Better Living tribe, Business Sales and
Partnerships Chapter, and the Customer
Care Chapter.
Jonathan Waecker
Chief Customer and Sales Officer
Jonathan is responsible for maximising
customer experiences and sales within the
Group’s brands, and for attracting, engaging
and retaining customers through marketing,
data and insights, customer experience,
store operations and eCommerce
activities, leading brand strategy, engaging
customers and driving sales across the
Group’s portfolio of brands. He also co-
sponsors the Group Store Sales, Customer
Engagement, and Technology tribes as well
as the Sustainability and Corporate Affairs
functions.
Simon West
Chief Commercial Officer
Simon focuses on driving revenue and
profitability across the Group, working to
optimise margin and revenue management
performance and ensuring it is consistent and
connected across our brands. He co-sponsors
the Sports and Adventure, Dress My Family
and Group Online Sales tribes.
Our Leadership Squad sets business strategy and empowers
our teams to deliver for our customers.
Left to right:
Rear: Edwin Gear, Richard Parker,
Nick Grayston, Ian Carter, Anna Shipley.
Front: Jonathan Waecker, Jonathan Oram,
Sarah Kearney, Tania Benyon, Simon West.
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20239495Leadership Squad
This governance statement was approved by the Board on 27 September 2023 and
is current as at that date.
Principle 1 – ETHICAL STANDARDS
“Directors should set high standards of ethical behaviour, model this behaviour and
hold management accountable for these standards being followed throughout the
organisation.”
The Company is committed to fostering the highest standards of ethical behaviour
and good conduct. We believe this is at the heart of having a reputation as a
trusted and respected company that promotes honesty, integrity and ethical
conduct across the organisation in decision-making and day-to-day behaviour.
Code of Ethics
The Company’s Code of Ethics sets out the standards of conduct expected of
everyone working at The Warehouse Group, including Directors, team members,
contractors and any other person engaged by the Company. Anchored in the
Company’s vision of “Helping Kiwis Live Better Every Day” and purpose “to make
sustainable living easy and affordable for everyone”, the Code of Ethics sets out
the principles that guide decision-making and sets expectations of the conduct
that is consistent with the Company’s values and behaviours, business goals and
legal obligations. An introduction to the Code of Ethics forms part of the induction
and training process of new employees.
The Company has an external hotline and web address (managed by an
independent third party), which any employee can contact confidentially if they
wish to report any misconduct or other concerning behaviour at The Warehouse
Group, including breaches of the Code of Ethics.
The Code of Ethics also outlines the potential consequences of, and internal
reporting procedures for, any breaches. Sanctions for breaches may include serious
disciplinary action, removal from office and dismissal, to the extent permitted by
law and as appropriate given the specific circumstances.
The Code of Ethics is available in the Corporate Governance section of the
Company's website.
Financial Products Trading Policy
The Company is committed to transparency and fairness in dealing with all its
stakeholders and to ensuring adherence to all applicable laws and regulations.
The Financial Products Trading Policy governs trading in the Company’s securities
by Directors, team members and other associated persons. The policy and timing
of black-out periods is set out in the Financial Products Trading Policy, which is
available in the Corporate Governance section of our website.
Principle 2 – BOARD COMPOSITION AND
PERFORMANCE
“To ensure an effective board, there should be a balance of independence, skills,
knowledge, experience and perspectives.”
Responsibilities of the Board
The central role of the Board is to set the strategic direction of the Company, to
select and appoint the Company’s Group Chief Executive Officer (CEO) and to
oversee the Company’s management and business activities, with the primary
objective to create and continue to build sustainable value for shareholders. This
requires consideration of and regular engagement with all stakeholders that are
critical to our success, including shareholders, employees, customers, suppliers and
communities, as determined by the Company and the Board.
The Board Charter, which is available in the Corporate Governance section of the
Company's website, sets out how the Board will achieve its purpose. The Charter
is reviewed at least every two years and it was last reviewed and approved in
September 2022. The Board’s responsibilities, as described in the Charter, are set
out in the adjacent table.
Management and administration of the Company is undertaken by the Group CEO,
who is assisted by the Leadership Squad, in accordance with the strategy, plans
and delegations approved by the Board. The Board has implemented appropriate
procedures to enable Management to undertake its delegated duties and for
performance to be assessed. More information can be found in the Remuneration
section on page 99.
Strategy and
Planning
• Set strategic direction and appropriate operating
frameworks;
• Monitor Management’s performance within those
frameworks;
People Resources• Ensure that the Board is and remains appropriately
skilled to meet the changing needs of the Company;
• Ensure there are adequate resources available to meet
the Company’s objectives;
• Appoint and remove the Group CEO and oversee
succession plans for the Leadership Squad;
• Set criteria for, and evaluate the performance of, the
Group CEO and approve their remuneration;
• Annually review, approve and adopt the Diversity and
Inclusion Policy and diversity objectives, and measure
achievement against the objectives;
Financial
Performance
and Risk
• Approve and monitor financial reporting and capital
management including the payment of dividends;
• Monitor the financial solvency of the Company;
• Subject to shareholder approval being granted, approve
the appointment and retention of the external auditor;
• Ensure that effective risk management procedures are
in place and are being used;
Health and Safety• Ensure, so far is reasonably practicable, a safe
and healthy working environment is provided and
maintained for all employees, customers, contractors
and visitors; and
Ethical Behaviour
and Corporate
Governance
• Promote and authorise ethical and responsible
decision-making by the Company;
• Ensure the Company has appropriate corporate
governance structures in place including standards of
ethical behaviour;
• Approve timely and balanced communication to
shareholders.
Board responsibilities
97The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 202396Governance Report
The Board
The Board comprises eight Directors: Joan Withers (Chair), Tony Balfour, Dean
Hamilton, John Journee, Caroline Rainsford, Julia Raue, Rachel Taulelei and
Robbie Tindall. Director profiles are available on pages 92 and 93.
Chair
Joan Withers is the chair of The Warehouse Group Board. She was first
appointed in 2016, and she is an independent, non-executive director whose
responsibilities include:
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
• Providing leadership to the board and to the company;
• Ensuring the efficient organisation and conduct of the Board;
• Monitoring board performance annually;
• Facilitating board discussions to ensure core issues facing the company
are addressed;
• Briefing all Directors in relation to issues arising at board meetings;
• Facilitating the effective contribution and ongoing development of all
Directors;
• Promoting consultative and respectful relations between board
members and between the board and Management; and
• Chairing Board and shareholder meetings.
The Warehouse Group Board Charter states that the Board Chair must not
also be the Company’s Chief Executive Officer.
Director Appointments
Procedures for the appointment and removal of Directors are governed
by the Company’s Constitution and the NZX Listing Rules. The Corporate
Governance and Nominations Committee is delegated responsibility for
identifying and nominating, for the approval of the Board, candidates to fill
Board vacancies as and when they arise. In doing so the Committee will seek
to identify the necessary and desirable competencies which will ensure that
any candidate it puts forward will enable the Board to:
• Fulfil its responsibilities;
• Represent a variety of skills, expertise and experience (including
commercial and/or industry experience and diversity of background and
thought); and
• Competently address accounting, finance and legal matters.
The terms and conditions of appointment are set out in a letter of appointment
that details the Director’s duties, term of appointment (subject to shareholder
approval), expectations of the role and remuneration. A copy of the standard
letter is available in the Corporate Governance section of the Company’s
website.
The Company indemnifies and provides insurance to Directors in accordance
with the Companies Act 1993, for certain claims that may be brought against
them as directors.
Relevant Board Skills to execute Group Strategy
Joan
Withers
John
Journee
Robbie
Tindall
Julia
Raue
Tony
Balfour
Dean
Hamilton
Rachel
Taulelei
Caroline
Rainsford
Industry specific
Operational experience in the retail industry
Brand, marketing and customer experience
Integrated retail experience
Digital and technology experience
Direct sourcing experience
Logistics experience
Specific to Group strategy
Development of a high-performance culture
Senior leadership of change management at scale
Transformation and business disruption experience
Innovation and entrepreneurism
Government relations
Union relations
Environment and Corporate Social Responsibility experience
Subject-matter expertise
Development and execution of business strategy
Governance experience
Large company leadership experience
Finance Accounting expertise
Audit committee/risk management experience
Regulatory knowledge and experience
Health and safety experience
HR/Learning and development experience
Financial markets experience
Community and iwi relationships
Shareholder and investor relations experience
Primary skills
Secondary skills
Director Induction and Development
When appointed to the Board, all new directors undergo a detailed
induction programme to familiarise them with the Company’s businesses
and strategy.
Ongoing training includes briefings by senior management and guest
speakers on relevant industry and competitive issues, occasional overseas
study tours and site visits.
Director Independence and Conflicts
The factors that the Board considers when determining the independence
of a Director, including the requirements of the NZX Listing Rules, are set
out in full in the Board Charter. The Board assesses the independence of
each Director on their appointment and at least annually thereafter.
Of the Board’s eight Directors, Joan Withers (Chair), Tony Balfour, Dean
Hamilton, John Journee, Caroline Rainsford, Julia Raue and Rachel Taulelei
are considered to be independent non-executive directors. The Board
acknowledges the length of tenure as directors of Tony Balfour and John
Journee, 11 years and 10 years, respectively. The Board considers that Tony
and John each continue to bring an independent view to all discussions
relating to the Company. In addition, new Directors were appointed in each
of 2020, 2021 and 2022, and the Board considers that the retention of the
institutional knowledge held by Tony and John remains valuable to the
Board. Robbie Tindall is not considered to be independent, by virtue of his
association with various shareholdings in the Company.
The Board is conscious of its obligation to ensure that Directors avoid conflicts
of interest between their duty to the Company and their own interests. Where
potential conflicts of interest arise then the Director must disclose their interest.
Directors and team members are required to minimise any potential conflicts, in
accordance with the Company’s Code of Ethics.
Board Structure, Skills and Composition
The Board comprises Directors with a mix of qualifications, skills and experience
appropriate to the Company’s existing operations and strategic direction. A
comprehensive matrix of director skills is set out below, and qualifications and
experience of individual directors are detailed on pages 92 and 93.
Future Directors Programme
Continuing the Company’s commitment to supporting the next generation
of governance talent in New Zealand as part of the Future Directors initiative
administered by the New Zealand Institute of Directors, the Board appointed
Jeremy O’Brien as a Future Director in April 2023.
Takeover Protocols
The Company has takeover protocols in place that meet the requirements
of the NZX Code.
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 20239899Governance Report
Name of DirectorOriginally AppointedLast Reappointed/Elected
Joan Withers23 September 201625 November 2022
Julia Raue23 September 201625 November 2022
Antony (Tony) Balfour15 October 201226 November 2021
John Journee17 October 201326 November 2021
Dean Hamilton20 April 202027 November 2020
Robert (Robbie) Tindall
27 November 202027 November 202027 November 202027 November 2020
Rachel Taulelei12 February 2021
26 November 202126 November 2021
Caroline Rainsford30 August 2022
25 November 202225 November 2022
Board Evaluation
The Chair, with the assistance of appropriate external advisors, regularly
assesses the performance of individual directors, while directors also assess the
collective performance of the Board and the performance of the Chair. Formal,
external facilitated evaluations are conducted regularly, with one undertaken in
2023.
Board Tenure
The Constitution provides that the minimum size of the Board shall not at
any time be fewer than five and the Board has fixed the maximum number of
Directors to be 10. Each year, any director who is required by the NZX Listing
Rules or the Company’s Constitution to retire will retire from office and may offer
themselves for re-election at the Annual Shareholders’ Meeting.
The Board does not believe that any Director has served on the Board for a
period which could, or could reasonably be perceived to, materially interfere
with the Director’s ability to act in the best interests of the Company. New
Directors were appointed to the Board in 2020, 2021 and 2022, and the Board
considers that it has an appropriate balance of tenure.
0-3 years
4-6 years
7+ years
Director Tenure
COMMITTEEROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIESMEMBERSHIPMEETINGS
People and
Remuneration
Committee
Review and make recommendations in relation to the human
resources strategy, the Company’s remuneration policies
and practices, and the remuneration and performance of the
Group Chief Executive Officer.
Comprised a majority of non-executive, independent
directors.
Current members:
• Tony Balfour (Chair)
• Joan Withers
• Robbie Tindall
• Rachel Taulelei
• Caroline Rainsford
At least twice a year
Corporate
Governance and
Nominations
Committee
Ensure a high level of corporate governance through
continuous monitoring of international corporate governance
best practice as promulgated by the relevant authoritative
bodies. Ensure that the Board is populated with an
appropriate mix of skills and experience among it's members,
who collectively provides the diversity of thought and
judgement required.
Comprised a majority of independent directors.
Current members:
• Joan Withers (Chair)
• Tony Balfour
• Dean Hamilton
• Robbie Tindall
At least once a year
Disclosure
Committee
Support the Company in meeting its disclosure obligations as
set out in the NZX Listing Rules, the Companies Act 1993 and
any other applicable regulations.
Comprised the Board Chair, Chair of the Audit and
Risk Committee, Group Chief Executive Officer, Chief
Financial Officer, Disclosure Officer and any other
director appointed by the Board as a member.
Current members:
• Dean Hamilton (Chair)
• Joan Withers
• Robbie Tindall
• Group CEO, CFO and Company Secretary
Held as required
Audit and Risk
Committee
Assist the Board to fulfil its risk and audit responsibilities.Comprised at least three independent directors. The
Chair will be independent and may not be the Chair of
the Company.
Current members:
• Dean Hamilton (Chair)
• Joan Withers
• John Journee
• Julia Raue
At least three times
each year
Health, Safety
and Wellbeing
Committee
Assist the Board to govern health, safety and wellbeing.Comprised all Directors.
Chair: Julia Raue
At the discretion of
the Committee Chair
Environmental
and Social
Sustainability
Committee
Assist the Board to govern the Company’s environmental,
social and sustainability responsibilities.
Comprised a majority of independent directors and the
Group Chief Executive Officer.
Current members:
• Rachel Taulelei (Chair)
• Tony Balfour
• Julia Raue
• John Journee
• Joan Withers
• Group CEO
At least four times
each year
Principle 3 - BOARD COMMITTEES
“The Board should use committees where this will enhance its effectiveness
in key areas, while still retaining Board responsibility.”
The Board has established committees that focus on particular areas of
the Board’s responsibilities and together ensure the efficient performance
of the Board, and the achievement of corporate governance outcomes.
The committees report to the Board on all material matters and issues
requiring Board decisions. From time to time, the Board may create ad hoc
committees to examine specific issues on its behalf. The current committee
structure is set out in the table below.
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
Board
Audit
and Risk
Committee
People and
Remuneration
Committee
Corporate
Governance and
Nomination
Committee
Health, Safety
and Wellbeing
Committee
Disclosure
Committee
Environmental
and Social
Sustainability
Committee
Number of Meetings
13643444
Joan Withers
13643444
Tony Balfour
124331
1
3
John Journee
13532
1
4
Dean Hamilton
136344
Caroline Rainsford
2
1323
2
1
1
1
1
Julia Raue
12643
Rachel Taulelei
13421
1
4
Robbie Tindall
134344
1
Non-committee member in attendance
2
Appointed to the Board on 30 August 2022 and the People and Remuneration Committee in November 2022.
BOARD MEETINGS AND ATTENDANCE
The table below outlines the number of meetings of the Board and Board committees during the year ended 30 July 2023 and director attendance at these meetings
Principle 4 – REPORTING AND DISCLOSURE
“The Board should demand integrity in financial and non-financial reporting
and in the timeliness and balance of corporate disclosures.”
The Board is committed to providing full and timely financial and non-
financial information that is accurate, balanced, meaningful and consistent.
As a listed company, keeping the market informed is a key component to
ensuring that its securities are valued fairly.
Market Disclosure Policy
The Board has a Market Disclosure Policy that describes the processes
designed to ensure that the Company meets its reporting and disclosure
objectives and all disclosure obligations under the NZX Listing Rules.
To assist the Company with its Market Disclosure Policy, the Board has
appointed a Disclosure Committee. The Committee is responsible for making
decisions on what should be disclosed publicly under the Market Disclosure
Policy. The Company Secretary is the Disclosure Officer of the Company and
has responsibility for ensuring compliance with the continuous disclosure
requirements and overseeing and co-ordinating disclosure to the market.
Publication of Key Governance Documents
The Company publishes its Code of Ethics, Board and Committee Charters,
Director Letter of Appointment and key Company policies in the Corporate
Governance section of its website, thewarehousegroup.co.nz.
Financial Reporting
The Audit and Risk Committee oversees the quality and integrity of external
financial reporting including the accuracy, completeness and timeliness
of financial statements and is committed to providing balanced, clear and
objective financial reporting.
It reviews half-yearly and annual financial statements and makes
recommendations to the Board concerning accounting policies, areas of
judgement, compliance with accounting standards, stock exchange and
legal requirements, and the results of the external and internal audit.
Management accountability for the integrity of the Company’s financial
reporting is reinforced by certification from the Group CEO and the Group
CFO. The Group CEO and CFO have provided the Board with written
confirmation that the Company’s financial report presents a true and fair
view, in all material respects, of the Company’s financial position for the year
ended 30 July 2023, and that operational results are in accordance with
relevant accounting standards.
Non-financial Reporting
Communities and the environment are at the heart of the Company’s
culture. The Company reports annually its financial and non-financial
contribution to the community, as well as audited figures on its
greenhouse gas emissions. The Company’s philosophy, achievements,
and material environmental, economic and social risks are outlined in its
Integrated Report.
Use of Information by Directors
During the financial year, there were no notices from Directors of the
Company, or its subsidiary companies, requesting to disclose or use
Company information received in their capacities as Directors of the
Company or its subsidiary companies which would not otherwise have been
available to them.
Principle 5 – REMUNERATION
“The remuneration of directors and executives should be transparent, fair and
reasonable.”
The Company’s remuneration philosophy, policy and details regarding Director and
executive remuneration (including remuneration components and performance
criteria) are discussed on the following pages.
Group Remuneration Philosophy
The Group’s Remuneration Policy supports its objective to attract, retain and
motivate high-calibre diverse team members to achieve the Company’s business
objectives and create shareholder value.
The Group’s Remuneration Policy is guided by the principles that remuneration
practice should:
• Be clearly aligned with the Group’s vision, values and corporate strategy;
• Support the attraction, retention and engagement of team members;
• Appropriately reflect market practice and conditions;
• Recognise individual performance and competency; and
• Recognise team and company performance and the creation of shareholder value.
Leadership Squad Remuneration
The Chief Executive Officer and direct reports to the Chief Executive Officer
(Leadership Squad or LS) have their remuneration reviewed annually by the
People and Remuneration Committee. From time to time third-party remuneration
consultants are also used to benchmark total remuneration packages of the LS
against a peer group of companies. The People and Remuneration Committee
recommends to the Board for approval any proposed changes. The remuneration of
the LS is made up of the following components:
• Fixed annual base salary;
• Short-term incentives based on the Group’s financial targets and individual
performance targets; and
• Long-term incentives based on Total Shareholder Return with cost of equity
plus 1% being used as the performance measure over a three-year period.
The individual objectives of each LS member that impact their fixed base salary
and short-term incentives are tied to a variety of matters, including impact on
team members and customers. These metrics are assessed using measures such as
eNPS and perfect shopping trip scores. LS members are also eligible to receive an
employer KiwiSaver contribution of up to a maximum of 3% of gross taxable earnings
if they belong to the KiwiSaver scheme.
Short-Term Incentives
The Group’s short-term incentive scheme (STI) for the Leadership Squad is designed
to link at-risk incentive payments to the achievement of the Group’s desired financial
outcomes and to recognise participants’ individual contribution to the Group's
success. The targets are reviewed and set each year. In FY23, Group Earnings
before interest and taxes (EBIT) was set as the financial measure, to ensure that the
company linked its planned top-line growth to incentive payments. The financial
component was weighted at a total of 70% of the total on-target incentive. For the
individual component, each participant was set a number of objectives and key
results, and the individual performance was weighted at a total of 30% of the total
on-target incentive. The STI on-target dollar value for each LS participant ranges
from 40% to 50% of base salary. The maximum payment under the STI scheme is
reviewed and set each year and this year was 120% of the on-target dollar value.
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 2023100101Governance Report
Board/Committee NamePositionFees (Per Annum)
Board of Directors
Chair
$182,600
1
Member $87,000
Audit and Risk Committee
Chair $27,500
Member $10,000
People and Remuneration Committee
Chair $25,000
Member $6,600
Health, Safety and Wellbeing Committee
Chair $20,000
Member -
Environmental and Social Sustainability Committee
Chair$20,000
Member $6,600
Corporate Governance and Nomination Committee
Chair -
Member -
Disclosure Committee
Chair -
Member -
1
Includes attendances
at committee meetings
The current Directors’ fee pool limit is $990,000, which was approved by the shareholders at the 26 November 2021 Annual Shareholders' Meeting. Fees are
paid for Board and committee roles as indicated below. Directors are reimbursed for reasonable travel and other costs associated with fulfilling their role. The
Chair does not receive additional fees for membership of Board committees.
DIRECTOR REMUNERATION FY23
Director Remuneration
Name of Director
Board
Fees
1
Audit
and Risk
Committee
1
People and
Remuneration
Committee
1
Corporate
Governance
and Nominations
Committee
Disclosure
Committee
Health, Safety
and Wellbeing
Committee
1
Environmental
and Social
Sustainability
Committee
5
Shares
and Other
Payments
or Benefits
Total
Individual
Remuneration
Joan Withers
(Chair)
$182,600
(Chair)
-
(member)
-
(member)
-
(Chair)
-
(member)
-
(member)
-
(member)
- $182,600
Tony Balfour $87,000 -
$25,000
(Chair)
-
(member)
-
-
(member)
$6,600
(member)
- $118,600
John Journee
1
$87,000
$10,000
(member)
--
-
(member)
$6,600
(member)
- $103,600
Dean Hamilton
2
$87,000
$27,500
(Chair)
-
(member)
-
(Chair)
-
(member)
-- $114,500
Caroline
Rainsford
3
$80,117
$4,400
(member)
- -
-
(member)
- $84,517
Julia Raue $87,000
$10,000
(member)
--
$20,000
(Chair)
1
$6,600
(member)
-$123,600
Rachel Taulelei $87,000
$6,600
(member)
- -
-
(member)
$20,000
(Chair)
-$113,600
Robbie Tindall
4
$87,000 -
$6,600
(member)
-
(member)
-
(member)
-
(member)
--$93,600
1
John Journee received an additional fee of $6,785 as a director of subsidiary company TheMarket.com Limited from 1 August 2022 to 1 March 2023.
2
Dean Hamilton received an additional fee of $6,785 as a director of subsidiary company TheMarket.com Limited from 1 August 2022 to 1 March 2023.
3
Caroline Rainsford was appointed as a Director on 30 August 2022 and a member of the People and Remuneration Committee in November 2022.
4
Robbie Tindall received an additional fee of $6,785 as a director of subsidiary company TheMarket.com Limited from 1 August 2022 to 1 March 2023.
The fees paid to non-executive directors for services in their capacity as Directors during the year ended 30 July 2023, totalling $934,617, were paid as set out below.
Long-Term Incentives
Members of the Leadership Squad are eligible to participate in the Group’s
long-term incentive (LTI) scheme. The objectives of the LTI scheme are to:
• Provide an award to eligible LS members who are considered to be key
to the future success of the Group as an incentive in order to retain the
services of those eligible LS members in the future;
• Provide an award to eligible LS members as a retention strategy;
• Ensure the long-term incentives of the eligible LS members are more
closely aligned with Shareholder outcomes; and
• Recognise and reward the future performance of eligible LS members
and their contribution to the future success of the Group by providing
an award to those eligible LS members.
The current scheme is a cash-settled scheme and the performance target
is absolute TSR against the Group’s cost of equity plus 1% over a three-year
performance period. The LTI on-target dollar value for each LS participant is 40%
of base salary and the Chief Executive Officer’s is 50% of base salary. Payment
under the scheme is capped and that cap is reviewed each year. The current cap
is 150% of the on-target dollar value. The Group’s long-term incentive scheme
has clawback provisions enabling the Group to clawback awards that have
vested in the event of certain types of activity including fraud, dishonesty, and
material financial misstatements.
DIRECTORS' REMUNERATION
DescriptionPerformance Measures
Percentage
Achieved
Short-Term Incentive
(STI)
Set at 50% of base salary for on target performance.
Combination of financial and non-financial performance
measures.
Financial measures: 70% weighting:
The financial measures are based on achieving Group EBIT
budget (excluding STI).
0%
For this to be payable, the Group must firstly achieve a
gate opener of 90% of the Adjusted NPAT budget and
a minimum level of individual performance must be
achieved.
Individual measures 30% weighting:
Individual goals relate to delivery of strategic priorities, delivering
core business drivers and building capabilities.
0%
Long-Term Incentive
(LTI) for the 3 years
FY20-FY22.
Cash based scheme. Potential 50% of base salary for
on target performance.
100% weighting based on the three-year Group Adjusted
NPAT calculated as a percentage of the budgeted Group
Adjusted NPAT. 50% of potential paid if 95% or greater
of target achieved, increasing to a maximum of 150% for
achievement of 125% and above.
128%
Base PackagePay for Performance
Salary
Ta xab l e
BenefitsSubtotalSTILTISubtotal
Total
Remuneration
Nick Grayston1,588811,6691899351,1242,793
YearGroup CEOTotal Earnings Paid BaseTaxable BenefitsSTISTI as % of MaximumLTI
2023Nick Grayston2,7931,5888118920%935
2022Nick Grayston3,5681,51310387797%1,075
2021Nick Grayston2,3781,46169--848
2020Nick Grayston2,8621,46197--1,304
2019Nick Grayston1,9721,4356647148%-
REMUNERATION REPORT
1. CEO remuneration 2023 ($ 000s)
2. 5 year summary of CEO remuneration ($ 000s)
3. Breakdown of CEO pay for performance (2023)
Explanation of the above items
1. The 2023 Long Term Incentive (LTI) value above relates to the FY20 – FY22 LTI scheme but was paid in FY23. The performance targets for
the FY21-FY23 LTI and FY23 STI schemes were not achieved and accordingly no payments will be paid in FY24 under either scheme.
2. The STI payment is a discretionary STI payment and the first of two discretionary STI payments as the FY22 STI target was not achieved.
The second deferred discretionary STI payment of $567,183 will be paid in FY24.
3. The actual remuneration paid includes holiday pay paid as per New Zealand legislation.
4. Taxable benefits are the value of employer KiwiSaver contributions.
5. Five year summary
of Total Shareholder
Return performance
4. CEO retention incentive arrangement
In FY23 the Group awarded the CEO 1.6 million share rights in The Warehouse Group Limited as part of a long-term retention incentive arrangement. For each
share right, the CEO is eligible to be issued or transferred, for nil cash consideration and before tax, one fully paid ordinary share on 1 October 2026 (together
with dividend equivalents).
The issuing or transferring of the ordinary shares is subject to the CEO remaining employed by the Group through to 1 October 2026, unless otherwise agreed
with the Board, meeting certain performance criteria determined by the Board, and subject to the CEO developing potential internal successors by August
2024 that are approved by the Chair.
-40%
-20%
0%
20%
40%
60%
80%
20.2%
74.9%
-6.1%
2.5%
-41.5%
FY19FY21FY22
FY23
FY20
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 2023102103Governance Report
Year Invited% of SalarySettlementPerformance PeriodMeasure
FY2050%Cash
August 2019 to July
2022
Three-year Group Adjusted NPAT achieved calculated as a percentage of the budgeted Group
Adjusted NPAT.
FY2150%Cash
August 2020 to July
2023
Absolute TSR against the Company’s cost of equity plus 1% over a three-year performance
period
FY2250%Cash/Shares
August 2021 to July
2024
Absolute TSR against the Company’s cost of equity plus 1% over a three-year performance
period
FY2350%Cash
August 2022 to July
2025
Absolute TSR against the Company’s cost of equity plus 1% over a three-year performance
period
FY2450%Cash
August 2023 to July
2026
Absolute TSR against the Company’s cost of equity plus 1% over a three-year performance
period
DescriptionPerformance Measures
1. TSR MethodologyTotal Shareholder Return has been calculated as the movement in the share price during the period plus any dividends paid.
2. Board DiscretionThe Board of Directors exercised discretion with regard to the CEO’s FY22 STI as set out in the notes in section 2 above.
3. OmissionsNo information has been omitted relating to CEO remuneration.
4. Any Other ItemsThere are no other items payable to the CEO that have not been disclosed.
5. BenefitsThere are no benefits attributable to the CEO due to any loans made.
6. WithholdingsNo part of the CEO remuneration has been withheld for any purpose.
7. Related PartiesNo related parties are involved with the CEO remuneration.
Explanation: Base salary remains at $1.588 million for the financial year. STI is 50% of base salary for on-target performance and the maximum payment is
120% of the STI target dollar value. The gate for payment is 90% of 2024 Group Adjusted NPAT budget. The STI is split: 70% based on Group financial results
and 30% individual performance against goals. LTI is 50% of base salary, settled in cash, and is payable at the end of the three-year performance period if The
Warehouse Group's target of absolute TSR against the Company’s cost of equity plus 1% is achieved for the three-year period.
TSR measure ensures Management's long-term incentives (LTIs) are more closely aligned to shareholder outcomes. The maximum payment under the FY22
to FY24 LTI schemes is 150% of the LTI target dollar amount.
The ratio of CEO total remuneration to the median The Warehouse Group employee total remuneration paid in FY23 is 57:1. This ratio reflects the fact that
approximately 80% of The Warehouse Group’s 11,000 team members are employed in its stores and distribution centres and are paid retail market rates for
those roles.
The CEO's total remuneration decreased by 22% while the median employee remuneration increased 4% in FY23, resulting in a compensation ratio of -6:1,
being the ratio of percentage decrease in CEO total compensation to the increase in median total compensation for all employees.
REMUNERATION REPORT (CONTINUED)
6. Potential CEO remuneration (2024)
BASEON TARGETAT MAXIMUM
4000
3000
3500
1000
1500
500
2000
2500
0
100%
LTI
STI
BASE
Base Package 2024Pay for Performance at Target 2024
$ 000Salary
Taxable
BenefitsSubtotalSTILTISubtotalTotal Remuneration
Nick Grayston1,588481,6367947941,5883,224
7. Scheme investments awarded to CEO
8. Additional disclosures
50%
25%
25%
25%
32%
43%
Remuneration
($ 000)
Number of
Team Members
100 - 110132
110 - 120103
120 - 130100
130 - 14081
140 - 15081
150 - 16050
160 - 17024
170 - 18047
180 - 19041
190 - 20016
200 - 21013
210 - 22019
220 - 23013
230 - 2406
240 - 2508
250 - 2605
Remuneration
($ 000)
Number of
Team Members
260 - 2704
270 - 2806
280 - 2906
290 - 3001
300 - 3104
310 - 3204
320 - 3301
330 - 3407
340 - 3501
350 - 3601
360 - 3702
370 - 3802
390 - 4003
400 - 410
1
410 - 4203
420 - 4301
Remuneration
($ 000)
Number of
Team Members
430 - 4401
440 - 4501
590 - 6001
620 - 6301
670 - 6801
680 - 6901
730 - 7401
770 - 7801
890 - 9001
1,030 - 1,0401
1,070 - 1,0801
1,100 - 1,1101
1,120 - 1,1301
2,790 - 2,8001
TEAM MEMBERS’ REMUNERATION
Grouped below are the number of team members or former team members, not being Directors or former Directors, who received remuneration and other
benefits valued at or exceeding $100,000 during the period 1 August 2022 to 30 July 2023.
Remuneration includes redundancy payments and termination payments made during the year to team members whose remuneration would not
otherwise have been included in the table reported below.
Principle 6 – RISK MANAGEMENT
“Directors should have a sound understanding of the material risks faced by
the issuer and how to manage them. The Board should regularly verify that
the issuer has appropriate processes that identify and manage potential and
material risks.”
Risk Management Framework
Risk is the chance of something happening that will have an impact on
business objectives. Having established an acceptable risk tolerance, the
Company’s approach is to identify, analyse, evaluate and appropriately
manage risk in the business.
Material Risks Identified
Information on material risks the Company faces and how they are managed is
set out on page 30.
Risk Management Roles and Responsibilities
The Board is responsible for reviewing and approving the Company’s risk
management strategy. The Board delegates day-to-day management of risk to
the Group CEO, who may further delegate such responsibilities to executive
and other officers. Inherent in this delegation is the belief that responsibility
for managing risks in the business is the domain of the business unit.
Risk Monitoring and Evaluation
While the Board is ultimately responsible for the risk management of the
Company, the Audit and Risk Committee reviews the reports of Management
and the external and internal auditors on the effectiveness of systems
for internal control, financial reporting and risk management. To assist in
discharging this responsibility, the Board has in place a number of strategies
designed to safeguard the Company’s assets and interests and ensure the
integrity of reporting. These reports include quarterly reviews of store audit
results and quarterly reports on internal audit findings.
Health and Safety
The Company’s approach and process on health and safety matters are set
out on pages 46 and 47.
Principle 7 – AUDITORS
“The Board should ensure the quality and independence of the external
audit process.”
Approach to Audit Governance
The independence of the external auditor is of particular importance
to shareholders and the Board. The Audit and Risk Committee
is responsible for overseeing the external audit of the Company.
Accordingly, it monitors developments in the areas of audit to ensure its
policies and practices are consistent with best practice in these areas.
The Board has adopted a policy on audit independence, the key
elements of which are:
• The external auditor must remain independent of the Company at
all times and must comply with all relevant ethical requirements and
professional standards regarding independence;
• The external auditor must monitor its independence and annually
report to the Board that it has remained independent;
• The audit firm is permitted to provide certain non-audit services, set
out in the Audit and Risk Committee Charter, that are not considered
to be in conflict with the preservation of the independence of the
auditor; and
• The Audit and Risk Committee must approve all non-audit work
assignments that are awarded to an external auditor, and the value of
non-audit work must be reported at every Board meeting.
Engagement of the External Auditor
The Company’s external auditor is PricewaterhouseCoopers (PwC).
PwC was appointed by the Company’s shareholders at the 2004
Annual Shareholders’ Meeting in accordance with the provisions of the
Companies Act 1993 (Act). PwC is automatically reappointed as auditor
under section 207T of the Act.
Attendance at the Annual Shareholders' Meeting
PwC, as auditor of the 2023 Financial Statements, has been invited to
attend this year’s Annual Shareholders’ Meeting and will be available
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 2023104105Governance Report
to answer questions about the conduct of the audit, preparation and content
of the auditor’s report, accounting policies adopted by the Company and the
independence of the auditor in relation to the conduct of the audit.
The Company’s corporate legal advisors, Russell McVeagh, will also attend the
Annual Shareholders’ Meeting.
Internal Audit
The Company has an internal audit function that is independent of the
Company’s external auditors. The internal audit function of the Company is
undertaken by Ernst & Young and the Company’s own internal audit teams.
The respective internal audit teams report to and are directed by the Audit and
Risk Committee.
Each year, the internal audit programme is approved by the Audit and Risk
Committee. The programme of audit work considers the most significant
areas of business risk in the Company and is developed following discussions
with Management, review of the business process model of the Company
and consideration of strategic risks relevant to the Company. The programme
also considers risks in relation to major projects that are planned or currently
under way.
The role of internal audit is to:
• Assess the design and operating effectiveness of controls governing key
operations, processes and business risks;
• Provide the Board with an assessment, independent of Management, as to
the adequacy of the Company’s internal operating and financial controls,
business processes, systems and practices; and
• Assist the Board in meeting its corporate governance and regulatory
responsibilities.
Principle 8 – SHAREHOLDER RIGHTS AND
RELATIONS
“The Board should respect the rights of shareholders and foster constructive
relationships with shareholders that encourage them to engage with the
issuer.”
The Company is committed to providing a high standard of communication
to its investors. The Company believes effective communication achieved
by equal access to timely, accurate and complete information that allows
investors to make informed assessments of the Company’s value and
prospects. Investor communication is governed by the Company’s Investor
Communications Policy.
The Company has an investor relations programme which includes
communication through:
• Periodic and continuous disclosure to the NZX;
• Annual reports;
• The Annual Shareholders’ Meeting;
• The Company’s website, which includes financial and operational
information, and key corporate governance information; and
• Analyst and investor briefings and roadshows.
Engagement with Investors
The Company values its dialogue with strategic stakeholders, institutional
and retail investors, and believes effective engagement benefits both
the Company and investors. Annual Shareholders' Meetings, analyst and
investor briefings and roadshows provide an important opportunity for this
dialogue. Shareholders have the opportunity to also submit questions and
comments through investors@thewarehouse.co.nz.
Website
The Company’s website contains a comprehensive set of investor-
related material and data, including NZX disclosures and media releases,
interim and annual reports, share price and dividend information,
shareholder meeting materials and the Company’s governance charters
and policies.
Annual Shareholders' Meeting (ASM)
The ASM provides an opportunity for Directors, the Group CEO,
the Leadership Squad, and the Company’s external auditor to meet
shareholders and answer any questions they may have.
The ASM is held at a convenient time and location. The 2022 ASM was
held as a hybrid meeting (being a combination of the physical meeting
as well as a virtual online meeting) on 25 November 2022. The Notice of
Meeting was published on 26 October 2022. The 2023 ASM will be held
on 24 November 2023.
In accordance with the Companies Act 1993 and NZX Listing Rules, the
Company refers any significant matters to shareholders for approval at
the ASM, and shareholders are given the opportunity to vote by proxy
ahead of the meeting or by polling if attending the meeting in person or
online.
ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION
The Company moved to electronic reporting in 2016, noting a key
component of the Company’s strategy is cost effectiveness and
minimising the Company’s impact on the environment. Shareholders can
request a hard copy of the Annual Report to be mailed to them free of
charge by contacting Computershare, the Company's share registrar.
Shareholders are encouraged to provide their email addresses to
Computershare to enable them to receive all other shareholder materials
electronically.
Computershare Investor Services Limited
Telephone: +64 9 488 8777
Email: enquiry@computershare.co.nz
Diversity, Inclusion and Wellbeing initiatives
Objective: Develop and celebrate our diversity
We continue to build our diversity, equity and inclusion across the business
through the implementation of our Diversity and Inclusion (D&I) strategy. This
is supported by regular D&I surveying of our teams including a D&I specific
questionnaire sent to all team members in October 2022. Moving forward, this
will be embedded as part of our quarterly engagement survey cycle.
Key achievements in FY23 include:
• Launched four team member-led community groups: Te Ao Māori, Pride,
Wāhine (women) Advocates and Neurodiversity. These groups meet regularly
and are supported by executive co-sponsors to discuss actions and initiatives
that bring to life each of these pillars;
• Held celebrations for our team members including Matariki, Māori Language
Week, International Women’s Day and Pride Month (including attendance at
Big Gay Out in Auckland);
• Rainbow Tick accreditation: Rainbow Tick Accredited since 2019;
• Supporting women: 70 team members graduated from the Lean In
programme, which aims to offer women peer-to-peer mentoring and support
networks;
• Māori competence: 28 senior leaders graduated from the Te Kaa programme,
Age representation
Board
Executives
Direct report to executive team
Other
Total (106 were non-disclosed)
AREA OF FOCUSGENDER
ObjectiveImprove representation of women at senior levels of the business
Target
2022
2023
50% of senior
leadership roles
held by women
Female representation by
role
Female MaleOther/Not
disclosed
Total % of
Female
Female MaleOther/Not
disclosed
Total % of
female
Board 3 4 - 7 42.9% 4 4 - 8 50.0%
Executives 2 8 - 10 20.0% 3 7 - 10 30.0%
Direct report to executive
team
25 23 - 48 52.1% 25 21 - 46 54.3%
Total Leadership 27 31 - 58 46.6% 28 28 - 56 50.0%
Other 6,360 4,782 198 11,340 56.1% 5,992 4,602 185 10,779 55.6%
Total employees
(excluding Board)
6,387 4,813 198 11,398 56.0% 6,020 4,630 185 10,835 55.6%
Female representation by
employee status
Female MaleOther/Not
disclosed
Total % of
female
PermanentNot disclosed in 2022 5,045 3,835 138 9,018 55.9%
Fixed term 91 91 12 194 46.9%
Casual 884 704 35 1,623 54.5%
Female representation by
full/part time employment
Female MaleOther/Not
disclosed
Total % of
female
Full timeNot disclosed in 2022 2,971 2,698 70 5,739 51.8%
Part time 2,165 1,228 80 3,473 62.3%
Casual 884 704 35 1,623 54.5%
100% Gender
pay equity
(undisclosed
gender data is
not included)
Category Number of employees in each
category
Median
pay
ratio
Gender
pay
gap
Number of employees
in each category
Median pay ratio Gender
pay gap
Group - Total 11,200100%0%10,650101% -1%
Leadership 5890%10%5689% 11%
SSO - Agile1,00399%1%93799%1%
SSO - Other51579%21%27777%23%
Stores 8,668103%-3%8,554100% 0%
Distribution Centres956100%0%82698% 2%
AREA OF FOCUSAGE
20222023
Under 30
years old
30-50
years old
Over 50
years old
# % # % # %
- - 3 38% 5 63%
- - 4 40% 6 60%
- - 30 65% 16 35%
5,094 47% 3,581 33% 1,998 18%
5,094 47% 3,618 33% 2,025 19%
Under 30
years old
30-50
years old
Over 50
years old
# % # % # %
- - 3 38% 5 63%
- - 4 40% 6 60%
- - 31 65% 17 35%
5,468 48% 3,75033% 2,018 18%
5,468 48% 3,787 33% 2,046 18%
which aims to develop foundational knowledge about Māori culture and
customs when leading teams and the business;
• Neurodiversity: Partnered with Brain Badge to offer a series of workshops on
types of neurodiversity and different ways of thinking.
Objective: Support team member wellbeing
Continued to support team members through physical, mental and financial
ways of working and wellbeing intiatives including offering confidential
coaching, counselling and wellbeing support through Benestar. Initiatives
included Auckland Round the Bays, Wellbeing Week, White Ribbon Day,
Gumboot Friday and Pink Shirt Day.
Objective: Continue to support our people through inclusive
policies and benefits
Our specific people policies include:
• Gender Transition Policy: 10 days paid leave;
• Family Violence Policy: 15 days paid leave and three free nights’
accommodation;
• Parental Leave Policy: 26 weeks full pay (government payment topped up),
Ease Back to Work and Be There for Partners leave; and
• Lifestyle Leave and Career Break options are available to team members
looking to spend more time with family, progress personal goals or travel.
CELEBRATING DIVERSITY AND INCLUSION
Diversity of gender, skill, age, experience and beliefs are valued and the
provision of equal opportunities for all employees and those looking to join
the Company is fundamental to the way we operate as a business. For the
year ended 30 July 2023 the Board is satisfied that the Company achieved its
gender diversity objectives and other measurable objectives. Details regarding
the Company’s Diversity and Inclusion Policy, goals and performance criteria are
detailed below.
The Group strives to create a workplace where our people can bring their whole
selves to work. Not only is this the right thing to do for our team members,
we also believe that a diverse team and an inclusive workplace leads to more
innovation, better decision-making, more opportunities for all our people and
the communities in which we operate, and better performance outcomes for the
Company. That is why we’re committed to continuously identifying ways we can
improve diversity and inclusivity.
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 2023106107Statutory Disclosures
SHARE DEALINGS BY DIRECTORS
During the financial year, the Directors disclosed in respect of section 148(2) of the Companies Act 1993 that they acquired or disposed of a relevant
interest in shares as follows:
DIRECTORS’ SHAREHOLDINGS AS AT 30 JULY 2023
At 30 July 2023 the following Directors, or entities related to them, held interests in Company shares:
Beneficial
Interest
Beneficial
Interest
Non-beneficial
Interest
Non-beneficial
Interest
Related
Party
Related
Party
202320222023202220232022
D Hamilton 3,5001,493,0571,493,057
J Journee 172,000172,000
J Raue 15,00015,000
R J Tindall 4,8004,80093,721,18493,721,184
J Withers105,41980,4191,493,0571,493,057
A Balfour13,0121,015,8751,015,875
Share Transaction
Date of
Transaction
Number of
Ordinary Shares
Acquired/
(Disposed)Consideration
J Withers 3 October 202210,000
On market purchase of shares at an
average price of $3.07 per share
J Withers29 March 202315,000
On market purchase of shares at an
average price of $1.90 per share
A Balfour4 October 202213,012
On market purchase of shares at an
average price of $3.07 per share
D Hamilton7 October 20223,500
On market purchase of shares at an
average price of $3.24 per share
Number of
Ordinary Shares
Percentage of
Ordinary Shares
Sir Stephen Robert Tindall93,687,096 27.01
The Tindall Foundation Inc73,920,496 21.31
James Pascoe Limited69,333,940 19.99
New Zealand Depository Nominee Limited 6,891,171 1.99
HSBC Nominees A/C NZ Superannuation Fund Nominees Limited - NZCSD 6,646,443 1.92
BNP Paribas Nominees (NZ) Limited - NZCSD 4,671,554 1.35
Stephen Robert Tindall & John Richard Avery & Brian Mayo-Smith (SR Tindall Family Account)3,778,149 1.09
Robert George Tindall & Stephen Robert Tindall & Pupuke Trustee Limited3,455,103 1.00
HSBC Nominees (New Zealand) Limited A/C State Street - NZCSD2,944,385 0.85
Custodial Services Limited 2,731,022 0.79
Citibank Nominees (New Zealand) Limited - NZCSD 2,461,237 0.71
Forsyth Barr Custodians Limited2,194,432 0.63
HSBC Nominees (New Zealand) Limited - NZCSD 1,843,591 0.53
Accident Compensation Corporation - NZCSD 1,477,302 0.43
FNZ Custodians Limited1,298,965 0.37
TEA Custodians Limited Client Property Trust Account - NZCSD 1,228,223 0.35
Simplicity Nominees Limited - NZCSD1,171,384 0.34
The Warehouse Management Trustee Company Limited1,015,875 0.29
Hobson Wealth Custodian Limited 988,422 0.28
Stephen Robert Tindall & John Richard Avery & Brian Mayo-Smith (Merani Account)752,798 0.22
282, 491,58881.45
Note: New Zealand Central Securities Depository Limited (NZCSD) is a depository system which allows electronic trading of members. As at 30 July 2023 total
holdings in NZCSD were 23,857,927 or 6.88% of shares on issue.
TWENTY LARGEST REGISTERED SHAREHOLDERS AS AT 30 JULY 2023
DISCLOSURES OF INTERESTS BY DIRECTORS
General disclosures
The following are particulars of general disclosures of interest given by the Directors of The Warehouse Group Limited
pursuant to section 140(2) of the Companies Act 1993 during FY23 and as at 30 July 2023.
DirectorEntityInterest
Joan WithersANZ Bank New Zealand Limited
On Being Bold Limited
Sky Network Television Limited
Appointments Panel Fonterra farmer-elected directors
Sweet Louise Foundation
Origin Energy Limited
Director
Director
Director
Member, appointed Chair
Trustee
Director
Antony BalfourLes Mills International Limited
RealNZ Limited
BLIS Technologies Limited
Pioneer Energy Limited
Bluelab Limited
Ravensdown Ventures Limited
Director
Director
Ceased to be a director
Director
Appointed as a director
Appointed as a director
John JourneeFarmlands Society
Colonial Motor Company Limited
CMC Workplace Savings Scheme Trustee Limited
Vanishing Point Limited
Quantiful Limited
West Auckland Trust Services Limited
Data Insights Group Limited
Director
Director
Director
Director
Ceased to be advisory board member
Director, appointed Deputy Chair
Appointed as an advisory board member
Dean HamiltonFulton Hogan Limited
Auckland International Airport Limited
Tappenden Holdings Limited
Ryman Healthcare Limited
Chair
Director
Director
Appointed director and Chair
Caroline RainsfordGoogle New ZealandCountry Director New Zealand
Julia RaueJade Software Corporation Limited
Southern Cross Healthcare Limited
Southern Cross Health Trust
Southern Cross Medical Care Society
Southern Cross Pet Insurance Limited
Southern Cross Benefits Limited
Rowdy Consulting Limited
NZ Rugby Appointments and Remuneration Committee
Global Women
Auckland Rugby Appointments Committee
MOVe Logistics Group Limited
MOVe Investments Limited
Director
Director
Trustee
Director
Ceased to be a director
Director
Director
Chair
Trustee
Ceased to be a member
Appointed as a director
Appointed as a director
Rachel TauleleiAPEC Business Advisory Council
Wellington Regional Stadium Trust
Movac
Movac Fund 5 LP
RLaw Limited
Oho 2021 Limited
ANZCO Foods Limited
Aotearoa Fisheries Limited t/a Moana New Zealand
Pupuri Taonga Limited
Kura Limited
Sealord Group Limited
Katihiku Trust
AFL Investments Limited
CWBG Limited
Fonterra Sustainability Panel
Member
Chair
Advisory Board Member
Limited Partner
Director
Director
Director
Director and Chair
Director
Director
Director
Trustee
Director
Director
Appointed as Chair
Robert TindallThe Tindall Foundation
Finn Lowery Foundation
Foundation Services Limited
K One W One Limited
K One W One (No.2) Limited
K One W One (No.3) Limited
K One W One (No.4) Limited
K One W One (No.5) Limited
K One W One (No.6) Limited
Trustee
Trustee
Director
Director
Director
Director
Director
Director
Appointed as a director
STATUTORY DISCLOSURES
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 2023108109Statutory Disclosures
Size of ShareholdingNumber of Shareholders PercentageNumber of Shares Percentage
1 - 1,000 4,27741.17%2,255,314 0.65%
1,001 - 5,000 3,77436.33%9,908,272 2.86%
5,001 - 10,000 1,13710.94%8,731,2412.52%
10,001 - 100,0001,10510.64%27,584,957 7.95%
100,000 and over 960.92%298,363,336 86.02%
10,389100% 346,843,120 100%
Geographic Distribution
Auckland and Northland4,00738.57%287,589,468 82.92%
Waikato and Central North Island 2,10720.28%13,381,8493.86%
Lower North Island and Wellington 1,45914.04%22,360,0806.45%
Canterbury, Marlborough and Westland 1,29512.47%8,189,236 2.36%
Otago and Southland 6085.85%6,238,485 1.79%
Australia 7707.41%8,435,356 2.43%
Other Overseas 1431.38%648,646 0.19%
10,389100% 346,843,120 100%
DISTRIBUTION OF SHAREHOLDERS AND HOLDINGS AS AT 30 JULY 2023
Relevant Interest (Ordinary Shares)Date of Notice
James Pascoe Limited69,333,94010 May 2018
Sir Stephen Tindall93,687,09619 March 2004
The Tindall Foundation73,920,49619 March 2004
SUBSTANTIAL PRODUCT HOLDERS
According to notices given to the Company under the Financial Markets Conduct Act 2013, as at 30 July 2023, the substantial product holders in the
Company and their relevant interests are noted below:
CompanyDirectors
1-Day Liquor LimitedJ Oram
Bond and Bond LimitedB Moors, J Oram
Boye Developments LimitedJ Oram
Chocolateworks NZ LimitedN Craig (R), A Razey, H Vetsch (R), K McKenzie, J Andersen, C Cole, J Hempstead
Eldamos Investments LimitedB Moors, J Oram
Eldamos Nominees LimitedJ Oram
Farran (Nine) LimitedK Gardiner, G Helsby, G Lane, J Oram
Lincoln West LimitedK Gardiner, G Helsby, G Lane, J Oram
Noel Leeming Finance LimitedB Moors
Noel Leeming Financial Services LimitedB Moors, J Oram
Noel Leeming Furniture LimitedB Moors, J Oram
Noel Leeming LimitedB Moors, J Oram
The Book Depot LimitedJ Oram
TheMarket.com LimitedN Grayston, J Oram, J Journee (R), R Tindall (R), D Hamilton (R)
The Warehouse Card LimitedJ Oram
The Warehouse Group Support Services LimitedJ Oram
The Warehouse Investments LimitedJ Oram
The Warehouse LimitedN Grayston, J Oram
The Warehouse Management Trustee Company LimitedJ Withers, A Balfour, D Hamilton
The Warehouse Management Trustee Company No.2 LimitedJ Withers, A Balfour, D Hamilton
The Warehouse Nominees LimitedB Moors, J Oram
The Warehouse Planit Trustees LimitedJ Withers
The Warehouse (Shanghai) Trading Company LimitedT Benyon, M Anderton, K Kramer
TWGI Operations LimitedJ Oram
Torpedo7 LimitedS West, J Oram
TWGA Pty LtdI McGill, B Moors, J Oram
CompanyDirectors
SUBSIDIARY COMPANY DIRECTORS
The following people held office as directors of subsidiary companies at 30 July 2023. Those who retired during the year are indicated with an (R).
TW House Sourcing Private Limited (India)K Kramer, T Benyon, M Anderton, C Srinivasan
TWL Australia Pty LimitedI McGill, B Moors, J Oram
TWP No.1 LimitedJ Oram
TWP No.4 LimitedB Moors, J Oram
TWP No.5 LimitedB Moors, J Oram
Warehouse Stationery LimitedB Moors
STOCK EXCHANGE LISTING
The ordinary shares of The Warehouse Group Limited are listed on the
New Zealand Exchange (NZX).
ORDINARY SHARES
The total number of voting securities of the Company on issue on 30 July
2023 was 346,843,120 fully paid ordinary shares.
RIGHTS ATTACHING TO SHARES
Clauses 20-22 of the Company’s Constitution set out the voting rights of
shareholders. Ordinary shares in the Company each carry a right to vote on
a poll at any general meeting of shareholders on any resolution. Holders of
ordinary shares may vote at a meeting in person, or by proxy, representative or
attorney. Voting may be conducted by voice, a show of hands or a poll. Each of
the Company’s ordinary shares entitles the holder to one vote.
ON-MARKET SHARE BUY-BACKS
The Company is not, at the date of this annual report, undertaking any on-
market share buy-backs.
ESCROW
Apart from the shares held under the Staff Purchase Plan, the Company has no
securities subject to an escrow agreement.
DONATIONS
In accordance with section 211(1)(h) of the Companies Act 1993, the Company
records that it donated $168,000 (2022: $106,000) to various charities during
the year. In line with board policy, no political contributions were made during
the year.
DIVIDENDS ON ORDINARY SHARES
The Warehouse Group Limited has paid dividends on its ordinary shares
almost every year since listing on the NZX in 1994, with the exception of 2020
due to the COVID-19 disruption to business. The Group’s current Dividend
Policy was approved by the Board in March 2021. The Group’s Dividend
Policy is to distribute at least 70% of the Group’s full-year adjusted net profit,
at the discretion of the Board and subject to trading performance, market
conditions and liquidity requirements.
On 27 September 2023 the Board declared a fully imputed final dividend of
8.0 cents per share, bringing the total dividend for the year to 8.0 cents per
share. The dividends will be fully imputed and will be paid on 1 December
2023 to all shareholders on the share register at the close of business on
16 November 2023.
AUDITOR
PricewaterhouseCoopers has continued to act as auditor of the Company
and has undertaken the audit of the financial statements for the year
ended 30 July 2023.
DISCIPLINARY ACTION
NZX has not taken any disciplinary action against the Company during the
period under review.
NZX WAIVERS
Details of all waivers granted and published by NZX within or relied by the
Company in the 12 months immediately preceding The Warehouse Group
Limited's balance date are available on the Company’s website
www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz.
Dividends20232022202120202019
Interim -10.013.00.09.0
Special--5.0--
Final8.010.017.50.08.0
Total8.020.035.50.017.0
InitiativesAssociations
Environmental
Climate Leaders Coalition 2022 Statement
Toitū CarbonReduce
Low Emissions Transport Working Group
Carbon Disclosure Project (CDP)
Soft Plastics Recycling Scheme
Climate Leaders Coalition (CLC)
Science Based Targets Initiative (SBTi)
Sustainable Business Council (SBC)
Energy Efficiency and Conservation Authority (EECA)
WasteMinz
The Packaging Forum
Chapter Zero New Zealand
Human Resource
and People
P-TECH
Reimaging Industry to Support Equality (RISE)
Tupu Toa
HRNZ
ServiceIQ
Brain Badge
Rainbow Tick
Product Sourcing
and Development
Better Cotton Initiative https://bettercotton.org/
Forest Stewardship Council https://fsc.org/en
New Zealand Business Round Table in China (NZBRiC)
Other
Vocational Education with Services Workforce Development Council (WDC)
Vocational Education training through Te Pukenga
MBIE - Future of Work
Retail NZ
Tertiary Education Commission / WDC
Te Pukenga
New Zealand Business and Parliamentary Trust
Business NZ
NZ Marketing Association
Digital Boost Alliance Aotearoa
INITIATIVES AND ASSOCIATIONS
Listed below are the external economic, environmental or social initiatives to which The Warehouse Group subscribes, and the main associations and national or
international advocacy organisations of which The Warehouse Group is a member.
Holders of each class of equity security as at 30 July 2023
Class of equity security
Number of
Holders
Number of
Shares or Rights
Ordinary shares10,389346,843,120
SUBSIDIARY COMPANY DIRECTORS contd
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 2023110111GRI Content Index
Standard DisclosureSection in this Annual ReportPage in this Annual Report
GRI 2: GENERAL DISCLOSURES 2021
2-1Organisation details
Directory
Financial Statements, Note 1.1
Store Map
117
68
14
2-2
Entities included in the organisation’s sustainability
reporting
Financial Statements, Note 1.1
68
2-3Reporting period, frequency and contact point
GRI Report
Financial Statements, Note 1.1
Directory
60
68
117
2-4Restatements of information
The Warehouse Group has restated its Scope 2 emissions in FY20 (base year), FY21 and
FY22, to account for the August 2022 MfE revised emission factors for electricity, which was
a change in methodology. E&Y have not provided assurance over the restated emissions for
prior years.
2-5External assurance
GRI Report
E&Y Limited Assurance Report
60
114-115
Toitū Envirocare have verified our GHG inventory and provided reasonable assurance in
accordance with ISO 14064-3:2019.
2-6Activities, value chain and other business relationships
GRI Report
Our Brands
Our Networks
Our Customers
Our Relationships
60
16-25
32-35
36-38
40-42
2-7EmployeesDiversity and Inclusion Report
105
2-8Workers who are not employees An insignificant portion of the Group's activities is performed by workers who are not
employees or who are seasonal workers. Employees through our supply chain are addressed
through this GRI2: Disclosures 2-6.
2-9Governance structure and composition
Our Board
Governance Report
92-93
96-100
2-10Nomination and selection of the highest governance body
Governance Report –
Board Composition and Performance
96-97
2-11Chair of the highest governance body
Governance Report –
Board Composition and Performance
96-97
2-12
Role of the highest governance body in overseeing the
management of impacts
Governance Report
ESS Committee Charter
Page 92-93, 96-98
www.thewarehousegroup.
co.nz/about-us/corporate-
governance
2-13Delegation of responsibility for managing impacts
Leadership Squad
Governance Report – Board Committees
94-95
98
2-14
Role of the highest governance body in sustainability
reporting
Governance Report – Board Committees
ESS Committee Charter
98
www.thewarehousegroup.
co.nz/about-us/corporate-
governance
2-15Conflicts of interest
Governance Report – Director Independence and conflicts
Statutory Disclosures
97
106-108
2-16Communication of critical concerns
Risk & Materiality
Our People
Governance Report – Ethical Standards, Risk Management
30-31
47
96,103
2-17Collective knowledge of the highest governance body
Governance Report – Board Skills Matrix97
The The Warehouse Group's Sustainability team provides regular updates on how sustainable
development impact the Group’s development and risks. During the year, KPMG presented on
the XRB climate risk scenarios to the
Environmental and Social Sustainability Committee.
2-18
Evaluation of the performance of the highest governance
body
Governance Report96-98
2-19Remuneration policiesRemuneration Report99-103
2-20Process to determine remunerationRemuneration Report99-103
GENERAL DISCLOSURESGENERAL DISCLOSURES contd
2-21Annual compensation ratioRemuneration Report102
2-22Statement of sustainable development strategyOur Environment52-59
2-23Policy commitmentswww.thewarehousegroup.co.nz/about-us/corporate-governance
2-24Embedding policy commitments
Governance Report – Ethical Standards, Reporting and
Disclosure, Risk Management.
Diversity and Inclusion Report
96, 99,
103,
105
2-25Processes to remediate negative impacts
Risk and Materiality
Governance Report – Risk Management
30-31
103
2-26Mechanisms for seeking advice and raising concernsGovernance Report – Ethical Standards96
2-27Compliance with laws and regulations
Group subsidiary TheMarket.com Limited, trading as 1-day, pleaded guilty to eight
representative charges under section 10 of the Fair Trading Act 1986, relating to website
representations about the amount of time available to purchase items on the website and the
quantity of stock available to purchase. It was fined $840,000 in September 2022.
2-28Membership associationsInitiatives and Associations109
2-29Approach to stakeholder engagementsOur Relationships40-42
2-30Collective bargaining agreementsOur People46
Standard DisclosureSection in this Annual ReportPage in this Annual Report
GRI 3: MATERIAL TOPICS 2021
3-1Process to determine material topicsGRI Report
60
3-2List of material topicsGRI Report
60
3-3Management of material topicsGRI Report
61
Standard DisclosureSection in this Annual ReportPage in this Annual Report
GRI 205: ANTI-CORRUPTION 2016
3-3Management of material topics
GRI Report
Risk and Materiality
Our People
Governance Report – Ethical Standards
61
30-31
44-47
96
205-2
Communication and training about anti-corruption policies
and procedures
Our People
Our Relationships
45
40-42
Communication and training provided to employees is not available by employee level but is
provided between SSO and store team members.
205-3Confirmed incidents of corruption and actions taken
Seven supplier bribery attempts were bought to our attention in FY23 with consequential
escalation and penalties issued. We are not aware of any other bribery incidents.
GRI 206: ANTI-COMPETITIVE BEHAVIOUR 2016
3-3Management of material topics
GRI Report
Risk and Materiality
Governance Report – Ethical Standards
Governance Report – Risk Management
61
30-31
96
103
206-1
Legal actions for anti-competitive behaviour, anti-trust
and monopoly practices
We are not aware of any legal cases against the organisation regarding anti-competitive
behaviour and violations of anti-trust and monopoly legislation during the reporting period.
MATERIAL TOPICS
TOPIC DISCLOSURES
Economic
Standard DisclosureSection in this Annual ReportPage in this Annual Report
GRI 2: GENERAL DISCLOSURES 2021
GRI CONTENT INDEX
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 2023112113GRI Content Index
Standard DisclosureSection in this Annual ReportPage in this Annual Report
GRI 302: ENERGY 2016
3-3Management of material topics
GRI Report
Integrated Report
Governance Report –
ESS Committee
61
28-29
98
302-1Energy consumption within the organisationOur Environment
57
302-3Energy intensityOur Environment
57
302-4
Reduction of energy consumptionOur Environment
57
For further information, please refer to https://www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz/sustainability/emissions-inventory-report
GRI 305: EMISSIONS 2016
3-3Management of material topics
GRI Report
Integrated Report
Financial Capital - Sustainability Linked Loan
Governance Report –
ESS Committee
61
28-29
51
98
305-1
Direct (scope 1) GHG emissionsOur Environment54, 56, 58
305-2
Energy indirect (Scope 2) GHG emissionsOur Environment54, 56, 58
305-3
Other indirect (Scope 3) GHG emissionsOur Environment54, 56, 58
305-4
GHG emissions intensityOur Environment56
305-5
Reduction of GHG emissionsOur Environment56
For further information, please refer to https://www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz/sustainability/emissions-inventory-report
GRI 306: WASTE 2020
3-3Management of material topics
GRI Report
Integrated Report
Governance Report – ESS Committee
61
28-29
98
306-1Waste generation and significant waste-related impactsOur Environment 58
306-2Management of significant waste-related impactsOur Environment 58
306-3Waste generatedOur Environment 58
306-4Waste diverted from disposalOur Environment 58
Offsite waste is not reported because all operational waste is generated onsite.
306-5Waste directed to disposalOur Environment 58
Offsite waste is not reported because all operational waste is generated onsite.
A breakdown of waste directed to disposal by incineration with and without energy
recovery is not reported because we do not receive this information from our waste
management suppliers.
GRI 307: ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE 2016
3-3Management of material topics
GRI Report
Integrated Report
Governance Report – ESS
Committee
61
28-29
98
307-1Non-compliance with environmental laws and regulations
We are not aware of any incidents related to non-compliance with environmental laws and
regulations during the reporting period.
308-1
New suppliers that were screened using environmental
criteria
Our Relationships
Our Environment
40-42
54
308-2
Negative environmental impacts in the supply chain and
actions taken
Our Relationships
Our Environment
40-42
54
For further infromation, please refer to The Warehouse Group Ethical Sourcing Report: https://www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz/sustainability/responsible-sourcing
Standard DisclosureSection in this Annual ReportPage in this Annual Report
GRI 403: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY (2018)
3-3Management of material topics
GRI Report
Governance Report – Board Committees:
Health, Safety and Wellbeing Committee
61
98
403-6Promotion of worker health
Our People, Looking after our teams in 2023
Our People, Wellbeing
45-46
47
403-9Work-related injuries
Our People, Health, Safety, and Wellbeing
Chair’s Report
46-47
7
GRI 404: TRAINING AND EDUCATION (2016)
3-3Management of material topics
GRI Report
Our People
61
44-47
404-1
Average hours of training per year per employeeOur People45
404-2
Programs for upgrading employee skills and transition
assistance programmes
Our People44-45
GRI 405: DIVERSITY AND EQUAL OPPORTUNITY (2016)
3-3Management of material topics
GRI Report
Our People
Governance Report – Board Committees:
People and Remuneration Committee
Environmental and Social Sustainability Committee
61
44-47
98
98
405-1Diversity of governance bodies and employeesDiversity and Inclusion Report105
405-2Ratio of basic salary and remuneration of women to menDiversity and Inclusion Report105
GRI 407: FREEDOM OF ASSOCIATION AND COLLECTIVE BARGAINING (2016)
3-3Management of material topics
GRI Report
Our Relationships
Governance Report – Ethical Standards
Ethical Sourcing Policy:
www.thewarehouse.co.nz/suppliers-ethical-sourcing
61
40-42
96
407-1
Operations and suppliers in which the right to freedom of
association and collective bargaining may be at risk
Our People
Our Relationships
46
40-42
GRI 408: CHILD LABOUR (2016)
3-3 Management of material topics
GRI Report
Governance Report – Ethical Standards
Ethical Sourcing Policy:
www.thewarehouse.co.nz/suppliers-ethical-sourcing
61
96
408-1
Operations and suppliers at significant risk for incidents of
child labour
Our Relationships40-42
One child labour case was raised through these audits, occurring during the school
holidays with a child accompanying the parent. The factory requested the children be
returned home with supervision and the relationship with this factory was terminated.
GRI 409: FORCED OR COMPULSORY LABOUR (2016)
3-3Management of material topics
GRI Report
Governance Report – Ethical Standards
Ethical Sourcing Policy:
www.thewarehouse.co.nz/suppliers-ethical-sourcing
61
96
409-1
Operations and suppliers at significant risk for incidents of
forced or compulsory labour
Our Relationships40-42
GRI 414: SUPPLIER SOCIAL ASSESSMENT (2016)
3-3Management of material topics
GRI Report
Governance Report – Ethical Standards
Ethical Sourcing Policy:
www.thewarehouse.co.nz/suppliers-ethical-sourcing
61
96
414-1New suppliers that were screened using social criteriaOur Relationships41-42
414-2
Negative social impacts in the supply chain and actions
taken
Our Relationships41-42
For further infromation on GRI 408, 409 and 414, please refer to The Warehouse Group Ethical Sourcing Report:
https://www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz/sustainability/responsible-sourcing
TOPIC DISCLOSURES
TOPIC DISCLOSURES contd
Environmental
Social
GRI CONTENT INDEX
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 2023114115Ernst & Young Report
SCOPE
Ernst & Young Limited (‘EY’) has been engaged by TWG to perform a ‘limited
assurance engagement,’ as defined by International Standards on Assurance
Engagements, here after referred to as the engagement, over TWG’s selected
non-financial disclosures (‘the Subject Matter’) prepared by TWG in its 2023
Integrated Report (‘the Report’) for the year ended 31 July 2023.
The relevant metrics are as follows:
• GRI 305-1: Direct (Scope 1) GHG emissions
• GRI 305-2: Energy Indirect (Scope 2) GHG emissions
• GRI 305-5: Reduction of GHG emissions
• GRI 306-3: Waste Generated
• GRI 306-4: Waste diverted from disposal
• GRI 306-5: Waste directed to disposal
CRITERIA APPLIED BY TWG
In preparing the Subject Matter, TWG applied the Global Reporting Initiative’s
Sustainability Reporting Standards (‘GRI’) (‘the Criteria’).
These standards are:
• GRI 305: Emissions 2016
• GRI 306: Waste 2020
• The Greenhouse Gas Protocol (‘GHG Protocol’)
• Emissions factors: New Zealand Ministry for the Environment, Measuring
Emissions: A Guide for Organisations (2023)
TWG is responsible for selecting the Criteria, and for presenting the Subject
Matter in accordance with that Criteria, in all material respects.
This responsibility includes establishing and maintaining internal controls,
maintaining adequate records and making estimates that are relevant to
the preparation of the subject matter, such that it is free from material
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.
EY’S RESPONSIBILITIES
Our responsibility is to express a conclusion on the presentation of the
Subject Matter based on the evidence we have obtained.
Our engagement was conducted in accordance with the International
Standard for Assurance Engagements: Assurance Engagements Other than
Audits or Reviews of Historical Financial Information (‘ISAE (NZ) 3000’) and
International Standard for Assurance Engagements: Assurance Engagements
on Greenhouse Gas Statements (‘ISAE (NZ) 3410’) and the terms of reference
for this engagement as agreed with TWG on 20 July 2023. Those standards
ASSURANCE CONCLUSION
Based on our limited assurance procedures described below, nothing has come to our attention, that causes us to believe that selected non-financial
disclosures prepared by The Warehouse Group (“TWG”) in its ‘2023 Integrated Report’, is not reported and presented, in all material respects, in
accordance with the criteria defined below.
INDEPENDENT LIMITED ASSURANCE STATEMENT TO THE MANAGEMENT
AND DIRECTORS OF THE WAREHOUSE GROUP LIMITED
require that we plan and perform our engagement to obtain limited
assurance about whether, in all material respects, the Subject Matter
is presented in accordance with the Criteria, and to issue a report. The
nature, timing, and extent of the procedures selected depend on our
judgment, including an assessment of the risk of material misstatement,
whether due to fraud or error.
We believe that the evidence obtained is sufficient and appropriate to
provide a basis for our limited assurance conclusion.
DESCRIPTION OF PROCEDURES PERFORMED
Procedures performed in a limited assurance engagement vary in nature
and timing from, and are less in extent than for a reasonable assurance
engagement. Consequently the level of assurance obtained in a limited
assurance engagement is substantially lower than the assurance that
would have been obtained had a reasonable assurance engagement
been performed. Our procedures were designed to obtain a limited level
of assurance on which to base our conclusion and do not provide all the
evidence that would be required to provide a reasonable level of assurance.
Although we considered the effectiveness of management’s internal controls
when determining the nature and extent of our procedures, our assurance
engagement was not designed to provide assurance on internal controls.
Our procedures did not include testing controls or performing procedures
relating to checking aggregation or calculation of data within IT systems.
The procedures we performed were based on our professional judgement
and included, but were not limited to, the following:
• Conducting interviews with key personnel to understand the process for
collecting, collating and reporting the selected non-financial disclosures
during the reporting period
• Gaining an understanding of the basis for calculating and reporting GHG
emissions
• Checking that calculations had been applied in accordance with the
methodologies outlined in the Criteria
• Undertaking analytical review procedures to support the reasonableness
of the data
• Identifying and testing assumptions that support calculations
• Checking emissions factors and considered their consistency with the
Criteria
• Reviewing the presentation of the information in the Report.
We believe that the evidence obtained is sufficient and appropriate to
provide a basis for our limited assurance conclusions.
LIMITATIONS ON SCOPE
There are inherent limitations in performing assurance – for example,
assurance engagements are based on selective testing of the
information being examined – and it is possible that fraud, error, or
non-compliance may occur and not be detected. There are additional
inherent risks associated with assurance over nonfinancial information
including reporting against standards which require information to be
assured against source data compiled using definitions and estimation
methods that are developed by the reporting entity. Finally, adherence
to ISAE 3000 (NZ) is subjective and will be interpreted differently by
different stakeholder groups. Our assurance was limited to the Subject
Matter and did not include statutory financial statements.
RESTRICTED USE
This report is intended solely for the information and use of The
Warehouse Group Limited and in accordance with the terms of
reference for this engagement as agreed on 20 July 2023. It is not
intended to be and should not be used by anyone other than those
specified parties.
Ernst & Young Limited
27 September 2023
Ernst & Young Limited
2 Takutai Square
Britomart
Auckland 1010
PO Box 2146 Auckland 1140
A member firm of Ernst & Young Global LimitedA member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited
Tel: +64 9 377 4790
Fax: +64 9 309 8137
ey.com/nz
LEVEL OF ASSURANCE
A limited assurance engagement consists of making enquiries
and applying analytical, and other evidence gathering
procedures sufficient for us to obtain a meaningful level
of assurance as the basis for providing a negative form
of conclusion. The procedures performed depend on the
assurance practitioner’s judgement including the risk of
material misstatement of the specific activity data, whether
due to fraud or error. While we considered the effectiveness
of Management’s internal controls when determining the
nature and extent of our procedures, these procedures were
not designed to provide assurance on internal controls. We
believe that the evidence we have obtained is sufficient and
appropriate to provide a basis for our conclusion.
OUR INDEPENDENCE AND QUALITY CONTROL
We have complied with the independence and other ethical
requirements of the Professional and Ethical Standard 1 International
Code of Ethics for Assurance Practitioners (including International
Independence Standards) (New Zealand) issued by the New
Zealand Auditing and Assurance Standards Board, which is founded
on fundamental principles of integrity, objectivity, professional
competence and due care, confidentiality and professional behaviour.
The firm applies Professional and Ethical Standard 3, which requires
the firm to design, implement and operate a system of quality
management including policies or procedures regarding compliance
with ethical requirements, professional standards and applicable legal
and regulatory requirements.
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 2023116117Directory
Board of Directors
Joan Withers (Chair)
Tony Balfour
Dean Hamilton
John Journee
Caroline Rainsford
Julia Raue
Rachel Taulelei
Robbie Tindall
Group Chief Executive Officer
Nick Grayston
Group Chief Financial Officer
Jonathan Oram
Company Secretary
Erin Vercoe
Place of Business
26 The Warehouse Way
Northcote, Auckland 0627
PO Box 33470, Takapuna
Auckland 0740, New Zealand
Telephone: +64 9 489 7000
Facsimile: +64 9 489 7444
Website: www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz
Registered Office
C/- BDO
Level 4, 4 Graham Street
PO Box 2219
Auckland 1140, New Zealand
New Zealand Business Number (NZBN)
New Zealand Incorporation: 9429038766633
Auditor
PricewaterhouseCoopers
Private Bag 92162
Auckland 1142, New Zealand
Stock Exchange Listing
NZX trading code: WHS
Share Registrar
Computershare Investor Services Limited
Level 2, 159 Hurstmere Road, Takapuna
Private Bag 92119, Auckland 1142, New Zealand
Telephone: +64 9 488 8777
Facsimile: +64 9 488 8787
Email: enquiry@computershare.co.nz
Website: www.computershare.co.nz/investorcentre
Shareholder Enquiries
Shareholders with enquiries regarding share transactions, changes of
address or dividend payments should contact the Share Registrar.
Shareholdings can be managed electronically by using Computershare’s
secure website, www.computershare.co.nz/investorcentre. Functions
include viewing your share balance, address changes, payment
and tax information and updating payment instructions and your
communications preference.
DIRECTORY
The Warehouse Group Integrated Annual Report 2023118119
THEWAREHOUSEGROUP.CO.NZ
HELPING KIWIS LIVE
BETTER EVERY DAY
---
Name of issuer THE WAREHOUSE GROUP LIMITED
Financial product description Ordinary Shares (346,843,120)
NZX ticker code WHS
ISIN NZWHSE0001S6
Type of distribution Full Year
X
Quarterly
(please mark with an X in the relevant box/es) Half Year Special
DRP Applies Not Applicable
Record date 16 November 2023
Ex-Date (one business day before the record date) 15 November 2023
Payment date 01 December 2023
Total monies associated with the distribution $27,747,450
Source of distribution Operating cashflows
Currency New Zealand dollars
Gross distribution $0.11111111
Gross taxable amount $0.11111111
Total cash distribution $0.08000000
Excluded amount $0.00000000
Supplementary distribution amount $0.01411765
Is this distribution imputed? Fully imputed
28%
$0.03111111
$0.00555556
Date of release through MAP
If fully or partially imputed, please state imputation
rate as % applied
The Warehouse Group Limited
Corporate Action Notice (for a Distribution)
Section 1: Issuer Information
Section 2: Distribution amounts per financial product
Section 3: Imputation credits and resident withholding tax
Imputation tax credits per financial product
Resident withholding tax amount per financial product
Section 5: Authority for this announcement
Name of person authorised to
make this announcement
Jonathan Oram (Group Chief Financial Officer)
Contact person for this announcement Jonathan Oram (Group Chief Financial Officer)
Contact phone number (09) 489 7000
Contact email address Jonathan.Oram@thewarehouse.co.nz
28 September 2023
Section 4: Distribution re-investment plan (if applicable)
Not Applicable
---
Quarterly Sales
Reporting Period 52 weeks to 30 July 2023
Previous Reporting Period (2022) 52 weeks to 31 July 2022
Previous Reporting Period (2021) 52 weeks to 1 August 2021
Quarterly Retail Sales information:
Fourth quarter sales
SalesSalesSales
(1 May 2023 to 30 July 2023)
202320222021
($ Million)($ Million)($ Million)
The Warehouse
434.6 429.6 427.7
+ 1.2 % + 1.6 %
Warehouse Stationery58.8 60.3 66.2
- 2.5 % - 11.2 %
Noel Leeming256.4 257.5 272.0
- 0.4 % - 5.7 %
Torpedo730.4 37.5 38.5
- 18.9 % - 21.0 %
Total Group
1
784.6 792.7 815.1
- 1.0 % - 3.7 %
Year to date sales
SalesSalesSales
(1 August 2022 to 30 July 2023)
202320222021
($ Million)($ Million)($ Million)
The Warehouse
1,892.4 1,726.9 1,804.9
+ 9.6 % + 4.8 %
Warehouse Stationery248.6 249.7 274.6
- 0.4 % - 9.5 %
Noel Leeming1,061.0 1,096.7 1,128.2
- 3.3 % - 6.0 %
Torpedo7162.2 171.5 158.7
- 5.4 % + 2.2 %
Total Group
1
3,399.1 3,294.3 3,414.6
+ 3.2 % - 0.5 %
Store Numbers
20232022202320222023202220232022
Start Quarter 4
878967 69 66 70 25 23
End Quarter 4
888967 68 66 68 25 24
20232022202320222023202220232022
Start Quarter 4
468,689 482,016 82,619 84,516 50,660 60,748 33,179 29,900
End Quarter 4
472,358 479,900 84,186 83,064 50,203 56,638 35,953 31,200
- 1 - 1
- - - 1
- 1 - -
- - - 1
Note:
The Warehouse
Warehouse Stationery
Noel Leeming
Torpedo7
1) Total Group sales includes TheMarket segment, eliminations and other Group operations in addition to the 4 main retail operations detailed above.
Store
extension/
reduction
Store footprint (Square
Metres)
The WarehouseNoel Leeming
Warehouse StationeryTorpedo7
Store changes during the quarter
New
store
Replacement
store
Store
closure
The WarehouseNoel Leeming
Warehouse StationeryTorpedo7
The Warehouse Group Limited
Change in
sales
vs 2022
Change in
sales
vs 2021
Change in
sales
vs 2022
Change in
sales
vs 2021
Data sourced from publicly available filings. Our datasets may not be complete. Automated analysis can produce errors. If you believe any data on this page is incorrect, please contact us at hello@nzxplorer.co.nz. For informational purposes only. Not investment advice.
Other issuers discussed similar conditions around this time
Matched by meaning across NZX announcement text, not keywords — based on our semantic index of announcement bodies.
- FWL — Foley Wines Limited: FWL Full Year 2023 and Annual Report 2023 Published2023-08-23
“Results announcement Results for announcement to the market Name of issuer Foley Wines Limited Reporting Period 12 months to 30 June 2023 Previous Reporting Period 12 months to 30 June 2022 Currency NZD Amount (000s) Percentage change Revenue from continuing operations $…”
- HLG — Hallenstein Glasson Holdings Limited: HLG Full Year Results for the period ending 1 August 20232023-09-28
“Results announcement Results for announcement to the market Name of issuer Hallenstein Glasson Holdings Limited Reporting Period 12 months to 1 August 2023 Previous Reporting Period 12 months to 1 August 2022 Currency NZD…”
- FRW — Freightways Group Limited: Annual Shareholders Meeting – including trading update2023-10-25
“Express Package & Business Mail –For the financial year ended 30 June 2023 FY23 $m FY22 $m Change % Operating Revenue 911.1689.032.2 EBITDA (non-GAAP) 169.8142.219.4 EBITA (non-GAAP) 125.4107.516.7 EBITA Margin 13.8%15.6% NPAT (GAAP) 78.170.011.6 NOTES i.Results in this table are…”